1.

Basic Salesforce QA Interview Questions

Q1. What is Salesforce?
Answer:
Salesforce is a cloud-based Customer Relationship Management (CRM) platform that helps businesses manage customer relationships,
sales, marketing, and service operations. It offers various cloud services like Sales Cloud, Service Cloud, Marketing Cloud, and Commerce
Cloud to enhance business processes.

Q2. What is Salesforce Testing?

Answer:
Salesforce Testing ensures that all functionalities, integrations, and customizations in a Salesforce application work as expected. It includes:
 Functional Testing (Blackbox, Regression)
 Unit Testing (Apex Testing)
 Integration Testing (API & Middleware validation)
 User Acceptance Testing (UAT)
 Performance & Security Testing

Q3. Why is Salesforce Testing important?

Answer:
 Ensures that customizations and integrations do not break existing functionalities.
 Verifies data security, validation rules, and automation (flows, triggers, workflows).
 Prevents bugs in complex Salesforce implementations.
 Improves user experience and system performance.
Q4. What are the challenges in Salesforce Testing?
Answer:
1. Frequent Releases: Salesforce has three major updates per year, requiring constant testing.

2. Dynamic UI: Salesforce’s Lightning UI frequently updates, causing UI test automation issues.

3. Third-party Integrations: Salesforce integrates with ERP, Marketing, and Payment systems, making API testing critical.

4. Customization Complexity: Custom objects, triggers, and workflows add complexity.

5. Test Data Management: Limited access to real production data makes testing difficult.

2. Functional Testing Questions

Q5. What are the different types of testing performed in Salesforce?
Answer:
 Functional Testing: Validates business logic (Roles, Profiles, Workflows).
 Regression Testing: Ensures that new changes do not break existing functionalities.
 UAT (User Acceptance Testing): Confirms if Salesforce meets business needs.
 Integration Testing: Checks API interactions with external systems.
 Performance Testing: Ensures response time and scalability.
 Security Testing: Validates permissions, data visibility, and encryption.

Q6. What is Blackbox Testing and how is it applied in Salesforce?

Answer:
Blackbox Testing focuses on verifying functional requirements without knowing the internal code. Examples in Salesforce:
  Validating UI elements (buttons, links, forms)
 Testing security roles and permissions
 Executing workflows and process automation rules

Q7. What is Whitebox Testing, and how does it apply to Salesforce?

Answer:
Whitebox Testing is code-level testing, used mainly by developers to validate:
 Apex classes & triggers
 Code coverage (at least 75% required by Salesforce)
 SOQL queries & governor limits

3. Automation Testing Questions

Q8. What are the best tools for Salesforce Test Automation?
Answer:
1. Selenium: Best for UI automation of Salesforce Classic & Lightning.

2. Provar: A dedicated Salesforce testing tool with inbuilt Salesforce components.

3. Tosca: Scriptless automation for Salesforce applications.

4. Testim: AI-based UI testing tool for Salesforce.

5. JMeter: Used for Salesforce Performance Testing.

Q9. Can you automate Salesforce Testing? If yes, how?

Answer:
Yes, Salesforce testing can be automated using:
 Selenium WebDriver with Java/Python for UI testing.
 REST Assured for API testing (Salesforce REST/SOAP APIs).
 TestNG/Cucumber for behavior-driven test execution.
 Provar for end-to-end test automation.

Q10. How do you handle dynamic elements in Salesforce UI Automation?

Answer:
1. Use XPath & CSS Selectors instead of direct element IDs.

2. Use Explicit Waits to handle dynamic loading times.

3. Implement JavaScript Executor for interacting with shadow DOM elements.

4. Utilize Salesforce-specific locators (like data-aura-class).

4. API & Integration Testing Questions

Q11. What are Salesforce APIs, and how do you test them?
Answer:
Salesforce provides APIs for external integrations:
1. REST API – Lightweight, JSON-based API for web and mobile apps.

2. SOAP API – XML-based API for enterprise applications.

3. Bulk API – Used for handling large volumes of data.

 4. Metadata API – For managing Salesforce metadata.

Testing Approach:
 Use Postman to send API requests and validate responses.
 Verify authentication using OAuth tokens.
 Check CRUD operations on Salesforce records.

Q12. How do you validate API responses in Salesforce testing?

Answer:
1. Verify Status Code (200 OK, 201 Created, 400 Bad Request, etc.).

2. Check Response Body (JSON/XML) for correct values.

3. Validate Headers (Content-Type, Authorization).

4. Perform Schema Validation using JSON Schema tools.

5. Test Error Handling by sending invalid requests.

5. Performance & Security Testing Questions

Q13. How do you perform Performance Testing in Salesforce?
Answer:
 Use JMeter to simulate concurrent user loads.
 Check SOQL governor limits to avoid CPU timeouts.
 Validate Lightning page load time under heavy traffic.
  Monitor API response times under peak loads.

Q14. What security tests should be performed in Salesforce?

Answer:
1. Role-Based Access Testing: Verify that users only see what they are authorized for.

2. Data Encryption Testing: Check if sensitive data is encrypted at rest and in transit.

3. Session Management Testing: Validate session timeouts and multi-factor authentication (MFA).

4. SOQL Injection Testing: Ensure SOQL queries are secured against injection attacks.

6. Scenario-Based Questions
Q15. A business user reports that they cannot see a specific record. How would you debug this issue?
Answer:
1. Check Object & Field-Level Security (Profiles, Permission Sets).

2. Verify Record Ownership & Sharing Rules.

3. Review Role Hierarchy & OWD settings.

4. Use Debug Logs & Field History Tracking.

Q16. How would you validate a Workflow Rule in Salesforce?

Answer:
1. Create a test record that matches the workflow criteria.

2. Verify if email alerts, field updates, or outbound messages are triggered.

 3. Check Apex debug logs for execution trace.

4. Validate workflow rule behavior in multiple scenarios.

Final Tips for Salesforce QA Interviews

 Understand Salesforce Security Models (Profiles, Roles, Sharing Rules).
 Practice API Testing using Postman & REST Assured.
 Work on Automation Frameworks like Selenium + TestNG.
 Stay updated with Salesforce Release Notes (3 updates per year).
Would you like me to provide sample test cases or automation scripts as well? 😊

1. Basic Salesforce Questions

Q1. What is Salesforce?
Answer:
Salesforce is a cloud-based Customer Relationship Management (CRM) platform that helps businesses manage customer relationships,
sales, marketing, and service operations. It provides various cloud services like:
 Sales Cloud – for managing sales processes
 Service Cloud – for customer support
 Marketing Cloud – for email and social media marketing
 Commerce Cloud – for e-commerce
Q2. What are the key features of Salesforce?
Answer:
 Multi-Tenancy: Multiple users share the same infrastructure.
 Customizable: Allows customization using Apex, Visualforce, and Lightning.
 Cloud-Based: No on-premise installation required.
 Automation: Provides workflows, process builder, and flows.
 AppExchange: A marketplace for Salesforce apps.

Q3. What are Objects in Salesforce?

Answer:
Objects in Salesforce are database tables that store data. There are two types:
 Standard Objects: Predefined by Salesforce (e.g., Accounts, Contacts, Opportunities).
 Custom Objects: Created by users to store custom data.

2. Salesforce Admin Interview Questions

Q4. What are Profiles and Permission Sets in Salesforce?
Answer:
 Profiles: Define what a user can do (CRUD permissions, field access, etc.).
 Permission Sets: Grant additional permissions without changing a user’s profile.

Q5. What are Organization-Wide Defaults (OWD)?

Answer:
OWD settings control the default access level for records:
 Private: Users can only see their own records.
 Public Read Only: Everyone can see but not edit records.
 Public Read/Write: Everyone can see and edit records.

Q6. What is a Role Hierarchy in Salesforce?

Answer:
Role hierarchy controls data visibility in Salesforce:
 Higher roles can see records owned by users below them.
 It does not override object-level security.

Q7. What is a Workflow Rule?

Answer:
A Workflow Rule automates actions (field updates, emails, tasks) based on conditions.
Example:
If an Opportunity Stage changes to “Closed Won,” send a congratulatory email.

3. Salesforce Developer Interview Questions

Q8. What is Apex in Salesforce?
Answer:
Apex is a programming language for writing backend logic in Salesforce. It is similar to Java and runs on the Lightning Platform.

Q9. What is a Trigger in Salesforce?

Answer:
A Trigger is an Apex script that executes automatically before or after a DML operation (Insert, Update, Delete, Undelete) on a Salesforce
object.
Example:
 A trigger on Account automatically creates a Contact when a new Account is created.

Q10. What are Governor Limits in Salesforce?

Answer:
Governor Limits enforce multi-tenancy and resource allocation.
Examples:
 SOQL Query Limit: 100 queries per transaction.
 DML Statements Limit: 150 per transaction.
 CPU Time Limit: 10 seconds per transaction.

Q11. What are Batch Apex and Future Methods?

Answer:
 Batch Apex: Used for handling large data volumes asynchronously.
 Future Methods: Execute long-running processes asynchronously (e.g., API calls).

Q12. What is the difference between SOQL and SOSL?

Feature SOQL (Salesforce Object Query Language) SOSL (Salesforce Object Search Language)
Query Type Structured Query Full-Text Search
Returns Records from one object Data from multiple objects
Used In Triggers, Apex Global Search, Apex
4. Salesforce QA Interview Questions
Q13. What are the types of testing in Salesforce?
Answer:
 Functional Testing: Validates Salesforce business logic (Profiles, Workflows, etc.).
 Regression Testing: Ensures new updates don’t break existing functionality.
 User Acceptance Testing (UAT): End-users test system usability.
 Integration Testing: Verifies data flow between Salesforce and external systems.
 Performance Testing: Ensures response time under load.

Q14. How do you automate Salesforce testing?

Answer:
Tools used:
 Selenium – for UI automation
 Provar – Salesforce-specific automation tool
 Postman – for API testing
 JMeter – for performance testing

Q15. What is API Testing in Salesforce?

Answer:
API Testing validates Salesforce REST/SOAP APIs by:
 Sending requests via Postman.
  Checking response format (JSON/XML).
 Validating status codes (200, 400, 500).

5. Salesforce Integration Interview Questions

Q16. What are the different APIs in Salesforce?
Answer:
 REST API: Lightweight, uses JSON.
 SOAP API: Enterprise-level, XML-based.
 Bulk API: Used for large data migrations.
 Streaming API: Real-time data updates.

Q17. How do you integrate Salesforce with third-party applications?

Answer:
 Using APIs: REST/SOAP API
 Middleware (Mulesoft, Dell Boomi): For complex integrations
 Outbound Messaging: Sends real-time updates
 Apex Callouts: Calls external services from Apex

Q18. How does OAuth 2.0 work in Salesforce authentication?

Answer:
OAuth 2.0 provides secure authentication for API calls using:
 Access Tokens
  Refresh Tokens
 Authorization Grants
Example:
A mobile app connects to Salesforce using an OAuth token instead of storing login credentials.

6. Scenario-Based Questions
Q19. A user cannot see a record they should have access to. How would you troubleshoot?
Answer:
1. Check Profile & Permission Set for object access.

2. Verify Role Hierarchy & Sharing Rules.

3. Review Organization-Wide Defaults (OWD).

4. Use Debug Logs to check errors.

Q20. How would you test a Workflow Rule in Salesforce?

Answer:
1. Create a test record that matches the workflow criteria.

2. Verify if actions (email alerts, field updates) are triggered.

3. Check Apex debug logs to track execution.

4. Run negative test cases (records that should not trigger the workflow).

Final Tips for Salesforce Interviews (2025)

 Stay updated with Salesforce Release Notes (3 updates/year).
  Learn Lightning Web Components (LWC).
 Practice API integrations using Postman.
 Focus on Governor Limits and Best Practices.
Would you like mock interview scenarios or hands-on exercises? 😊

What is SOQL?
SOQL stands for Salesforce Object Query Language, and as the name suggests it is the main language used for performing
queries against the database. While it has a similar syntax to SQL, there are a few key differences, mainly that SOQL is exclusively
used for queries (i.e. SELECT statements).
It is used to retrieve data from a single object, and potentially those directly related to it. SOQL can be used both within Apex code
– to query records for consumption by said code – or via the API and tools which use it – such as in data loading tools

Apex Programming
9. What is required for deploying Apex code to a Production instance?
When deploying Apex code to production, there are three things which are required:
1. All classes and triggers must successfully compile.

2. Tests must cover at least 75% of all Apex code and there must not be any failures.

3. All triggers must have at least 1% coverage

10. What’s the difference between queueable Apex, batch Apex and schedulable Apex?
All three are different ways of running asynchronous Apex code:
Queueable Apex: This is an async process which can be launched to run processing, callouts, etc. This is useful when trying
to do processes in triggers which are long running, or simply unavailable, e.g. callouts.
Batch Apex: An Apex process which is designed to handle large numbers of records (up to 50 million) by processing them in
smaller batches of 1 – 2000 records at a time.
READ MORE: Simple Guide to Batch Apex in Salesforce
Scheduled Apex: A process that is scheduled to run at a specific time and date. This can be customized to be repeatable,
either by scheduling it through the UI, or via a CRON string within other Apex code.
What is the difference between Lightning Web Components and Aura components?
Lightning Web Components is built using current web standards to build custom HTML elements, through the use of Web
Components – designed to run in a lightweight and performant manner. Aura components are the legacy Lightning Component
framework, but still utilize JavaScript and HTML for development.
20. Why would we use Lightning Web Components over Aura components and vice versa?
Ideally, we should always be using Lightning Web Components for any new developments, due to their easier development and
better performance. We should avoid using Aura components unless we wish to use a piece of functionality which is not yet
supported in LWCs, in this case we should wrap an LWC inside of an Aura component.
Read more:
 Migrate Aura Components to Lightning Web Components

 Lightning Web Components and Aura Components Working Together

Salesforce Platform Interview Questions and Answers
Let’s start with Salesforce Admin Interview questions with platform questions first.
1. What is cloud Computing?
Cloud computing is a way to access information and applications online instead of having to build, manage, and
maintain them on your own hard drive or servers. It’s fast, efficient, and secure.
Simply put, cloud computing is a way of accessing services on the internet instead of on your computer. You can use
the cloud to access applications, data, and development tools from virtually anywhere. Whether you’re working on
your phone from a crowded train in Chicago or on your laptop at a hotel in Hong Kong, you can access the same
information because it all lives online.
2. What is Paas, Saas, Iaas?
IaaS (Infrastructure as a Service) – Here, cloud service providers largely focus on infrastructure services like
hosting, server, storage services, etc.
SaaS (Software-as-a-Service) – SaaS is a software delivery model in which software is licensed on a subscription
basis and hosted centrally.
PaaS (Platform-as-a-Services) – This is a category of cloud computing services that provide a platform allowing
customers to develop, run, and manage apps.
3. What is Sandbox and the Type of Sandbox in Salesforce?
A Salesforce sandbox is an isolated copy of your organization’s production environment that is used for development
and testing purposes. Your production environment has your live data and active users logging in. A Salesforce
sandbox will always include a copy of your production organization’s metadata
Types of Sandbox in Salesforce
There are 4 types of Salesforce sandbox environments.
1. Developer Sandbox
2. Developer Pro Sandbox
 3. Partial Copy
4. Full Sandbox
Salesforce Admin Data Modeling Interview Questions
Let’s start with Salesforce Admin data modeling interview questions. That is fundamental for any admin.
4. What is Object in Salesforce?
Objects in Salesforce are used as database tables that are used to store information about an organization. We have
two types of objects in salesforce, they are.
1. Standard Object: These are the objects provided by the salesforce, which include contacts, accounts,
opportunities, leads, cases, campaigns, products, contracts, dashboards, etc.
2. Custom Object: This includes the modifications made to the Salesforce by users. It stores the essential and
unique information of an organization. Custom Object includes page layouts, relationship to other objects,
custom user interface tab, custom fields, etc.
5. What are the different types of object relations in Salesforce
The different types of object relationships in Salesforce are:
1. Master-Detail Relationship (1:n):- It is a parent-child relationship in which the master object controls the
behavior of the dependent child object. It is a 1:n relationship, in which there can be only one parent, but many
children.
1. The master field cannot be empty.
2. If a master record is deleted, the corresponding dependent object record are also deleted.
3. This is called a cascade delete.
4. Dependent fields will inherit the owner, sharing and security settings from its master.
5. You can define master-detail relationships between two custom objects, or between a custom object and
standard object as long as the standard object is the master in the relationship.
2. Lookup Relationship (1:n): Lookup relationships are used when you want to create a link between two
objects, but without the dependency on the parent object. Similar to Master-Detail relationship, you can think of
this as a form of parent-child relationship where there is only one parent, but many children i.e. 1:n
relationship.
1. Deleting a record will not result in automatic deletion Child record.
 2. Neither will the child fields inherit the owner, sharing or security settings of its parent.
3. Junction Relationship (Many-To-Many): This kind of a relationship can exist when there is a need to create
two master-detail relationships. Two master-detail relationships can be created by linking 3 custom objects.
Here, two objects will be master objects and the third object will be dependent on both the objects. In simpler
words, it will be a child object for both the master objects.
4. Self Relationship : A Self-Relationship is a lookup relationship to the same object. It is this premise that
allows users to take the object “Merchandise” and create relationships with other objects.

6. What is a Master–Detail relationship in Salesforce?

 Master-Detail relationship is a relationship between a parent and child where the master represents the parent
and the detail represents a child. This relationship can be used when we want to control the display of detail
records based on the value present in the master record.
  The master object completely takes control of the behavior of the Detail object. The survival of the child is
dependent on the parent, because if the parent gets deleted then the child automatically gets deleted. You can
create Roll-up summary fields in master records which will calculate the SUM, AVG, and MIN of the child
records.
 Consider an example of a courier company model, where a delivery schedule is always linked to a delivery
location. If we delete a delivery location from our list, then all the related delivery schedules should also be
removed. Such a dependency can be achieved only through a Master-Detail relationship
7. What is a junction object in Salesforce?
Junction objects are useful in building many-to-many relationships between objects in Salesforce. Take an example
of recruiting application, where a position for a job is linked to many candidates or a candidate can apply for many
other jobs. Here object “job application” is referred to as a junction object in order to connect the data model. In this
example, “job application” is the junction object.
8. How many LR(lookup relationship) fields can be created in an object?
Maximum 40 Lookup relationship fields can be created in an object.
9. What is a Roll-up Summary field
A roll-up summary field calculates values from related records, such as those in a related list. You can create a
roll-up summary field to display a value in a master record based on the values of fields in a detail record. The detail
record must be related to the master through a master-detail relationship.
10. How many way to create What is a Roll-up Summary field
If the default Max Roll-Up Summary Field limit per object increased from 10 to 25 in the Winter ’16 release. Hard-
coded limit for roll-up summary fields is 40 per object
11. What is field dependency?
Field dependencies in salesforce used to control the visibility of picklist values on one object based on another
object. The object which controls the visibility of other objects we called as controlling object and object which get
controlled called as Dependent object.
Data Type Can we define as Controlling field Can we define as Dependent field

Standard Picklist Yes No

Custom Picklist Yes Yes

Multi-Select pick list No Yes

Checkbox Yes No

Salesforce Admin Security and Access Interview Questions

12. What is the difference between role and profile
The main difference between role and profile is given below –
Role Profile

The role helps in defining data visibility for a A profile sets the limitation for what an user can do in
particular user. the organization.

Based on the hierarchy, a role defines which

Profile defines permissions
user data a user can see.

Defining role to a user is not mandatory Defining profile is mandatory

Roles provide a feature to control access to Profiles help to decide record privileges i.e. assuming
records by impacting reports. For the user can observe the record, it concludes what the
example,“My Teams” filter. Roles function if a user can function, edit, delete, view on that record. It
security model (OWDs) of an organization is controls other system privileges like export data, mass
set to private. email, etc.
13. What are Permission sets?
A Permission Set is a collection of settings or permissions that is used to give access to numerous tools and
functions for the user. You can use permission sets for different types of users to extend functional access without
changing their profiles. Instead of creating a separate profile each time, you could easily create a Permission Set.
14. What is use of muting permission set in permission set group
By Adding Muting Permission in permission set group we can switch off/turn off/remove particular permission/Setting
within a group without affecting the rest of the permission sets within the group
15. How many ways we can share a record?
With the help of the given below methods we can share records in Salesforce:
Role hierarchy:
 Whenever a user is added to a role, the user above the current user in the hierarchy of roles will have access
to reading the records and inheriting the permissions.
 Follow the steps for role hierarchy: Go to Setup → find manage users’ → roles → set up roles → click on ‘add
role’ → provide name and click on save.
OWD:
 OWD(Organization-Wide Defaults) allows you to give permissions to the organization-wide and to define
baseline setting for the organization. It is also helpful in defining the user’s accessibility level to the user where
a user can see other user’s records.
 OWD settings can be Public Read Only, Private, Public Read, and Write.
 Follow the steps for OWD: Go to Setup → find the Security Controls → click on ‘sharing settings’ → click on
‘Edit.
Manual sharing:
 Manual sharing is sharing a single record/file to a single user or group of users through manual access.
 We can see a button for manual sharing on the detail page of the record and it can be seen only when the
OWD setting is private.
Criteria based sharing rules:
 If we want to share records based on conditions such as share records with a group of users with the criteria of
the country is India.
 Follow the steps for criteria-based sharing rules: Go to Setup → security controls → sharing settings → select
the object and provide name and conditions then click on save.
Apex sharing:
 Sharing object is available for each and every object in Salesforce. For example, the Account object’s share
object is AccountShare.
 By using Apex, if we want to share the records then we have to create a record to the shared object.
16. What are Audit Fields in Salesforce?
Audit Fields in Salesforce are special fields that track information about your records that can be valuable for
audit purposes. Typically these fields include: CreatedByID. CreatedDate
17. What is an Audit trail?
The Audit trail in Salesforce is a unique feature that helps in tracking the changes that have been made in the
organization by you and other administrators. It would be helpful for the organization with more administrators. This
audit trail shows you the information of the twenty most recently made changes in your organization.
18. What is a Queue in Salesforce?
Prioritize and assign records to teams that share workloads. There’s no limit to the number of queues you can
create, and you can choose when queue members receive email notifications.
19. What is a Public Group
Groups are sets of users. They can contain individual users, other groups, the users in a particular role or territory,
and/or the users in a particular role or territory plus all of the users below that role or territory in the hierarchy.
Report and Dashboard Interview Question and Answers
20. Difference between static and dynamic dashboards in Salesforce?
Static dashboards Dynamic dashboards

These are the default dashboards

Dynamic dashboards show data tailored for a specific user
that are visible to any user

It is used to show organizational- It is used to show a single user’s specific data, such as the
wide data to a set of users number of sales closed, leads converted, etc

We can’t schedule dynamic dashboard because when the

It can be scheduled to
dashboard is opened by us, it will display the real-time generated
automatically refresh its data
data
21. What are the different types of reports available in Salesforce?
Reports will give a clear picture to the management. Management will make use of reports to track progress towards
its various goals, increase revenue, and control expenditure. Reports will also help to predict trends and thus gives
the advantage of the increase in profits.
There are four types of reports in Salesforce. They are as follows:
 Matrix report
o A report is formed by grouping the records by rows as well as columns. It is used when you want to see
data by two separate dimensions that aren’t related, such as date and product.
o Example: Summarize opportunities by account horizontally and by month vertically.
 Summary report
o A report that provides a listing of data with groupings and subtotals. It is used when subtotals are
needed, based on the value of a particular field, or when you want to create a hierarchically grouped
report.
o Example: All opportunities for your team subtotaled by owner and sales stage.
 Tabular report
o A report that provides details of a company in tabular format. It is used when you want a simple list or an
item list with a grand total.
o Example: These reports are used to list all accounts, list of opportunities, list of contacts, etc.
 Joined report
o A report that is created by the mixture of any combination of reports. Like matrix report plus summary
report can give you a joined report. Also, matrix reports and tabular reports can give a joined report.
o Example: You can develop a report to display opportunity, case, and activity data for your accounts.
22. What is Report Type?
The report type is simply a template in Salesforce which is built based on objects and relationships in between
objects and fields. Every report in Salesforce can be created only based on the report type.
23. What are WhoId and WhatId in activities?
WhoID refers to people. Typically: contacts or leads. Example: LeadID, ContactID
WhatID refers to objects. Example: AccountID, OpportunityID
24. What is a bucket field in reports?
A bucket field lets you group related records together by ranges and segments, without the use of complex formulas
and custom fields. Bucketing can thus be used to group, filter, or arrange report data. When you create a bucket
field, you need to define multiple categories (buckets) that are used to group report values. The advantage is that
earlier, we had to create custom fields to group or segment certain data.
Data Management Interview Question and Answers
25. Way to clean data in Salesforce
Validation – Using Validation in Salesforce is a great way to keep data clean. This can come in a few different forms
such as required fields, using picklists over free text fields, validation rules, as well as setting correct permissions. All
of the mentioned features are simply trying to ensure that users can only enter data they should be entering. This is
one of the most effective prevention methods for bad data.
Duplicate Management – A common issue for users and admins using Salesforce, is duplicates. They can come
from various sources including an initial data load, marketing leads (events/website), or users themselves manually
entering them. Salesforce has various simple but powerful duplicate tools to prevent this.
Deduplication Tools – If bad data has become such a problem and is beyond repair, luckily there are AppExchange
Apps that can help.
26. Differences between Import wizard and Data loader.
Data Import Wizard Data Loader

For simple imports of data For complex imports of data

It can load up to 5,00,000

It can load up to 50,000 records.
records.

It supports all the custom objects and only a few standard objects like
It supports all custom and
Account, Contact, Campaign members, person accounts, Leads, and
standard objects.
Solution.

It doesn’t support
It supports schedule export.
scheduled export.

Delete operation is not available. Delete operation is

 available.

Can import cases, events,

Cannot import cases and opportunity.
tasks, and opportunities

While importing, duplicates

While importing, duplicates can be ignored.
cannot be ignored.

It doesn’t require installation. It requires installation.

27. What is “Data Skew” in Salesforce
In Salesforce, Data skew is a condition which you will occur when working for a big organization when there are
more than 10,000 records. So, when users perform updates performance issue will be encountered. It happens
because of data skew.
28. What is cascade deletion?
Cascade deletion happens when the relationship is master-detail. If parent get deleted then automatically child’s
records also get deletes
Automation Interview Question and Answers
29. What is a Flow?
Flow is an automation tool provided by Salesforce which can be used to perform various tasks like, Sending an
Email, Posting a chatter, Sending the custom Notifications & etc using clicks instead of code. Flow can be trigger for
record insert, update and record delete and it can be run for both after and before events. As an admin, Flows are
going to be your best friend because you will be able to handle the majority of complex business requirements
without the help of a Salesforce developer
30. Types of flows in Salesforce
Screen Flow: With Screen Flow you can create a custom UI (user interface) and guide users through a business
process that can be launched from Lightning Pages, Experience Cloud (previously known as Community Cloud),
quick actions and more.
Record-Triggered Flow: This Flow launches when is record is created, updated, or deleted. So far, we have used
Apex triggers for these automations some of which can now be done using Flows.
Scheduled-Triggered Flow: This flow launches at the specified time and frequency for each record in a batch.
Traditionally we have met this kind of requirement using Apex batch jobs.
Platform Event Flow: Launches when a platform event message is received. For example, you can pump the data
from external system in Platform Events and then use Flows to split and save the records in different objects.
Auto launched Flow: Launches when invoked by Apex, Process Builder or even REST API.

Salesforce Admin Scenario-Based Interview Questions

31. Name a few global variables which are used in formula and validation rules.
Ans: $User, $Organization, $Setup, $Objecttype, $Action etc.
32. Is there any special permission available to edit read-only fields? Please explain.
Ans: Yes. There is a system permission named ‘Edit Read Only Fields’ which allows to edit read only field values.
For System Administrator profile, this is enabled by default.
33. What are the differences between Object-specific actions and global actions?
 a) Both types can create records, but only object-specific actions can update records.
 b) Object-specific actions create records that are automatically associated with the current record. A record
created by a global create action has no relationship with other records.
34. Mention one impact point to check before deleting a role from the org.
Ans: Before deleting a role, we should check whether the role has been used in any sharing rule. If the role is
deleted, the sharing rule is also deleted.
35. Let’s say I create two accounts a1 and a2. Now I make a2 as the parent of a1. Now,
what will happen if I try to make a parent of a2?
Ans: The error ‘A parent account can’t be the child of an account it’s already a parent of’ will be shown.
36. How do you pass the current record id to a screen flow? Also is it possible to send the
entire record?
Ans: In order to pass current record Id, we need to declare a variable of name ‘recordId’ of type text and select the
option ‘Available for Input’. To pass the entire record, we can create a variable of name ‘recordId’ of type Record and
select the object type as that particular SObject.
37. How do you check your org is in which release?
Ans: From Setup, go to Company Information and copy the instance Id. Now go to status.salesforce.com and search
with the same instance id to get the details.
38. What is a big object? Give an example of a standard big object.
Ans: A big object can store massive amount of data from other object and even from external objects. Clients and
external systems use a standard set of APIs to access big object data. A big object provides consistent performance,
whether you have 1 million records, 100 million, or even 1 billion.
An example of the standard big object is FieldHistoryArchive.
39. Is it possible to use formula field in roll up summary calculation which is referring to
another object?
Ans: No. In order to get the value from the formula field, we need to create some automation to copy the data to a
new field and use that field in the roll up summary calculation.
40. Suppose there is a custom field which has a default value but not added to the page
layout. Now, if you clone a record from the UI, what would be the value of the field in the
new record?
Ans: The value would be the default value set at the field level, not the value which was populated in the previous
record.
41. What are the considerations when deleting an approval process?
Ans: Approval processes can be deactivated and deleted. If there are already records in pending status, an approval
process can be deactivated but not deleted. In order to delete an approval process, we need to ensure there are no
records in the org which is locked in the approval process else an error will be encountered.
42. What happens during Lead merging?
Ans: We can select up to 3 leads during merging. Those are identified as duplicates based on the duplicate rule
condition on the org. One of the lead is considered as a Master record and the read only and hidden field values are
retained from that lead. Once it is merged, the resultant record is a single lead record and the other two records are
deleted.
43. What is Apex Hammer?
Ans: Before each major service upgrade, Salesforce runs all Apex tests on your behalf through a process called
Apex Hammer. This is run across all the orgs.
44. How do you convert 15 digit record ID to 18 digit ID in the formula and validation rule?
Ans: Using CASESAFEID() function.
45. Is it possible to hard delete records using data loader?
Ans: Yes. We need to enable a system permission ‘Bulk API Hard Delete’ for the user in order to do hard delete.
Also, we need to select the Bulk API option in the data loader before the deletion.
46. Is it possible to show validation errors in screen flow?
Ans: Yes. We can show validation error message in screen flow for certain components using the Validate Input
option. In this option, the condition which is provided must be false for the validation rule to fire which is in contrast
with the standard/contrast validation rules.
47. You have created a custom object. While creating a report on the object, you are not
getting the option to select the object in the report builder. What could be the issue?
Ans: Check if the Allow Reports checkbox is enabled in the object detail page.
48. What are the possible statuses of a permission-set group?
Ans:
Updated. The group is current.
Outdated. The group requires recalculation.
Updating. The group is in recalculation mode.
Failed. The group recalculation failed.
49. How can we enable email approval response? Mention a few response keywords which
will approve/reject the request.
Ans: From Setup -> Process Automation Settings, we can enable the settings. Approve, Yes, Reject, No etc. are few
of the responses.
50. You are not getting an option to create list custom settings. Which setting needs to be
enabled?
Ans: From Setup -> Schema Settings -> Enable Manage list custom settings type.
51. Once a lead is converted it is not visible anymore in the UI. Is there any permission
available to view converted leads?
Ans: Yes. There is app permission, View and Edit Converted Leads.
52. You are trying to convert a master detail relationship field to lookup relationship. But
you are not able to see the change field type button. What could be the reason?
Ans: Check there should be no roll up summary field present in the parent object. Also, if there is any deleted roll up
field present in recycle bin that needs to be erased as well.
53. One of the users in your org is not able to create campaigns. You checked the profile/
permission sets and ensured that he has access to create campaigns. What could be the
reason?
Ans: Check if the Marketing User checkbox is selected in the user detail page of the user.
54. What happens when you try to delete a public group?
Ans: If the public group has been used in any sharing rule and associated with any records in the context of sharing,
the associated records appear. Now, an option is given to delete the public group as well as the sharing of all the
records.
55. What happens when you try to delete a queue?
Ans: If the queue is associated with any records or sharing rules, the references are displayed. The queue cannot
be deleted unless the references are removed.
Summary
Want to become a Salesforce Administrator? Salesforce is in-demand IT skill on job postings worldwide. Now is a
great time to learn Salesforce and change your career to the cloud. I hope these Salesforce Admin Interview
questions will help you to clear your Salesforce Admin Interview.
S

Salesforce Platform Interview Questions and Answers

Let’s see the Salesforce platform-related interview questions and answers:
1. What is Sandbox and the Type of Sandbox in Salesforce?
A Salesforce sandbox is an isolated copy of your organization’s production environment that is used for development
and testing purposes. Your production environment has your live data and active users logging in. A Salesforce
sandbox will always include a copy of your production organization’s metadata
Types of Sandbox in Salesforce
There are 4 types of Salesforce sandbox environments.
1. Developer Sandbox
2. Developer Pro Sandbox
3. Partial Copy
4. Full Sandbox
2. What is Cloud Computing?
Cloud computing is a way to access information and applications online instead of having to build, manage, and
maintain them on your own hard drive or servers. It’s fast, efficient, and secure.
Simply put, cloud computing is a way of accessing services on the internet instead of on your computer. You can use
the cloud to access applications, data, and development tools from virtually anywhere. Whether you’re working on
your phone from a crowded train in Chicago or on your laptop at a hotel in Hong Kong, you can access the same
information because it all lives online.
3. What is Iaas?
IaaS stands for Infrastructure as a service: A cloud service provider owns and manages the hardware upon which
your software stack runs. That includes servers, networking, and storage. This can be a great cost-reduction strategy
if you’d like to avoid purchasing and maintaining infrastructure.
In this type of service, you will get the Virtual System that can be connected using the internet. Where you can install
any Software even in some service providers you can install the operating system.
4. What is PaaS?
PaaS stands for Platform as a service: In this type of service, you get a development platform bundled with all the
types of software preinstalled. You will then have to write and execute all your codes in a remote server by some
mechanism.
5. What is Saas?
SaaS stands for Software as a service: It offers the most support and is the simplest of all delivery models for the
end user. Chances are that you already use it in your organization. This is the highest level of service in which
everything is provided from hardware to software to already build applications.
Salesforce Developer Configuration Interview Question and Answers
Let’s see the Salesforce platform configuration-related interview questions and answers:
6. What is the type of object relationship in Salesforce?
There are six types of object relationships in Salesforce.
1. Lookup Relationships
2. Master-Detail Relationship
3. Many-to-Many Relationships (Junction Object)
4. Self Relationship
5. External Relationships
6. Hierarchical Relationships
7. What is Junction Object in Salesforce?
A junction object is a custom object with two master-detail relationships, and it is the key to making a many-to-many
relationship.
8. What is the difference between Roles and Profiles?
Profiles help to control object privileges such as CRED (Create, Read, Edit, Delete). They also contain system
permissions that a user can carry out such as exporting data. Profile used for object level and Field level access. It is
mandatory for all Users.
Roles on the other hand help with sharing records across an organization. They work in a hierarchical fashion,
giving users access to records that are owned by people lower down in the hierarchy. Roles used for Record level
access. It is not mandatory for all Users.
9. How many ways we have in Salesforce for Sharing?
There are 20+ ways to share record access in Salesforce.
1. Profile/ Permission set Object level CRED access
2. View All and Modify All permission on the profile or permission set
3. Profile level System Permission.
4. Organization-Wide Default (OWD)
5. Record Ownership
6. Role Hierarchy
7. Case Team, Account Team, and Opportunity Team.
8. Queues
9. Sharing Rules
10. Groups
11. Territory Management
12. Sharing Sets
13. Sharing Groups
14. Super User Access
15. Manual Sharing
16. Apex Sharing
17. Visualforce with Apex
18. Implicit Sharing
19. Master-Detail Relationship
20. External Account Hierarchy
10. What are Sharing Rules?
Sharing rules in Salesforce are used to create automatic exceptions to the Organization-Wide Default settings for the
users who do not own the record.
They should be applied to the objects whose org-wide defaults are set to Public Read-only or Private because
sharing rules can only extend the access they cannot restrict the access provided by Organization-wide defaults.
There are 2 types of Sharing Rules in Salesforce based on which records to be shared:
 Owner Based
 Criteria Based
11. How do we do Manual Sharing?
The Manual sharing button allows users to share records with others with one button click. Sometimes we encounter
a scenario where individual users want to share their records with another colleague (user). In that case, manual
sharing is the best option.
12. What is Apex Sharing?
There are situations where the business requirement is too complex and standard sharing rules provided by the
Salesforce will not work. In that case we can use the Apex Sharing.
To access sharing programmatically, you must use the share object associated with the standard or custom object
for which you want to share. For example, AccountShare is the sharing object for the Account object and for
MyCustomObject it should be like MyCustomObject__Share. Here is sample code. Learn more about Apex Sharing.
public static boolean apexSharingDemo(Id recordId, Id userOrGroupId){
MyCustomObject__Share myCustomObject = new MyCustomObject__Share();
myCustomObject.ParentId = recordId;
myCustomObject.UserOrGroupId = userOrGroupId;
myCustomObject.AccessLevel = 'Read';
myCustomObject.RowCause = Schema.MyCustomObject__Share.RowCause.Manual;
Database.SaveResult[] jobShareInsertResult = Database.insert(myCustomObject,false);
}
Learn more about Sharing and Visibility here.
13. Type of Flow in Salesforce?
Flow is an automation tool provided by Salesforce which can be used to perform various tasks like Sending Emails,
Posting chatter, Sending custom Notifications &, etc using clicks instead of code. Check Salesforce Flow
Builder training if you are new.
Types of flows in Salesforce
1. Screen Flow: With Screen Flow you can create a custom UI (user interface) and guide users through a
business process that can be launched from Lightning Pages, Experience Cloud (previously known as
Community Cloud), quick actions and more.
2. Record-Triggered Flow: This Flow launches when is record is created, updated, or deleted. So far, we have
used Apex triggers for these automations some of which can now be done using Flows.
3. Scheduled-Triggered Flow: This flow launches at the specified time and frequency for each record in a
batch. Traditionally we have met this kind of requirement using Apex batch jobs.
 4. Platform Event Flow: Launches when a platform event message is received. For example, you can pump the
data from an external system in Platform Events and then use Flows to split and save the records in different
objects.
5. Auto launched Flow: Launches when invoked by Apex, Process Builder or even REST API
14. When to use Salesforce Flow and Apex?
Try not to mix Apex, Process Builders, Workflow Rules, and Record-Triggered flows. In general, you should choose
one automation tool per object.
Salesforce Flow Apex

let declarative tools handle non-DML activities like email alerts separate DML activity and offload it
and in-app alerts to Apex

15. Best practices for Salesforce Flow?

Check out the Apex hour blog post to learn about Best practices for Salesforce Flow.
1. Always! Plan Before You Build
2. “One Record-Triggered Flow” Per Object – Per Type
3. No DML Statement in Loops
4. Use the Advanced Technique to Merge Decision Node
5. Build Reusable Flow(s) – Subflow(s)
6. Don’t Create Flow for Everything
7. Build in a test/Sandbox environment
8. Supercharge Flow with Invocable Apex
9. Don’t Hardcode IDs, Query for them!
10. Dont mix Trigger, Process Builder, Flow and Record Trigger Flow
11. Handle Errors with Fault Paths
12. Exception handling in flow using Platform Events
 13. Use Debug Log to Check Why a Flow Fails at Runtime
14. Flow Naming Conventions
Salesforce Developer Apex Interview Question and Answers
Let’s see the Salesforce platform Apex interview questions and answers:
16. What is Apex? and when to use Apex over Flow?
Apex is a programming language developed by Salesforce. It is a strongly typed, object-oriented programming
language that allows developers to execute flow and transaction control statements on the Salesforce platform.
One common approach is to separate DML activity and offload it to Apex, and let declarative tools handle non-DML
activities like email alerts and in-app alerts — just be careful and ensure none of your Apex conflicts.
17. What are Apex Best practices in Salesforce?
Apex code is used to write custom and robust business logic. As with any language, there are key coding principles
and best practices that will help you write efficient, scalable code. Check our Apex best practices of Salesforce.
1. Bulkify Apex Code
2. Avoid SOQL & DML inside for Loop
3. Querying Large Data Sets
4. Use of Map of Sobject
5. Use of the Limits Apex Methods
6. Avoid Hardcoding IDs
7. Use Database Methods while doing DML operation
8. Exception Handling in Apex Code
9. Write One Trigger per Object per event
10. Use Asynchronous Apex
18. What is Apex Trigger? and When we should use Apex Trigger?
The trigger is a procedure in a database that automatically invokes whenever a special event in the Database
occurs. Apex triggers enable you to perform custom actions before or after events to records in Salesforce, such as
insertions, updates, or deletions. Learn more about apex trigger here.
There lots of automation tool available in Salesforce. Lets understand the when to use Apex Trigger in Salesforce.
1. Complex logic incapable of being processed via declarative artifacts
 2. Logic associated with DML
3. Operations on unrelated objects
4. Integration with External Systems
19. What is Apex Trigger Handler pattern?
Check this blog post to learn about which all trigger patterns are available in Salesforce. For Trigger Handler
code check this post.

20. What is Apex Trigger Framework? What are different Trigger Framework are available in Salesforce?
How many trigger frameworks are available in Salesforce, which one is a lightweight apex trigger framework and a
Comparison of different approaches? Check our Apex hours Trigger Framework in Salesforce sessions.
Type of different frameworks in Salesforce
1. Trigger Handler Pattern
2. Trigger Framework using a Virtual Class
3. Trigger Framework using an Interface
4. An architecture framework to handle triggers
21. What is Async Apex in Salesforce? How many ways do we have for Async processing?
In technology terminology, Asynchronous operation means that a process operating independently of other
processes.
Using Async in Salesforce – how will we do it?
1. Schedule & Batch jobs
2. Queues
3. @future
4. Change Data Capture – Apex Triggers (Summer ’19)
5. Platform Events – Event Based
6. Continuations (UI)
22. What is a Batch job in Salesforce?
Batch class is used to process millions of records with in normal processing limits. With Batch Apex, we can process
records asynchronously to stay within platform limits. If you have a lot of records to process, for example, data
cleansing or archiving, Batch Apex is probably your best solution. In Batch Apex each transaction starts with a new
set of governor limits, making it easier to ensure that your code stays within the governor execution limits
23. What is the difference between the Stateful and Stateless batch jobs?
Using Stateful Batch Apex
If your batch process needs information that is shared across transactions, one approach is to make the Batch Apex
class itself stateful by implementing the Stateful interface. This instructs Force.com to preserve the values of your
static and instance variables between transactions.
global class SummarizeAccountTotal implements Database.Batchable<sObject>, Database.Stateful{
}
In Short, if you need to send a mail to check the number of records passed and failed in the batch job counter, in that
case, can you Stateful batch job?
If you want to create one counter and share/ use it in each execute method use the same.
Using Stateless Batch Apex
Batch Apex is stateless by default. That means for each execution of your execute method, you receive a fresh copy
of your object. All fields of the class are initialized, static and instance.
global class SummarizeAccountTotal implements Database.Batchable<sObject>{
}
24. What is mixed DML?
A Mixed DML operation error occurs when you try to persist in the same transaction and change to a Setup
Object and a non-Setup Object. For example, if you try to update an Account record and a User record at the same
time.
Salesforce Developer Lightning Interview Question and Answers
25. What is Lightning Data Service?
Use Lightning Data Service to load, create, edit, or delete a record in your component without requiring Apex code.
Lightning Data Service handles sharing rules and field-level security for you. In addition to simplifying access to
Salesforce data, Lightning Data Service improves performance and user interface consistency
26. How to do communication between Lightning web components?
Use the Events in lightning web components (LWC) to communicate between components. Events in Lightning web
components are built on DOM Events, a collection of APIs and objects available in every browser. Here we will be
see how to the events using the Custom-event interface and publish-subscribe utility.
Learn about Event in LWC in our Events in Lightning web components post. Events are used in LWC for
components communication. There are typically 3 approaches for communication between the components using
events.
1. Parent to Child Event communication in Lightning web component
2. Custom Event Communication in Lightning Web Component (Child to Parent )
3. Publish Subscriber model in Lightning Web Component or LMS (Two components which doesn’t have a
direct relation )
27. How to call Apex class in Lightning web component and how many way we have and when to use which
option?
You can call the apex methods as functions into the component by calling either via the wire service or imperatively.
To call an Apex method, a Lightning web component can:
 Wire a property
 Wire a function
 Call a method imperatively
To expose an Apex method to a Lightning web component, the method must be static and either global or public.
Annotate the method with @AuraEnabled
Learn more from the Call apex method from the Lightning web components post.
28. What are the basic difference between Application Event and Component Event in Aura component?
Application Event Component Events

Application Events are handled by any component Component Events can be handled by same
have handler defined for event.These events are component or a component that instantiates
essentially a traditional publish-subscribe model or contains the component

The component events can only be registered

Application event can be used through out the
in child component and handled by parent
application.
component

We use attribute type="APPLICATION" in the aura:event tag We use attribute type="COMPONENT" in

for an application event. the aura:event tag for a component event.
29. What is a lightning messaging service?
Lightning Message Service (LMS) allows you to communicate between Visualforce and Lightning Components (Aura
and LWC both) on any Lightning page. LMS API allow you to publish message throughout the lightning experience
and subscribe to the same message anywhere on lightning page.
Learn more here.
30. What is lazy loading in LWC and how do lazy loading in LWC?
Lazy loading is an optimization technique to load the content on demand. Instead of loading the entire data and
rendering it to the user in one go as in bulk loading, the concept of lazy loading assists in loading only the required
section and delays the remaining, until it is needed by the user.
Learn how to use lazy load in the lightning web component here.
31. What are Design Attributes in Lightning Web Components?
We can use Design Attribute to make lightning web components attribute available to System Admin to edit Lightning
App Builder or Community. So we can expose the component attribute in Lightning App Builder using design
Attribute.
Learn more from Design attributes in Lightning Web Components post.
Salesforce Integration Interview Questions
Here is a list of the most frequently asked Salesforce Integration question in the Developer Interview.
32. What is web services?
Web service is a standardized medium to propagate communication between the client and server applications on
the World Wide Web. Web services provide a common platform that allows multiple applications built on various
programming languages to have the ability to communicate with each other.
Webservices is a functionality or code which helps to us to do integration. Web services are open standard (XML,
SOAP, HTTP, etc.) based web applications that interact with other web applications for the purpose of exchanging
data
33. What is the difference between SOAP and REST?
Here is the difference between SOAP and REST API.
SOAP API REST API

Relies on SOAP protocol Relies on REST architecture using HTTP

Transports data in XML Transports data in JSON or XML

Highly structured/ typed Less structured? Less bulky data

Handles large data loads Works well with JavaScript

Designed with large enterprise application in mind Designed with mobile devices in mind
34. What is the difference between Enterprise WSDL and Partner WSDL?
Here is the difference between Enterprise WDSL and Partner WDSL.
Enterprise WDSL Partner WSDL

Strongly Typed Loosely Typed

Tied to a specific configuration of Useful for any configuration of Salesforce

 Salesforce

Changes if custom field or custom objects Does not changes if custom field or custom objects are
are added to your organization added to an organization’ Salesforce configuration
35. Explain about Integration Patterns?
In Salesforce, we have welcome Integration patterns.
1. ” Remote Process Invocation—Request and Reply ”: Salesforce invokes a process on a remote system, waits
for completion of that process, and then tracks state based on the response from the remote system.
2. ” Remote Process Invocation—Fire and Forget ”: Salesforce invokes a process in a remote system but doesn’t
wait for completion of the process. Instead, the remote process receives and acknowledges the request and
then hands off control back to Salesforce.
3. ”Batch Data Synchronization”: Data stored in Lightning Platform is created or refreshed to reflect updates from
an external system, and when changes from Lightning Platform are sent to an external system. Updates in
either direction are done in a batch manner.
4. ”Remote Call-In ”: Data stored in Lightning Platform is created, retrieved, updated, or deleted by a remote
system.
5. ” UI Update Based on Data Changes ”: The Salesforce user interface must be automatically updated as a
result of changes to Salesforce data.
6. “Data Virtualization ”: Salesforce accesses external data in real time. This removes the need to persist data in
Salesforce and then reconcile the data between Salesforce and the external system.

1. Describe how Salesforce CRM is used by organizations?

At its core, Salesforce is a customer-facing CRM system. It is used to record customer details and the organization’s interactions
with them. Salesforce’s most popular product is Sales Cloud. This is used by organizations to record initial interest from customers
(Leads) and follow through a sales cycle, taking them through various steps to win their business.
On the other side of the coin, you have Service Cloud, which is designed to support customer service teams from within a business.
Service Cloud helps agents deal with customer queries, as well as solve issues.
Sales and Service Cloud are Salesforce’s two main products, but over the years, Salesforce has been able to support all kinds of
internal teams within an organization, including Marketing, Analytics, Portals, Integration, and Collaboration (Slack).
Read More: What is Salesforce & Why is it so Popular?

2. What are the main benefits of a cloud solution like Salesforce?

Salesforce is a Cloud SaaS platform (Software-as-a-Service), which means you access it through your web browser, as opposed to
a desktop application. Cloud systems have major benefits over legacy computer systems that require huge amounts of server
power to run. This is why most applications you access today, in your business or personal life, will be cloud-based (Spotify, Gmail,
Office365, Dropbox, etc.).
Some of the biggest benefits of cloud computing solutions include:
 Cost: Older on-premise solutions required a huge upfront investment in infrastructure. You would need to buy all the servers, install them, and maintain them. With Cloud computing, you are
essentially outsourcing the maintenance of the infrastructure to a provider such as Salesforce.

 Upgrades: Instead of managing upgrades to your software yourself, Cloud computing providers take care of this for you. Salesforce will upgrade your solution to the latest version three times a year.
This comes with new features and improvements to the system without you having to lift a finger or pay additional fees.

 Mobility: Cloud computing tools can be accessed from anywhere. As long as you have a device and an internet connection, you can access any information that is stored in Salesforce. This is
particularly handy if you travel frequently for work or meetings.

3. Can you describe the main differences between Sales Cloud & Service Cloud?
Sales and Service Cloud both act as the core CRM platforms for Salesforce and will be used by the majority of organizations. While
both share some similarities, they are distinctly different products that contain different sets of features for their specific function.
 Sales Cloud: This product is designed to support businesses with their sales cycle – taking a potential customer on a journey, from qualifying them through the Lead object to converting them into an
Opportunity where the main sales cycle takes place. Sales Cloud also has a number of other features to support this process, from quoting to forecasting.

 Service Cloud: Service Cloud, on the other hand, helps organizations with their customer support process. Customers initiate a support process by emailing, calling, or submitting an online form.
Once this case has been created in Salesforce, agents can use features such as a knowledge base to help find answers to questions and milestones to ensure SLA (Service Level Agreements) are
met, as well as features like live chat to talk to customers in real-time.
Read More: Sales Cloud vs Service Cloud – What Are The Differences?

4. Apart from CRM, what other products do Salesforce have in their offering?
Over the years, Salesforce has built up a huge portfolio of other products to help serve its customers. One of the most attractive
selling points is the fact that they can seamlessly integrate with each other, creating a full 360-degree view of their customers.
Some of Salesforce’s other products include Marketing Cloud, Commerce Cloud, Experience Cloud, MuleSoft, and Slack. For a full
overview of Salesforce’s products, check out the link below.
Read More: Ultimate Guide to EVERY Salesforce Product in 2021

5. What is the Salesforce Platform (Force.com), and how does it help organizations?
One of Salesforce’s biggest selling points is its platform (previously called Force.com). This enables you to create powerful
customizations on top of Salesforce’s products, which allow you to completely tailor the applications to your organization’s exact
needs. This is made even more attractive by the fact that you can create customizations with clicks, not code.

At a basic level, this allows you to create custom fields and objects to store unique information related to your organization. One of
the most popular customization possibilities is automation. You can create automation to do pretty much anything in Salesforce –
update a field, create a record, send an email, etc. These types of customizations can end up saving users a lot of time.
Read More: Workflow Rules vs. Process Builder (Feat. APEX & Flow)

6. Can you provide an example of a custom app you could build on the Salesforce platform?
Taking customizations one level further, Salesforce enables you to build custom applications on the platform. Think about how the
Sales and Service Clouds are set up with their various features designed for a certain purpose – this can be recreated for any team
function.
If you are familiar with Trailhead, you may have already created a few custom applications that will give you a good answer to this
question. If not, here are a few ideas:
 An HR application to help internal teams manage jobs and job applicants.

 A finance system that can track invoices.

 A goal-setting app that can help managers set targets and goals for their team.

7. Can you describe the differences between declarative and programmatic customizations?
When it comes to Salesforce customizations, there are two main types: declarative and programmatic.
Declarative customizations are point-and-click. These allow non-developers to build powerful customizations by using a wizard to
create custom fields, automation, and tables of data. One of the latest developments Salesforce has brought out is MuleSoft
Composer, which allows integrations into other systems to take place using only clicks!
Programmatic customizations, on the other hand, are built with code. Whilst you can do almost anything with declarative
customization, there is a limit to more complex solutions. Apex is Salesforce’s coding language and may be needed if the
requirement is particularly complex.
Lightning development, on the other hand, is Salesforce’s UI coding language, which can be used to create completely custom
screen layouts. In addition, it’s common that, in most integrations, some level of coding experience using APIs will be needed.

8. Can you explain how Salesforce releases work?

As a SaaS platform, Salesforce delivers updates to your system automatically. The major releases happen three times a year, with
some other, much smaller updates delivered in between.
The major releases are labeled, Spring, Summer, and Winter, with the fiscal Salesforce year following the name, e.g. “Salesforce
Winter ’22 Release”. Each release will have a huge amount of features and updates included across most Salesforce products.
It’s important to stay alert around release time. Whilst Salesforce rarely breaks anything whilst updating your org, it’s important to
test everything and ensure that it works as expected.

9. What is the Salesforce Lightning Experience, and how does it help organizations?
Salesforce Lightning was primarily a new UI that was released in 2015 – it took Salesforce’s UI, which was mostly unchanged since
1999, and brought it into the 21st century. Salesforce centered the design around a modular experience that allowed Salesforce
Admins to easily control the layout of all pages.
This resulted in a rise in user productivity with the help of new features, as well as an easy-to-navigate UI. Pretty much every single
page of Salesforce Lightning Experience is fully customizable. You can customize the homepage and record layouts, and you can
create dashboards to suit your specific needs.
Check out the slideshow below to see the evolution of Salesforce…




 

10. Can you describe an example sales process that a company might implement?
Sales Cloud is Salesforce’s most popular product – it’s more than likely that you will need to support this product. This is why it’s
more important than ever to be able to recommend and support a company’s sales process.
When someone refers to a sales process, they are referring to the process that a salesperson will follow in order to sell a product or
service to a potential customer. This is then translated into the “Lead Status” and “Opportunity Stage” fields.
At an extremely basic level, that could look like the following: Qualify > Discover > Analysis > Proposal > Negotiation > Closed Won
(or Lost).
Here is an example below that includes a full Sales process, from entering the organization at the Lead stage, all the way through
to its closing.
11. Can you describe an example service process that a company might implement?
Similar to the above questions, it’s important for Salesforce professionals to understand how a customer support organization
works and the different stages they go through to solve a case.
Unlike a sales process that is split across the Lead & Opportunity objects, service processes are contained on the case object.
Here is an example of a Service process: New > Working > Waiting on Customer > Escalated > Closed.
12. What are objects in Salesforce and how are they used?
In normal database terms, an object in Salesforce is simply a table of data. A table of data will contain various fields and, in turn,
these fields contain information like an email address, phone number, or company name.
There are two types of objects in Salesforce: standard and custom. Standard objects are those that come out of the box with
Salesforce products. For example, in most Salesforce products, Accounts & Contacts come as standard. In Sales Cloud, you will
get objects such as Lead & Opportunity, whilst in Service Cloud, Cases & Entitlements will be standard.
Custom Objects, on the other hand, are created by you. These are the objects that can be created as your foundation for building
custom applications.
13. Salesforce has an App Store similar to an iPhone. What is this called? Can you name some apps you
have used in the past?
One of Salesforce’s selling points is the AppExchange. This has nearly enough similar functionality to the iPhone App Store or the
Google Play Store. You can install pre-built apps directly into your Salesforce org to easily add additional functionality. Some of the
most popular apps include e-Signature, Document Generation, and Form tools.
There is a near certainty that any Salesforce company you join will be using at least one AppExchange app – this is why it’s
important to have an understanding of how to use these applications.
Check out some of the most popular apps in the post below and remember that most apps have a free trial, so there is no harm in
getting stuck in.
Read More: Best Salesforce Apps in 2021

14. How are changes tested in Salesforce before being deployed to Production?
A fundamental concept of any IT system is that changes should never be made in Production. They need to be tested in a safe
environment to ensure nothing breaks and user processes are not disrupted.
Salesforce provides a feature known as Sandboxes. These replicate your Production configuration, giving you a safe environment
to test changes and implement new features.
Sandboxes come in different flavours, ranging from a Developer sandbox that only contains your custom configuration, all the way
through to Full Copy Sandboxes, that contain all your configuration and data.
Read More: What is a Salesforce Sandbox? A Beginners Guide

15. Can you describe some of the main differences between Salesforce editions? (e.g. Professional &
Enterprise)
Salesforce has a few different versions of its products including, Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, and Unlimited. It’s important
to understand some of the differences, at least from a high level. If you join an organization that has a lower tier than you are used
to, it may reduce the functionality you can implement. Here are a few of the main differences:
 Functionality: Most Salesforce editions will contain core CRM functionality including Account & Contact fields, email integration, and the mobile app. However, some of the lower editions will not
include automation, API availability for integration, or some advanced features such as Flow.

 Limits: All Salesforce editions have some kind of limits, these can include daily API calls, data storage limits, custom apps, or the number of custom objects of fields. Higher-level editions will have
higher limits.
  Cost: As you might have guessed, the more advanced versions can cost a lot more. You can expect the Essentials version to cost $25/month per user and the Unlimited one to cost $300/month.

16. How do you move changes between Salesforce environments?

Once changes have been implemented and tested in a Salesforce sandbox, they need to be moved to another sandbox and,
ultimately, the production environment.
There are many ways to move changes between environments. However, the most common way is to use change sets. Change
sets are a packaged set of components that can be created in one environment and moved across to another.
If you want to really impress your interviewer, learn all about Salesforce DevOps, the next generation of deployment tools.

17. What is the difference between Data and Metadata?

Metadata relates to the fields, configurations, code, logic, and page layouts that go into building the information architecture and the
look and feel of your Salesforce environment.
Data relates to the records that a business relies on, such as Users, Accounts, and Contacts, to name a few. On the other hand,
Metadata is the data that describes other data.
Read More: What Is Salesforce Metadata? A Beginner’s Guide

18. What is a Queue in Salesforce?

A lot of objects in Salesforce have to be owned by an individual. For example, Accounts, Opportunities, Contacts, and Campaigns
must be owned by a user in Salesforce.
However, there are certain objects where it is useful to be owned by a Salesforce Queue. Queues are like holding areas in your
CRM where records wait for a user to pick them up, assign them to an owner, and work on processing them.
Read More: Everything You Need to Know About Salesforce Queues

19. What is Salesforce Customer 360?

For a few years now, Salesforce has been trying to create a suite of products that allow users of its platform to see a 360-degree
view of their customers. This means that users of Salesforce can see every interaction with a customer, from the first inquiry via the
website, to which products they have bought and what issues or queries they have with their products.
This helps businesses by allowing them to serve their customers better – by knowing everything about them, and by ensuring the
businesses are working off a single source of truth.
20. Where can you view Salesforce system status & scheduled maintenance?
Salesforce has three releases each year and occasionally has scheduled maintenance such as org migrations to different servers.
On very rare occasions, Salesforce can also ‘go down’ for a limited period.
You can access all information pertaining to scheduled maintenance and downtime, at Salesforce Trust. You can also sign up for
notifications to be kept up to date with your server status.

Admin Salesforce Interview Questions

This section contains fundamental knowledge of the Salesforce platform. No matter your role in the ecosystem, everyone should
learn these Salesforce Admin concepts that will be found in your Certified Administrator Certification.
Here are our Admin Salesforce interview questions…

21. Can you describe the differences between a Role and a Profile?
Roles and Profiles are two fundamental concepts of the Salesforce platform. They control what users can see and do on the
platform.
Profiles control what a user can do on the platform – for example, they control what kind of access rights a user has to a certain
object, such as create, read, edit, or delete. They also control individual permissions such as “Export Reports”, “Create Dashboard
Folders”, or “Modify All Data”.
Roles, on the other hand, are used to control what users can see. They are designed to open up access through a hierarchy so that
more senior members of the organization can see more records. For example, someone at the bottom of the hierarchy, like an
Account Executive, might be only able to see their own accounts. But the VP Sales US would be able to see all accounts owned by
individuals below them.
 *It’s worth noting that even if

the Salesforce Admin is below the CEO in the hierarchy. The “Modify All Data” permission will allow them to see all data in Salesforce.
22. What are some of the automation tools available to admins, and how can they be used to help
businesses?
Automation tools in Salesforce are an admin’s best friend. They are designed to be easy to use and enable businesses to automate
complex processes. This, in turn, helps users to be more productive, allowing them to focus on revenue-generating activities
instead of manual admin work.
For example, once an Opportunity is closed-won, you could easily create automation to create a case, which prompts the customer
success team to get in touch with the customer to begin onboarding.
Examples of automation tools include Workflow, Process Builder, and Flow. Salesforce are currently in the process of retiring both
Workflow and Process Builder, so Flow will be the best automation tool to use going forward, with Salesforce only introducing new
features for this tool.
Read More: Process Builder Vs Flows – Become the Ultimate Admin

23. What are the main types of relationships you can create between objects in Salesforce?
Creating relationships between Salesforce objects is a fundamental skill. It’s important to create them in a scalable way, ensuring
you pick the right relationship for the right solution.
The most common types are the Lookup and Master-detail relationships. Lookups can be defined as loosely coupled, meaning that
you can relate records easily to other records in a one-to-many fashion.
Master-detail relationships, on the other hand, are tightly coupled. This means that a child record cannot exist without a parent
record, and if a parent record is deleted, the child also gets deleted with it. For a full overview of all seven Salesforce relationships,
check out the article below…
Read More: The Types of Relationships in Salesforce

24. Describe the differences between Page Layouts and Record Types
Page Layouts and Record Types are some of the first features that a Salesforce professional needs to learn. They control the user
interface in various ways and can be used in conjunction with each other to create customized experiences for your users.
Page Layouts determine which fields are displayed to your users on a record. They also allow you to add fields, sections, custom
buttons, and other features. The “Details” tab (in the image below) contains a lot of the elements that are controlled by the page
layout.
Record Types, on the other hand, let you offer different business processes, picklist values, and Page Layouts to your users. For
example, one of the most common use cases of Record Types would be to create two different sales processes on the Opportunity
object. Each with different sales stages and Page Layouts.
This means that with Record Types you can now apply multiple Page Layouts per object, per user profile.
Read more: When to use Record Types vs. Page Layouts?

25. Describe a few ways that Account and Contact information can be imported into Salesforce?
Importing data into Salesforce is a vital skill to hold, but it’s also important to understand the differences between the main tools
available:
 Data Loader: The Data Loader will be a staple of any Salesforce professional’s toolkit. It allows you to import, export, update and delete large amounts of records in a single operation. The Data
Loader has to be downloaded to your desktop for use.

 Data Import Wizard: The Data Import Wizard is a simplified tool that, as the name suggests, allows you to import data into Salesforce. The wizard is accessed from within Salesforce and also has
deduplication features.

 Dataloader.io: Dataloader.io is an advanced, cloud-based data loader that is packed full of features. Whilst this is primarily a paid product provided by MuleSoft, the free version allows a certain
number of importing/exporting activities and is very useful for some more complex scenarios.
Read More: The Best Data Loaders for Salesforce
26. What is a Junction Object?
A junction object is used to create many-to-many relationships in Salesforce. This is used when a normal parent-child or a one-to-
many relationship doesn’t work.
This is exactly how the Opportunity and Product tables are joined in Salesforce. Check out the article below for more details…
Read more: What is a Junction Object in Salesforce?
27. What Salesforce product can be used to provide your Partners with the ability to create Leads and
Opportunities?
The Salesforce product you are looking for here is called the Experience Cloud (previously called Community Cloud). This allows
you to create portals that connect to your Salesforce instance for a specific purpose. Two of the most common types of portals
include…
 Partner Portal: This is an area where your partners can create leads and manage the sales cycle of opportunities. All partner activity can be viewed within your Salesforce org, along with the
provision of full reporting capabilities.

 Customer Portal: A common use case for a customer portal is to provide support as well as help articles. Customers can log cases, as well as search knowledge bases for answers to their queries.
You can even go as far as to create a community that allows customers to interact with each other.
Read More: Ultimate Guide to EVERY Salesforce Product in 2021

28. Can you name the types of Salesforce reports and the differences between them?
The reporting capabilities in Salesforce are a favorite amongst users, so it’s important to understand the types of reports and their
differences…
 Tabular: This is the simplest of reports and is suited just to show lines of data and nothing else. It is similar to an Excel spreadsheet. If you just want to show data without the need to show totals,
calculations or groups of data, then this is the report for you. It is also best to use this report type if you are planning to export data.

 Summary: As soon as you add a grouping, you will turn the report into a summary report. Summary reports are probably the most commonly used and are great for showing groups of data, e.g., if
you want to see the number or value of opportunities per account, you would group your report by Account Name. You can also subgroup fields by dragging them under the initial group.

 Matrix: Matrix reports are very similar to a summary, but they allow you to group by rows as well as columns to see different totals. Building on the example above, you might want to see the value of
opportunities per account, by month. So you would see that Edge Communications has $100,000 of opportunities in January, $50,000 in February and so on.

 Joined Reports: Joined reports allow you to create two separate reports so that you can compare data. You could use a Joined report to show the total number of opportunities and cases per
account, side by side.
Read More: How to Create a Report in Salesforce

29. What is a Dynamic Dashboard?

Dynamic Dashboards are a fantastic way to create a personalized experience for your users when viewing a certain dashboard. It
allows the data on a dashboard to change, based on the user who is viewing it.
For example, you could have a single, personal sales dashboard for sales reps. Whenever a different user viewed this dashboard,
it would only show their leads, opportunities, and accounts. This works by using the “My” filter on all dashboards.
30. Describe the different ways to make a field required in Salesforce?
Making fields “required” in Salesforce is a great way to ensure that correct information is being captured at the right point in the
process. Over time, this massively improves data quality. Here are a few ways you can make fields required:
 Custom Field Settings: Whenever you create a new custom field, you have the option to make this required. This is a ‘hard’ limit and will be required whenever you are creating a new record inside
Salesforce or uploading via a data loader.

 Page Layout: On a Salesforce Page Layout, you also have the option to make fields read only or required. This is considered a ‘soft’ limit, as it will only apply if you are creating a new record via the
Salesforce interface, not when uploading via a data loader.

 Validation Rules: Finally, we have validation rules. These have much more advanced logic and can be built to only make a field required, under a certain condition, e.g. if Opportunity Stage = Closed
Won, make X field required. Validation rules have a hard limit.

Developer Salesforce Interview Questions

Although you might not be interviewing for a Salesforce Developer position, it’s important to understand the role that they play, as
well as some of the concepts that can intersect with both a Salesforce Developer and a Salesforce Admin.
Here are our Developer Salesforce interview questions…

31. What is the Salesforce Order of Execution?

The Salesforce Order of Execution is a set of rules that describes what events happen when a record is saved in Salesforce. For
example, if you have validation rules, flows, Apex triggers, etc. there is a consistent sequence in which these events get triggered.
This is important to understand when designing solutions, as well as when you are troubleshooting issues.
Read More: Become a Salesforce Order of Execution Hero
32. Can you describe what Apex is, and why it is required in some scenarios?
Salesforce has a huge variety of declarative tools at its disposal for admins, but the primary reason that developers are brought into
the picture is to code.
Apex is Salesforce’s primary backend programming language. This allows developers to write complex automation that runs on the
Salesforce platform. Examples of using Apex over declarative tools may include:
 Writing complex business processes logic that is not supported by declarative automation such as Flow.

 Integrating Salesforce into other systems.

 Creating custom email services.

33. What is the difference between Visualforce and Lightning Development?

Both Visualforce and Lightning are frameworks that can be used by developers to create completely custom user interfaces on
Salesforce.
Visualforce was primarily used back in the Salesforce Classic ‘era’ on tag-based markup language (similar to HTML), whereas
Lightning is a modern, componentized UI Framework that uses HTML and JavaScript.

34. What is SOQL used for?

SOQL stands for Salesforce Object Query Language, and is used to search Salesforce data when developers are writing custom
logic. SOQL is structured similarly to SQL, and can be used to retrieve data from a single object or multiple objects that relate to
one another.
Read more: SOQL Cheat Sheet & Reference Guide

35. What are Governor Limits?

As Salesforce is cloud-based software, you share server resources with other customers (whilst, of course, keeping data
completely separate). Governor limits are a concept that allow Salesforce to set certain rules on the number of resources you can
monopolize to ensure that everyone’s instances of Salesforce continue to run.
An example of a Governor Limit is “Per-Transaction Apex Limits”. This includes a number of rules that only allow you to run a
certain number of queries within a single Apex transaction.
Read more: What are Salesforce Governor Limits? Best Practices & Examples
36. What is MuleSoft?
MuleSoft is an integration platform that was acquired by Salesforce in 2018 for $6.5B.
MuleSoft’s Anypoint platform allows you to integrate with other systems easily, with a set of templates that provide out-of-the-box
APIs. Salesforce acquired MuleSoft to better serve customers going through their digital transformations, and required integration
with backend systems such as HR, Finance, or ERP.
Salesforce has also recently released MuleSoft Composer, which is designed to give admins a declarative way to integrate with
other systems.
Read more: An Admin’s Guide to Salesforce MuleSoft Composer

37. What is an Apex Trigger?

Apex Triggers are written by developers to fire logic before or after a record is saved. As discussed previously, Apex can handle the
most complex automation scenarios in Salesforce.

38. When should Flow be used over Apex?

Whilst Apex has always reigned as the king, when it comes to complex automation, in recent years, Salesforce has rebuilt Flow to
bring it close to Apex in functionality. Parker Harris, the CTO of Salesforce, has even been quoted saying: “Just Because it’s
possible to write code, doesn’t mean you should write code.”
As a general ‘rule of thumb’, if Flow can handle the use case and will not hit any limitations, it’s a good idea to build the automation
in Flow. Flow has a simpler user interface and can be understood by a wider range of Salesforce professionals.

39. What is Apex test coverage?

Before deploying Apex that has been written in a sandbox to production, developers must meet a minimum test coverage of 75%.
This requires developers to write test classes that run through their code, ensuring that the code is of good quality and will run
successfully in production.

40. What is the difference between Lightning Components and Lightning Web Components?
Back in 2014, Lightning Components were originally released alongside the Lightning Experience; they use a standardized
JavaScript framework.
Lightning Web Components were released in early 2019 and, instead, use an updated web standards-based framework. This
provides easier accessibility for users who are unfamiliar with the Salesforce platform. They utilize standard technology such as
CSS, HTML, and updated JavaScript.

Salesforce powers businesses by managing sales, marketing, and customer data – but only if you
have the right talent to operate its software effectively. Hiring the best means avoiding poor
configurations and weak security that can derail customer trust.

To avoid this, we’ve put together this Salesforce interview questions guide. It’ll arm you with 32
smart Salesforce questions to pinpoint candidates who truly know their stuff and can take your
business to the next level. You’ll also learn how to identify the best answers when evaluating your
top picks.
Table of contents

 Key takeaways
 What are tricky Salesforce interview questions?
 Top 3 reasons to include tricky Salesforce interview questions in your hiring campaign
 32 tricky Salesforce interview questions and answers
 How to add tricky Salesforce interview questions to your hiring campaign
 Identify top Salesforce talent with TestGorilla
 FAQs

Key takeaways
 Salesforce is essential for many businesses, but hiring the right talent is critical to unlock its
full potential.
 Use tougher Salesforce interview questions to assess technical expertise within the
Salesforce platform and its integrations, as well as crucial soft skills like problem-solving and
adaptability.
 Tricky Salesforce interview questions – combined with skills-based hiring – help eliminate
hiring bias and ensure you’re hiring as smartly as possible.
 TestGorilla’s skills-based assessments enable you to efficiently and effortlessly evaluate
Salesforce candidates.
What are tricky Salesforce interview
questions?
When we discuss “tricky” interview questions, we don’t mean being deceptive, but instead, asking
questions that are challenging and thought-provoking.
These tricky questions go beyond the basics and enable you to assess a candidate’s problem-
solving skills and technical knowledge carefully. Complex, scenario-based Salesforce interview
questions help star candidates stand out and showcase their ability to handle demanding
situations.

There are several types of tricky Salesforce interview questions, each focusing on different aspects
of a candidate's capabilities. These include:

1. Integration and external systems questions

These focus on candidates' understanding of integrating Salesforce with external systems using
application programming interfaces (APIs). You can ask candidates to describe considerations,
challenges, and best practices for seamless integration.

2. Comparative questions
Answering these questions, candidates will compare and contrast different Salesforce features,
functions, or development approaches. For example, candidates may need to explain the
differences between master-detail and lookup relationships.
3. Scenario-based questions
These provide candidates with hypothetical situations or challenges that Salesforce professionals
often encounter. Candidates must provide effective solutions and explain their thought processes
to demonstrate their ability to handle complex scenarios.

4. Technical questions
Technical Salesforce questions delve into Salesforce concepts, features, and best practices. For
instance, they can assess candidates’ understanding of Visualforce, Apex code, Salesforce Object
Query Language (SOQL), and governor limits.

5. Data management questions

These questions assess candidates' abilities to handle data in Salesforce, such as data
deduplication, import and export, migration, quality, and validation rules.

6. Salesforce architecture and design questions

Tricky questions in this category explore candidates' understanding of Salesforce architecture,
custom objects, custom settings, and designing scalable solutions.
 The best insights on HR and recruitment, delivered to your
inbox.
Biweekly updates. No spam. Unsubscribe any time.
Email*

Top 3 reasons to include tricky

Salesforce interview questions in your
hiring campaign
Making tricky Salesforce interview questions front and center of your hiring campaigns can help
you evaluate candidates’:

1. Technical proficiency
Complex Salesforce questions enable you to measure candidates’ technical expertise. By
presenting tricky scenarios and asking for in-depth explanations of Salesforce features, you can
identify candidates with a deep understanding of the platform's capabilities and limitations.

This way, you can easily separate your most knowledgeable applicants from the rest of your
candidate pool and advance them to the next stage of recruitment.

2. Problem-solving abilities and adaptability

Tricky questions assess applicants’ problem-solving skills under pressure. They enable you to see
how they approach unfamiliar problems, analyze information, and create innovative solutions – all
critical skills in a dynamic Salesforce environment.

These questions also allow applicants to showcase their ability to adapt and thrive in challenging
situations. They can share examples of when they’ve used quick thinking and flexibility to
navigate the ever-changing Salesforce landscape.

3. Hire-readiness
Asking tricky interview questions gives you a comprehensive view of your Salesforce candidates’
skills. By combining these questions with other pre-employment assessments, like personality and
job-specific tests, you can make better hiring decisions overall.
In turn, you’ll create a stronger, more skilled Salesforce team that can tackle complex projects,
find innovative solutions, and drive continuous improvement.

32 tricky Salesforce interview questions

and answers
Ask your applicants the following 32 complex Salesforce questions to discover top talent. We also
provide sample answers for each question.

1. Explain the differences between a role and a profile

in Salesforce.
A profile is a set of permissions and settings that determine what a user can do within Salesforce.
Often, profiles are tied to departments, such as Sales or Support groups.
Roles, on the other hand, determine what a user can see and access within Salesforce. Roles are
more closely linked to hierarchy within an organization.
2. What are governor limits in Salesforce, how can you
overcome them, and how does asynchronous
processing help?
Governor limits are runtime limits that Salesforce enforces to ensure system efficiency, such as
limits on the number of SOQL queries or DML statements per transaction. To overcome these, you
can optimize code by bulkifying queries, using efficient indexing, and caching data where
possible.

Asynchronous processing, such as Queueable Apex or Batch Apex, helps by executing tasks in
separate transactions, allowing more governor limits to apply independently. This approach is
useful for handling large data volumes or long-running processes without hitting limits.

3. Can you describe how record-level security is

enforced in Salesforce?
Record-level security refers to the records in each object a user can view or edit that are
accessible in their profile. Firstly, the organization-wide defaults set the baseline access for
different objects, determining whether they are publicly readable or writable.
Then, there is role hierarchy, which extends access to higher-level roles, allowing them to view
records owned by users below them in the hierarchy. Additionally, sharing rules can be set up to
grant access based on specific criteria, and manual sharing enables users to share individual
records with others on a case-by-case basis.

4. How is the “with sharing” keyword used in Apex

within Salesforce?
The “with sharing” keyword is used to enforce record-level security on a class and extend sharing
access on a particular object. When a class is declared with the “with sharing” keyword, it ensures
that the sharing rules and organization-wide defaults defined in Salesforce are applied to the data
accessed within that class.

This means that the class will respect the record-level access permissions of the current user, and
users will only be able to access records for which they have the appropriate permissions based on
their role, profile, and sharing settings.

5. How do you handle bulkification in Apex triggers to

avoid hitting governor limits?
Make sure to process records in bulk rather than individually. Instead of querying and updating
records individually, use collections and SOQL queries – as long as they’re not within the FOR loop
– to handle multiple records simultaneously. This way, you can reduce the number of database
queries and DML operations, which helps stay within the governor limits.

Additionally, use helper methods to perform complex logic and avoid repeating code, ensuring
streamlined execution and minimizing resource consumption.

6. How do you implement and optimize Salesforce

Flows for business automation?
Salesforce Flows are implemented by creating visual workflows that define steps and conditions
for automating processes.

To optimize Flows:
1. Use sub-flows to break down complex processes into manageable components.
2. Leverage fault paths to handle errors gracefully.
3. Avoid unnecessary loops and conditions that may impact performance.
4. Regularly test and debug Flows using the Flow Debugger.
5. Monitor Flow performance in the setup’s Flow Usage Metrics to identify bottlenecks.
Flows simplify automation by reducing dependency on Apex code while providing powerful,
scalable solutions.
7. How can you implement one-to-many relationships
in Salesforce?
You can use the lookup and master-detail fields to create one-to-many relationships in Salesforce.
These fields help connect records from one object to records in another object.

With a lookup field, you can link one record from the first object to one record in the second
object. Meanwhile, a master-detail field connects multiple records in the second object to one
record in the first object.

8. What are the various types of sandboxes and

Scratch Orgs in Salesforce, and when would you use
each for development and deployment?
Salesforce provides several sandbox types:
 The Developer sandbox is for individual developers to test and develop features.
 The Developer Pro sandbox is similar to Developer but has more storage for larger
projects.
 A Partial Copy sandbox contains a subset of production data to test specific use cases.
 A Full sandbox is a full replication of production for end-to-end testing.
  Scratch Orgs are temporary and designed for source-driven development, which is ideal for
CI/CD pipelines and version control systems. They’re commonly used to test new features in
isolation before merging into production.

9. How do you handle exceptions and errors in Apex

code?
In Apex code, exceptions and errors are handled to prevent the program from crashing and to give
users a better experience.

When something unexpected happens, try-catch blocks are used to catch and handle the error
gracefully. This works by enclosing code with an exception in a try block, which is then enclosed in
a catch block if the try block itself shows an exception. Instead of showing a clunky error message,
it can display a friendly message to users or log the issue for developers to fix.

10. What are custom metadata types, and how do

they improve configuration management in
Salesforce?
Custom metadata types are objects used to define application configurations that can be
packaged and deployed across orgs.

Unlike custom settings, metadata types support version control and are ideal for managing
reusable, declarative configurations. For example, they can store API endpoint URLs or thresholds
for automated processes.

They improve configuration management by enabling admins to make adjustments declaratively

without altering code, ensuring consistency across environments during deployment.

11. What is the role of the Schema Builder in

Salesforce?
The Schema Builder in Salesforce is a graphical tool that allows developers to view and manage
the objects and relationships in their Salesforce org. It provides a visual representation of the data
model, making it easier to understand and modify the schema.

12. How do you handle data imports and exports in

Salesforce?
Data Import Wizard and Data Loader are used to import data from spreadsheets or other sources
into Salesforce.

For exports, tools such as Data Export and Data Export Service are used to get data out of
Salesforce and save it as files. It's like making a copy of the information for use outside of
Salesforce.

Handling data imports and exports helps keep the information up-to-date and lets users work with
data from different places easily.

13. How can you perform a mass update of records in

Salesforce?
One way to do this is using the Data Loader tool, where you can upload a spreadsheet with the
updated information and match it to the right records in Salesforce. The tool will then apply the
changes to all the matched records in one go, saving time and effort.

Another method is using the Salesforce Reports and Dashboards feature. You can create a report
to filter and find the records you want to update, then use the Mass Edit option to change multiple
records simultaneously.
You can also set up a custom list view. To do this, you’ll first need to enable special permissions on
the profile user interface, including the Mass edit from lists, Inline editing, and Enhanced lists
options.
From there, you can create a list view and specify different record types and visibilities. Once
you’ve set up the list view, click the bulk edit checkbox at the top to select all the records. Any
changes you make will update the entire list.

14. How can you optimize SOQL queries to improve

performance?
To optimize SOQL queries in Salesforce, you can:
 Ensure your queries are selective and filtered on indexed fields
 Avoid querying large numbers of records in a single query
 Use aggregate functions like sum, count, and avg to avoid unnecessary fields
 Use relationship queries (joins)
 Use custom index functions
 Use limit clauses
 Bulkify queries in Apex
 Avoid nested queries
 Cache data where possible
 Monitor query performance
15. How would you decide between using a trigger
and a Flow in Salesforce for automation?
The choice depends on the complexity of the process and the need for customization.

Use Flows for declarative, point-and-click automation such as field updates, sending notifications,
or simple logic. Flows are easier to maintain and require no coding expertise.

Use Apex triggers for complex, programmatic tasks like handling multiple objects simultaneously,
managing large data volumes, or invoking third-party APIs.

For maintainability, prioritize Flows whenever possible unless the business logic necessitates Apex.

16. What is a roll-up summary field, and how is it used

in Salesforce?
A roll-up summary field calculates values from related records and displays a summary of the
results on the parent record. It's commonly used to perform calculations like sum, count, average,
maximum, or minimum on child records and display the result on the parent record.
17. What is the use of the @future annotation in
Apex?
The @future annotation identifies and executes a method asynchronously in Apex. When a
method is annotated with @future, it runs in a separate thread, independent of the current
transaction. This allows the method to be called and executed later rather than immediately within
the current context.

The main purpose of using the @future annotation is to offload time-consuming or resource-
intensive tasks from the main transaction, making the application more efficient and responsive.
It’s commonly used for tasks like sending email notifications, performing callouts to external
systems, or processing large volumes of data.

18. How do you integrate external systems with

Salesforce, and what role do MuleSoft, Pub/Sub APIs,
or GraphQL play in modern integrations?
Integrating external systems with Salesforce ensures seamless data flow and communication.
Here’s how this works:
 APIs (usually with OData protocol): APIs allow data exchange and real-time
communication between Salesforce and external applications.
 REST: Best for lightweight integrations like fetching or updating records via HTTP methods
(GET, POST, and PUT). Use tools like Postman to test API requests and implement
authentication via OAuth.
 Bulk: Ideal for handling large data volumes, such as migrating datasets between systems.
Bulk API 2.0 simplifies asynchronous processing for data import/export.
 Pub/Sub: Facilitates real-time event-driven communication by publishing changes in
Salesforce to subscribed external systems (like notifying a third-party inventory system about
a sales update).
 SOAP: A robust option for legacy systems, particularly when schema validation or complex
operations are required. Use WSDL (Web Services Description Language) files to define
integration points.
 Outbound messaging: Used in Workflow Rules or Flows to send notifications (XML-based)
to external systems when a record is created or updated. Configure endpoints in Salesforce
for automatic transmission of data.
 Adapters for non-OData APIs – including middleware tools like MuleSoft and custom
adapters – enable integrations with systems that don’t natively support OData protocols. For
example, MuleSoft’s Anypoint platform can transform non-OData data structures into formats
compatible with Salesforce APIs.
 Apex callouts allow custom integrations by sending HTTP requests to external services. Use
“HttpRequest” and “HttpResponse” classes in Apex to handle API requests and responses
securely. Ensure callouts are wrapped in @future methods or Queueable Apex to comply with
governor limits.
 Third-party, pre-built connectors – like MuleSoft’s Salesforce Connector – simplify
integration with popular platforms, such as SAP or NetSuite. These tools minimize coding by
providing drag-and-drop interfaces for mapping data between Salesforce and other systems.
 Webhooks enable external applications to listen for changes in Salesforce records. For
instance, you can set up a webhook to trigger an HTTP POST request when an opportunity is
closed, notifying your accounting system to generate an invoice.
 GraphQL – a query language for APIs and a runtime for fulfilling queries with existing data
– provides a flexible approach to data retrieval, offering efficient and precise data fetching.
 GraphQL provides a flexible query-based approach to data retrieval, offering efficient and
precise data fetching.
19. Can you explain the differences between a lookup
relationship and a master-detail relationship in
Salesforce?
A lookup relationship creates a link between two objects, allowing users to link records from one
object to another. A master-detail relationship creates a parent-child relationship, where the child
record inherits certain behaviors and permissions from the parent.

20. How do you handle data migration from one

Salesforce org to another?
Data migration from one Salesforce org to another can be done using the Data Loader, Change
Data Capture, or Salesforce Data Integration tools. It involves extracting data from the source org,
transforming it as needed, and loading it into the target org.

21. How do you handle data deduplication in

Salesforce?
Data deduplication in Salesforce involves identifying and removing duplicate records to maintain
data accuracy and integrity. To achieve this, you can use tools like Data Import Wizard, Data
Loader, or third-party deduplication apps.

22. How do you implement validation rules to enforce

data quality in Salesforce?
To implement validation rules in Salesforce and enforce data quality, go to the Object's settings,
navigate to the Validation Rules section, and create rules with specific criteria and error messages.
These rules will be triggered when users attempt to save records, ensuring that data adheres to
the defined criteria and maintains its accuracy and consistency.

23. Describe how you can maintain data privacy and

security in Salesforce.
You can establish strong user authentication measures, such as through Salesforce’s multi-factor
authentication options or by connecting the platform with outside authentication apps like OKTA
for added security. You can also define user profiles and roles to control data access and encrypt
sensitive data at rest and in transit.
Additionally, you can regularly monitor user access and usage patterns, conduct security audits,
and provide ongoing training to ensure users follow best security practices.

On top of that, Salesforce enables you to export org data in CSV files. This serves as a backup of
your information in the event of a security breach or data loss.

24. Can you explain the differences between static

and dynamic SOQL queries in Apex?
In Apex, static SOQL queries are written at compile-time and are fixed, meaning the query
structure and fields are known before execution. These are written within square brackets.

Dynamic SOQL queries, on the other hand, are constructed at runtime as strings and allow for
building queries based on dynamic conditions or variables, offering more flexibility in handling
varying query requirements.

25. How do you handle long-running processes in

Salesforce?
Use Asynchronous Apex, such as Batch Apex or Queueable Apex. This breaks down the process
into smaller chunks that can be executed separately and efficiently in the background.
26. Describe what custom labels are used for in
Salesforce and when to use them.
Custom labels in Salesforce are used to store text values that can be easily translated into
different languages. They provide a way to reference these text values in formulas, Visualforce
pages, Apex classes, and Lightning pages and components, allowing for better internationalization
and localization of Salesforce applications.

Use custom labels when you need to store static text or messages in a centralized and
translatable manner. This provides a more flexible and scalable approach to managing text
content. They’re often used for things like help or error messages, as they can be set to appear in
various languages, depending on where a user accesses the platform.

27. How do you optimize Visualforce pages for better

performance, and what steps would you take to
migrate them to Lightning Web Components?
To optimize Visualforce pages, minimize SOQL queries, avoid large datasets, reduce the number of
controller actions, and use efficient Apex code. Migrating to Lightning Web Components (LWC)
involves analyzing existing Visualforce functionality, identifying reusable components, and
redesigning them in LWC for better performance, maintainability, and modern user experience.
28. How would you leverage Salesforce Einstein AI for
predictive analytics in sales and marketing?
Salesforce Einstein AI can analyze historical data and identify trends to predict customer behavior,
such as lead conversion likelihood or sales forecasting. For marketing, it helps segment audiences
and optimize campaigns by predicting which messaging will resonate best with specific groups.
Implementing Einstein AI enables businesses to automate insights and make data-driven
decisions.

29. Can you explain the benefits and implementation

of Salesforce’s Flow Orchestration for automating
complex workflows?
Flow Orchestration allows businesses to build multi-step, multi-user workflows within Salesforce.
It’s particularly useful for automating approval processes, onboarding new employees, and
handling multi-department tasks. It connects various flows, enhances automation, and improves
efficiency by reducing manual interventions.
30. What’s your approach to integrating Salesforce
with third-party AI tools like ChatGPT for enhanced
customer support?
Integration can be achieved using APIs, where Salesforce communicates with tools like ChatGPT
for automated responses, knowledge base suggestions, and customer query handling. A robust
approach involves ensuring data security, defining integration points (e.g., case management),
and monitoring real-time interactions to maintain quality.

31. How do you manage data compliance with

Salesforce’s Data Mask feature in a sandbox
environment?
Salesforce’s Data Mask allows sensitive data to be obfuscated in sandbox environments, ensuring
compliance with data privacy regulations like GDPR or HIPAA. The setup involves defining fields to
be masked, applying masking patterns, and periodically auditing masked data to prevent
exposure.
32. Explain how Salesforce’s Hyperforce infrastructure
impacts global business scalability and security.
Hyperforce redefines Salesforce’s cloud infrastructure by providing localized data storage and
enhanced security while allowing rapid scalability. This is critical for global businesses needing to
meet regional compliance requirements and maintain performance during periods of high
demand.

How to add tricky Salesforce interview

questions to your hiring campaign
Tricky Salesforce questions are perfect for evaluating candidates’ technical expertise and
problem-solving skills. However, they shouldn’t be the only tool you use during hiring.

To properly assess each Salesforce candidate, use a multi-measure testing technique that pairs
challenging questions with skills-based tests, personality assessments, and more.
TestGorilla provides a library of 400+ scientifically backed pre-employment tests, which you can
mix and match to create the perfect assessment. For Salesforce roles, in particular, you can use
the following:
  Salesforce CRM test: Measures skills in managing leads, accounts, and contacts, as well as
generating custom reports, tracking and forecasting, integrating with APIs, customizing data
and layouts, and much more.
 APEX Salesforce test: Helps assess proficiency in Apex fundamentals and design patterns,
SOQL/SOSL queries, and the Salesforce data model – as well as identify candidates skilled in
Lightning Platform customization.
 Salesforce for BDRs test: Evaluates how effectively BDR candidates use Salesforce to
contribute to sales team goals and manage workload.
 Personality tests (DISC and Enneagram): Offer insights into applicants’ behavioral traits.
 Culture Add test: Shows you how well each candidate will mesh with your existing team
and company culture.
 Soft skills tests: Measure communication, motivation, time management,

Salesforce Interview Questions and Answers

1. What is Salesforce?
This is one of the most basic salesforce interview questions, where the interviewer is simply checking if you can
club your knowledge into a quick answer or not! Here’s a short and straightforward answer to this salesforce
interview question - Salesforce is the most effective Customer Relationship Management (CRM) product that is
delivered to subscribers as a cost-effective software-as-a-service (SaaS).

2. What is a custom object in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, custom objects refer specifically to database tables that store data related to your company in
Salesforce.com.

3. What does a custom object permit the user to do?

Once the custom object is defined, the subscriber can perform the following tasks:

 Create custom fields

 Relate the custom object to other records

 Track events and tasks

 Build page layouts

  Create a custom tab for the custom object

 Analyze custom object data

 Create dashboards and reports

 Share custom tabs, custom apps, custom objects, and various other related components.

None of these tasks can be accomplished until the custom object has a definition.

4. What is Self-Relationship?

A Self-Relationship is a lookup relationship to the same object. It is this premise that allows users to take the object
“Merchandise” and create relationships with other objects.

The more experienced we are, the more we grow to understand that the questions we ask or the answers we give
in an interview say a lot about our enthusiasm and level of interest for a product, company, or organization. This is
definitely the case with Salesforce, the mightiest Customer Relationship Management (CRM) service in the world.
And if you wish to crack your next interview, these salesforce interview questions should help you out to prepare
beforehand and crack the interview seamlessly!

🕵🏻‍♂️Did You Know?

The nature of work and careers is changing fast - and in the future, the right skills will be prized over academic
qualifications alone.

"Hiring for skills is 5X more predictive of job performance than hiring for education and more than two times more
predictive than hiring for work experience."

Source: McKinsey Report | Taking a skills-based approach to building the future workforce
"Skilled Professionals with certification are 1.5X more likely to get a new job/ salary hike/ promotion"

Have a great start to your career by upskilling yourself in one of the top most in-demand skill with this free course
on ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ with a SkillUp verified certificate 📃upon completion.

Read about Why you should learn Salesforce?

Salesforce Interview Questions and Answers

1. What is Salesforce?
This is one of the most basic salesforce interview questions, where the interviewer is simply checking if you can
club your knowledge into a quick answer or not! Here’s a short and straightforward answer to this salesforce
interview question - Salesforce is the most effective Customer Relationship Management (CRM) product that is
delivered to subscribers as a cost-effective software-as-a-service (SaaS).

Enroll in this Salesforce Administrator Basics now, unlock the verified certificate & become job-ready for Salesforce-
related job roles!

Learn more about what Salesforce is and how it works.

Read more: What does a Salesforce Professional Do

 Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!
Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

2. What is a custom object in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, custom objects refer specifically to database tables that store data related to your company in
Salesforce.com.

3. What does a custom object permit the user to do?

Once the custom object is defined, the subscriber can perform the following tasks:

 Create custom fields

 Relate the custom object to other records

 Track events and tasks

 Build page layouts

 Create a custom tab for the custom object

  Analyze custom object data

 Create dashboards and reports

 Share custom tabs, custom apps, custom objects, and various other related components.

None of these tasks can be accomplished until the custom object has a definition.

4. What is Self-Relationship?

A Self-Relationship is a lookup relationship to the same object. It is this premise that allows users to take the object
“Merchandise” and create relationships with other objects.
Become job-ready for Salesforce Administrator roles now with this Salesforce Administrator Basics course for free!

5. What is Object Relationship Overview?

In Salesforce, the object relationship overview links custom object records to standard object records in a related
list. This is helpful to track product defects in related customer cases. Salesforce allows users to define different
types of relationships by creating custom relationship fields on an object.

6. What can cause data loss in Salesforce?

Data loss in Salesforce can be caused by a number of reasons, including:

 Changing data and date-time.

 Migrating to percent, number, and currency from other data types.

 Changing from the multi-select picklist, checkbox, auto number to other types.

 Altering to multi-select picklist from any type except picklist.

 Changing to auto-number except for text.

 Changing from text-area to e-mail, phone, URL, and text.

7. How is SaaS beneficial to Salesforce?

SaaS is subscription-based, so clients can choose not to renew and discontinue using the program at any time
without penalty other than not being able to use Salesforce. SaaS is intended to help users avoid heavy initial
startup fees and investments. SaaS applications use a simple Internet interface supported by easy integration.

The more experienced we are, the more we grow to understand that the questions we ask or the answers we give
in an interview say a lot about our enthusiasm and level of interest for a product, company, or organization. This is
definitely the case with Salesforce, the mightiest Customer Relationship Management (CRM) service in the world.
And if you wish to crack your next interview, these salesforce interview questions should help you out to prepare
beforehand and crack the interview seamlessly!

🕵🏻‍♂️Did You Know?

The nature of work and careers is changing fast - and in the future, the right skills will be prized over academic
qualifications alone.

"Hiring for skills is 5X more predictive of job performance than hiring for education and more than two times more
predictive than hiring for work experience."

Source: McKinsey Report | Taking a skills-based approach to building the future workforce
"Skilled Professionals with certification are 1.5X more likely to get a new job/ salary hike/ promotion"
Have a great start to your career by upskilling yourself in one of the top most in-demand skill with this free course
on ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ with a SkillUp verified certificate 📃upon completion.

Read about Why you should learn Salesforce?

Salesforce Interview Questions and Answers

1. What is Salesforce?

This is one of the most basic salesforce interview questions, where the interviewer is simply checking if you can
club your knowledge into a quick answer or not! Here’s a short and straightforward answer to this salesforce
interview question - Salesforce is the most effective Customer Relationship Management (CRM) product that is
delivered to subscribers as a cost-effective software-as-a-service (SaaS).
Enroll in this Salesforce Administrator Basics now, unlock the verified certificate & become job-ready for Salesforce-
related job roles!

Learn more about what Salesforce is and how it works.

Read more: What does a Salesforce Professional Do

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!
Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

2. What is a custom object in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, custom objects refer specifically to database tables that store data related to your company in
Salesforce.com.

3. What does a custom object permit the user to do?

Once the custom object is defined, the subscriber can perform the following tasks:

 Create custom fields

 Relate the custom object to other records

 Track events and tasks

 Build page layouts

 Create a custom tab for the custom object

 Analyze custom object data

 Create dashboards and reports

 Share custom tabs, custom apps, custom objects, and various other related components.

None of these tasks can be accomplished until the custom object has a definition.
4. What is Self-Relationship?

A Self-Relationship is a lookup relationship to the same object. It is this premise that allows users to take the object
“Merchandise” and create relationships with other objects.
Become job-ready for Salesforce Administrator roles now with this Salesforce Administrator Basics course for free!

5. What is Object Relationship Overview?

In Salesforce, the object relationship overview links custom object records to standard object records in a related
list. This is helpful to track product defects in related customer cases. Salesforce allows users to define different
types of relationships by creating custom relationship fields on an object.

6. What can cause data loss in Salesforce?

Data loss in Salesforce can be caused by a number of reasons, including:

 Changing data and date-time.

 Migrating to percent, number, and currency from other data types.

 Changing from the multi-select picklist, checkbox, auto number to other types.

 Altering to multi-select picklist from any type except picklist.

 Changing to auto-number except for text.

 Changing from text-area to e-mail, phone, URL, and text.

7. How is SaaS beneficial to Salesforce?

SaaS is subscription-based, so clients can choose not to renew and discontinue using the program at any time
without penalty other than not being able to use Salesforce. SaaS is intended to help users avoid heavy initial
startup fees and investments. SaaS applications use a simple Internet interface supported by easy integration.

Showcase a verified certificate of completion on your resumé to advance your Salesforce career by 2X faster with
salary hike
 Professionals with a verified certificate for your skills on your resumé land top-paying job role 2X faster!

Unlock your certificate on Salesforce Administrator course now!

8. How does Salesforce track sales?

Salesforce is a tracking program that records a number of helpful basic details, such as:

 Number of customers served daily

 Daily sales volume

 Detailed reports from Sales Manager

 Sales figures by month or quarter

 Most importantly, Salesforce tracks and reports repeat customer activity, which is the key to any
sales organization.

9. How many types of relationships are offered by Salesforce.com?

Salesforce recognizes two relationship types: Master-detail relationships and Lookup relationships.
10. What is the trigger?

The trigger is the code that is executed before or after the record is updated or inserted.

11. What is the difference between Trigger and Workflow?

This is one of the most frequently asked Salesforce interview question. Workflow is an automated process that fires
an action based on evaluation criteria and rule criteria. As described above, Trigger is the code that is executed on
or after the record is updateThe more experienced we are, the more we grow to understand that the questions we
ask or the answers we give in an interview say a lot about our enthusiasm and level of interest for a product,
company, or organization. This is definitely the case with Salesforce, the mightiest Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) service in the world. And if you wish to crack your next interview, these salesforce interview
questions should help you out to prepare beforehand and crack the interview seamlessly!

🕵🏻‍♂️Did You Know?

The nature of work and careers is changing fast - and in the future, the right skills will be prized over academic
qualifications alone.

"Hiring for skills is 5X more predictive of job performance than hiring for education and more than two times more
predictive than hiring for work experience."

Source: McKinsey Report | Taking a skills-based approach to building the future workforce
"Skilled Professionals with certification are 1.5X more likely to get a new job/ salary hike/ promotion"

Have a great start to your career by upskilling yourself in one of the top most in-demand skill with this free course
on ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ with a SkillUp verified certificate 📃upon completion.

Read about Why you should learn Salesforce?

Salesforce Interview Questions and Answers

1. What is Salesforce?

This is one of the most basic salesforce interview questions, where the interviewer is simply checking if you can
club your knowledge into a quick answer or not! Here’s a short and straightforward answer to this salesforce
interview question - Salesforce is the most effective Customer Relationship Management (CRM) product that is
delivered to subscribers as a cost-effective software-as-a-service (SaaS).
Enroll in this Salesforce Administrator Basics now, unlock the verified certificate & become job-ready for Salesforce-
related job roles!

Learn more about what Salesforce is and how it works.

Read more: What does a Salesforce Professional Do

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!
Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

2. What is a custom object in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, custom objects refer specifically to database tables that store data related to your company in
Salesforce.com.

3. What does a custom object permit the user to do?

Once the custom object is defined, the subscriber can perform the following tasks:

 Create custom fields

 Relate the custom object to other records

 Track events and tasks

 Build page layouts

 Create a custom tab for the custom object

 Analyze custom object data

 Create dashboards and reports

 Share custom tabs, custom apps, custom objects, and various other related components.

None of these tasks can be accomplished until the custom object has a definition.
4. What is Self-Relationship?

A Self-Relationship is a lookup relationship to the same object. It is this premise that allows users to take the object
“Merchandise” and create relationships with other objects.
Become job-ready for Salesforce Administrator roles now with this Salesforce Administrator Basics course for free!

5. What is Object Relationship Overview?

In Salesforce, the object relationship overview links custom object records to standard object records in a related
list. This is helpful to track product defects in related customer cases. Salesforce allows users to define different
types of relationships by creating custom relationship fields on an object.

6. What can cause data loss in Salesforce?

Data loss in Salesforce can be caused by a number of reasons, including:

 Changing data and date-time.

 Migrating to percent, number, and currency from other data types.

 Changing from the multi-select picklist, checkbox, auto number to other types.

 Altering to multi-select picklist from any type except picklist.

 Changing to auto-number except for text.

 Changing from text-area to e-mail, phone, URL, and text.

7. How is SaaS beneficial to Salesforce?

SaaS is subscription-based, so clients can choose not to renew and discontinue using the program at any time
without penalty other than not being able to use Salesforce. SaaS is intended to help users avoid heavy initial
startup fees and investments. SaaS applications use a simple Internet interface supported by easy integration.

Showcase a verified certificate of completion on your resumé to advance your Salesforce career by 2X faster with
salary hike
 Professionals with a verified certificate for your skills on your resumé land top-paying job role 2X faster!

Unlock your certificate on Salesforce Administrator course now!

8. How does Salesforce track sales?

Salesforce is a tracking program that records a number of helpful basic details, such as:

 Number of customers served daily

 Daily sales volume

 Detailed reports from Sales Manager

 Sales figures by month or quarter

 Most importantly, Salesforce tracks and reports repeat customer activity, which is the key to any
sales organization.

9. How many types of relationships are offered by Salesforce.com?

Salesforce recognizes two relationship types: Master-detail relationships and Lookup relationships.
10. What is the trigger?

The trigger is the code that is executed before or after the record is updated or inserted.

11. What is the difference between Trigger and Workflow?

This is one of the most frequently asked Salesforce interview question. Workflow is an automated process that fires
an action based on evaluation criteria and rule criteria. As described above, Trigger is the code that is executed on
or after the record is updated or inserted.

Facts 💡 you need to know:

10,191 learners who read this article already enrolled & completed the course ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ for
free to upgrade their career 👨‍💼💼.

Why wait? Enroll Now! 👍

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!

Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

12. What is a static resource in Salesforce?

With Salesforce’s static resource, subscribers can upload zip files, images, jar files, JavaScript, and CSS files that
can be referred in a Visualforce page. The optimum size of static resources in Salesforce is 250 MB.

13. What is the difference between Force.com and Salesforce.com?

Force.com is Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS), while Salesforce.com is Software-as-a-Service (SaaS).

14. Is there a limit for data.com records?

Salesforce users can see their limit form setup easily by simply clicking data.com administration/Users. From the
data.com users section, the users can see their monthly limit and exactly how many records are exported during
the month.

15. What are the three types of object relations in Salesforce?

The three types of object relations in Salesforce are:

 One-to-many
  Many-to-many

 Master-detail

The relation types are quite logical once the user becomes familiar with the software program.

d or inserted.

16. What are the different types of reports available in Salesforce?

The different types of reports in Salesforce are:

 Tabular report that displays the grand total in table form

 Matrix report where grouping is based upon both rows and columns

 Summary reports are detailed reports in which the grouping is based on columns.

 Joined report which allows two or more reports to be joined in a single report

17. Is it possible to schedule a dynamic dashboard in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, it is not possible to schedule a dynamic dashboard.

The more experienced we are, the more we grow to understand that the questions we ask or the answers we give
in an interview say a lot about our enthusiasm and level of interest for a product, company, or organization. This is
definitely the case with Salesforce, the mightiest Customer Relationship Management (CRM) service in the world.
And if you wish to crack your next interview, these salesforce interview questions should help you out to prepare
beforehand and crack the interview seamlessly!

🕵🏻‍♂️Did You Know?

The nature of work and careers is changing fast - and in the future, the right skills will be prized over academic
qualifications alone.

"Hiring for skills is 5X more predictive of job performance than hiring for education and more than two times more
predictive than hiring for work experience."

Source: McKinsey Report | Taking a skills-based approach to building the future workforce
"Skilled Professionals with certification are 1.5X more likely to get a new job/ salary hike/ promotion"

Have a great start to your career by upskilling yourself in one of the top most in-demand skill with this free course
on ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ with a SkillUp verified certificate 📃upon completion.

Read about Why you should learn Salesforce?

Salesforce Interview Questions and Answers

1. What is Salesforce?

This is one of the most basic salesforce interview questions, where the interviewer is simply checking if you can
club your knowledge into a quick answer or not! Here’s a short and straightforward answer to this salesforce
interview question - Salesforce is the most effective Customer Relationship Management (CRM) product that is
delivered to subscribers as a cost-effective software-as-a-service (SaaS).
Enroll in this Salesforce Administrator Basics now, unlock the verified certificate & become job-ready for Salesforce-
related job roles!

Learn more about what Salesforce is and how it works.

Read more: What does a Salesforce Professional Do

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!
Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

2. What is a custom object in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, custom objects refer specifically to database tables that store data related to your company in
Salesforce.com.

3. What does a custom object permit the user to do?

Once the custom object is defined, the subscriber can perform the following tasks:

 Create custom fields

 Relate the custom object to other records

  Track events and tasks

 Build page layouts

 Create a custom tab for the custom object

 Analyze custom object data

 Create dashboards and reports

 Share custom tabs, custom apps, custom objects, and various other related components.

None of these tasks can be accomplished until the custom object has a definition.

4. What is Self-Relationship?

A Self-Relationship is a lookup relationship to the same object. It is this premise that allows users to take the object
“Merchandise” and create relationships with other objects.
Become job-ready for Salesforce Administrator roles now with this Salesforce Administrator Basics course for free!

5. What is Object Relationship Overview?

In Salesforce, the object relationship overview links custom object records to standard object records in a related
list. This is helpful to track product defects in related customer cases. Salesforce allows users to define different
types of relationships by creating custom relationship fields on an object.

6. What can cause data loss in Salesforce?

Data loss in Salesforce can be caused by a number of reasons, including:

 Changing data and date-time.

 Migrating to percent, number, and currency from other data types.

 Changing from the multi-select picklist, checkbox, auto number to other types.

 Altering to multi-select picklist from any type except picklist.

 Changing to auto-number except for text.

 Changing from text-area to e-mail, phone, URL, and text.

7. How is SaaS beneficial to Salesforce?

SaaS is subscription-based, so clients can choose not to renew and discontinue using the program at any time
without penalty other than not being able to use Salesforce. SaaS is intended to help users avoid heavy initial
startup fees and investments. SaaS applications use a simple Internet interface supported by easy integration.

Showcase a verified certificate of completion on your resumé to advance your Salesforce career by 2X faster with
salary hike
 Professionals with a verified certificate for your skills on your resumé land top-paying job role 2X faster!

Unlock your certificate on Salesforce Administrator course now!

8. How does Salesforce track sales?

Salesforce is a tracking program that records a number of helpful basic details, such as:

 Number of customers served daily

 Daily sales volume

 Detailed reports from Sales Manager

 Sales figures by month or quarter

 Most importantly, Salesforce tracks and reports repeat customer activity, which is the key to any
sales organization.

9. How many types of relationships are offered by Salesforce.com?

Salesforce recognizes two relationship types: Master-detail relationships and Lookup relationships.
10. What is the trigger?

The trigger is the code that is executed before or after the record is updated or inserted.

11. What is the difference between Trigger and Workflow?

This is one of the most frequently asked Salesforce interview question. Workflow is an automated process that fires
an action based on evaluation criteria and rule criteria. As described above, Trigger is the code that is executed on
or after the record is updated or inserted.

Facts 💡 you need to know:

10,191 learners who read this article already enrolled & completed the course ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ for
free to upgrade their career 👨‍💼💼.

Why wait? Enroll Now! 👍

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!

Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

12. What is a static resource in Salesforce?

With Salesforce’s static resource, subscribers can upload zip files, images, jar files, JavaScript, and CSS files that
can be referred in a Visualforce page. The optimum size of static resources in Salesforce is 250 MB.

13. What is the difference between Force.com and Salesforce.com?

Force.com is Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS), while Salesforce.com is Software-as-a-Service (SaaS).

14. Is there a limit for data.com records?

Salesforce users can see their limit form setup easily by simply clicking data.com administration/Users. From the
data.com users section, the users can see their monthly limit and exactly how many records are exported during
the month.

15. What are the three types of object relations in Salesforce?

The three types of object relations in Salesforce are:

 One-to-many
  Many-to-many

 Master-detail

The relation types are quite logical once the user becomes familiar with the software program.

3 simple steps to get noticed by recruiters from Top companies for your C programming skills:
Step 1: Enroll in ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ course for FREE

Step 2: Complete the 7 hours course with 90 days free access

Step 3: Post completion, Unlock the verified certificate and share on your resume/CV/ job profile

16. What are the different types of reports available in Salesforce?

The different types of reports in Salesforce are:

 Tabular report that displays the grand total in table form

 Matrix report where grouping is based upon both rows and columns

 Summary reports are detailed reports in which the grouping is based on columns.
  Joined report which allows two or more reports to be joined in a single report

17. Is it possible to schedule a dynamic dashboard in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, it is not possible to schedule a dynamic dashboard.

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!

Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

18. What is the junction object and what purpose does it serve?

Junction objects are used to build many-to-many relationships between objects. For example, the user can take a
recruiting application where a position for a job can be linked to many candidates or can link a candidate to many
other jobs. In order to connect the data model, a third party object is referred to as a junction object. In the given
example, the junction object is “job application.”

19. What is an Audit Trail?

The Audit Trail function in Salesforce is useful for gaining information or for tracking all the recent setup changes
that the administration has done in the organization. The audit trail can preserve data for up to six months.
20. Explain the Salesforce dashboard?

In Salesforce, the dashboard is a pictorial representation of the report. 20 reports can be added to a single
dashboard.

21. What is the difference between SOQL and SOSL?

SOQL is Salesforce Object Query Language and SOSL is Salesforce Object Search Language. If you are sensing that
Salesforce is a culture unto itself, you are correct!

22. What is a Wrapper Class?

A Wrapper Class is a class whose instances are a collection of other objects and is used to display different objects
on a Visualforce page in the same table.

23. What is the sharing rule?

The sharing rules are applied when a user wishes to allow access to other users.
24. What are some benefits of using Salesforce?

Salesforce comes with a number of benefits. The most major ones are:

 Helps to understand the needs of the customer

 Provides a single communication platform for all the team members of a project

 Reporting is quick and seamless

 Has a very high degree of adaptability

 Very easy to manage

 Can integrate with countless apps (eg: Dataloader, Mailchimp, Ebsta)

25. What is an object in Salesforce?

An object is a database table that contains data specific to an organization (columns are fields and rows are
records). There are two types of objects in Salesforce - custom object and standard object.
  Standard object - A standard object is created by default in Salesforce. Eg: Contact, Account, and
Lead.

 Custom object - A custom object is created by the user and can contain any information that the
user wants. Eg: You can create a custom “Location” object to store information about the location of
various branches of a company.

26. What is the difference between static and dynamic dashboards?

Static dashboards are the default dashboards which are visible to any user. You can use it to show organizational-
wide data to a set of users.

Dynamic dashboards display data tailored for a specific user. You can use it to show one user’s specific data, such
as the number of sales closed, leads converted, etc.

27. What do you mean by governor limits?

Governor limits control how much data can be stored on a shared database. They help to ensure that no one
monopolizes the shared resources (Storage, CPU, Memory).

Here are some few examples of governor limits in Salesforce:

  Maximum CPU time on the Salesforce servers - 10,000ms

 Total number of sendEmail methods allowed - 10

 Total number of records retrieved by a SOQL query - 50,000

 Total number of callouts in a transaction - 100

28. What are some things that you can do to prevent governor limits?

Here are some best practices you can follow to ensure that a code does not hit the governor limits.

 Bulkify your Code

 Use @future Appropriately

 Don’t make any SOQL, DML operation inside a loop

 Queue large datasets

 Use batch apex for more than 50,000 records

29. What happens to master-detail and lookup relationships when a record is deleted?
In a master-detail relationship, all the details are deleted when the master record is deleted. However, in a lookup
relationship, the child record remains even when the parent record is deleted.

30. What do you mean by a sandbox in Salesforce?

In this salesforce interview question, the interviewer expects a thorough answer. Try giving as detailed answer as
you can to prove your salesforce knowledge. A sandbox is an exact replica of a database that can be used for
testing and development. It is very helpful because it allows you to test out new ideas on the duplicate database
without disturbing the original one.

There are four types of sandboxes in Salesforce:

 Developer Sandbox - It contains a copy of the production org’s metadata and is intended for both
development and testing in an isolated environment.

 Developer Pro Sandbox - It performs the same function as the developer sandbox, but can contain
larger datasets.

 Partialcopy sandbox - It is intended to be used only as a testing environment. It contains a sample of

the production org’s data and its metadata.
  Full sandbox - It is intended to be used only as a testing environment. It contains all the data of the
production org, including objects, attachments and metadata.

31. How can you edit apex classes in a production environment?

You cannot edit apex classes directly in a production environment. It needs to be first done in the sandbox, then
deployed in production where a user with Author Apex permission can make the changes.

32State the important features of Salesforce.

 Contact management: Easier contact management via access to interaction history and customers'
critical data.

 Opportunity management: Enables users to view the activity timeline of their customers,
representing several stages of a deal for taking the next move.

 Quote management: In-built quoting mechanism that quotes client data tracking the deal products,
including their standard price, quantity, product code, and price.

 Lead management: An activity timeline providing access to up-to-date contacts. The CRM app is a
quick lead converter machine informing its users about the lead's original source.
  Sales data: Provides accurate sales data at the right time and a faster connection with key decision-
makers.

 Mobility: The mobile app allows users to access CRM data conveniently.

 Workflow and approvals: Enables visual workflow for rapid designing and automating business
processes via drag-drop ability. Users can manage flexible approval processes for expenses or discounts.

 File sync and share: Ease of sharing, discussing, and publishing content in real-time.

 Dynamic dashboards and custom reports: Users gain a real-time picture of their business
performance in the market. They can also build their custom dashboard via drag and drop icons, adjust
the fields, and view data with filters. Charts give real-time data for the latest insights.

 Sales forecasting: Tracks leads' journey and gives forecasting on sales by analyzing them.

33. What is an App in Salesforce?

An App is a logical container holding various details pertaining to the company like the name, logo, business
operations, and more. The user can customize apps to suit their needs or develop new apps by combining standard
and custom tabs. The following process is for creating an app in Salesforce: Setup → Build → Create → App → Click
on new.
The more experienced we are, the more we grow to understand that the questions we ask or the answers we give
in an interview say a lot about our enthusiasm and level of interest for a product, company, or organization. This is
definitely the case with Salesforce, the mightiest Customer Relationship Management (CRM) service in the world.
And if you wish to crack your next interview, these salesforce interview questions should help you out to prepare
beforehand and crack the interview seamlessly!

🕵🏻‍♂️Did You Know?

The nature of work and careers is changing fast - and in the future, the right skills will be prized over academic
qualifications alone.

"Hiring for skills is 5X more predictive of job performance than hiring for education and more than two times more
predictive than hiring for work experience."

Source: McKinsey Report | Taking a skills-based approach to building the future workforce
"Skilled Professionals with certification are 1.5X more likely to get a new job/ salary hike/ promotion"

Have a great start to your career by upskilling yourself in one of the top most in-demand skill with this free course
on ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ with a SkillUp verified certificate 📃upon completion.

Read about Why you should learn Salesforce?

Salesforce Interview Questions and Answers

1. What is Salesforce?

This is one of the most basic salesforce interview questions, where the interviewer is simply checking if you can
club your knowledge into a quick answer or not! Here’s a short and straightforward answer to this salesforce
interview question - Salesforce is the most effective Customer Relationship Management (CRM) product that is
delivered to subscribers as a cost-effective software-as-a-service (SaaS).
Enroll in this Salesforce Administrator Basics now, unlock the verified certificate & become job-ready for Salesforce-
related job roles!

Learn more about what Salesforce is and how it works.

Read more: What does a Salesforce Professional Do

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!
Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

2. What is a custom object in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, custom objects refer specifically to database tables that store data related to your company in
Salesforce.com.

3. What does a custom object permit the user to do?

Once the custom object is defined, the subscriber can perform the following tasks:

 Create custom fields

 Relate the custom object to other records

  Track events and tasks

 Build page layouts

 Create a custom tab for the custom object

 Analyze custom object data

 Create dashboards and reports

 Share custom tabs, custom apps, custom objects, and various other related components.

None of these tasks can be accomplished until the custom object has a definition.

4. What is Self-Relationship?

A Self-Relationship is a lookup relationship to the same object. It is this premise that allows users to take the object
“Merchandise” and create relationships with other objects.
Become job-ready for Salesforce Administrator roles now with this Salesforce Administrator Basics course for free!

5. What is Object Relationship Overview?

In Salesforce, the object relationship overview links custom object records to standard object records in a related
list. This is helpful to track product defects in related customer cases. Salesforce allows users to define different
types of relationships by creating custom relationship fields on an object.

6. What can cause data loss in Salesforce?

Data loss in Salesforce can be caused by a number of reasons, including:

 Changing data and date-time.

 Migrating to percent, number, and currency from other data types.

 Changing from the multi-select picklist, checkbox, auto number to other types.

 Altering to multi-select picklist from any type except picklist.

 Changing to auto-number except for text.

 Changing from text-area to e-mail, phone, URL, and text.

7. How is SaaS beneficial to Salesforce?

SaaS is subscription-based, so clients can choose not to renew and discontinue using the program at any time
without penalty other than not being able to use Salesforce. SaaS is intended to help users avoid heavy initial
startup fees and investments. SaaS applications use a simple Internet interface supported by easy integration.

Showcase a verified certificate of completion on your resumé to advance your Salesforce career by 2X faster with
salary hike
 Professionals with a verified certificate for your skills on your resumé land top-paying job role 2X faster!

Unlock your certificate on Salesforce Administrator course now!

8. How does Salesforce track sales?

Salesforce is a tracking program that records a number of helpful basic details, such as:

 Number of customers served daily

 Daily sales volume

 Detailed reports from Sales Manager

 Sales figures by month or quarter

 Most importantly, Salesforce tracks and reports repeat customer activity, which is the key to any
sales organization.

9. How many types of relationships are offered by Salesforce.com?

Salesforce recognizes two relationship types: Master-detail relationships and Lookup relationships.
10. What is the trigger?

The trigger is the code that is executed before or after the record is updated or inserted.

11. What is the difference between Trigger and Workflow?

This is one of the most frequently asked Salesforce interview question. Workflow is an automated process that fires
an action based on evaluation criteria and rule criteria. As described above, Trigger is the code that is executed on
or after the record is updated or inserted.

Facts 💡 you need to know:

10,191 learners who read this article already enrolled & completed the course ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ for
free to upgrade their career 👨‍💼💼.

Why wait? Enroll Now! 👍

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!

Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

12. What is a static resource in Salesforce?

With Salesforce’s static resource, subscribers can upload zip files, images, jar files, JavaScript, and CSS files that
can be referred in a Visualforce page. The optimum size of static resources in Salesforce is 250 MB.

13. What is the difference between Force.com and Salesforce.com?

Force.com is Platform-as-a-Service (PaaS), while Salesforce.com is Software-as-a-Service (SaaS).

14. Is there a limit for data.com records?

Salesforce users can see their limit form setup easily by simply clicking data.com administration/Users. From the
data.com users section, the users can see their monthly limit and exactly how many records are exported during
the month.

15. What are the three types of object relations in Salesforce?

The three types of object relations in Salesforce are:

 One-to-many
  Many-to-many

 Master-detail

The relation types are quite logical once the user becomes familiar with the software program.

3 simple steps to get noticed by recruiters from Top companies for your C programming skills:
Step 1: Enroll in ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ course for FREE

Step 2: Complete the 7 hours course with 90 days free access

Step 3: Post completion, Unlock the verified certificate and share on your resume/CV/ job profile

16. What are the different types of reports available in Salesforce?

The different types of reports in Salesforce are:

 Tabular report that displays the grand total in table form

 Matrix report where grouping is based upon both rows and columns

 Summary reports are detailed reports in which the grouping is based on columns.
  Joined report which allows two or more reports to be joined in a single report

17. Is it possible to schedule a dynamic dashboard in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, it is not possible to schedule a dynamic dashboard.

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!

Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

18. What is the junction object and what purpose does it serve?

Junction objects are used to build many-to-many relationships between objects. For example, the user can take a
recruiting application where a position for a job can be linked to many candidates or can link a candidate to many
other jobs. In order to connect the data model, a third party object is referred to as a junction object. In the given
example, the junction object is “job application.”

19. What is an Audit Trail?

The Audit Trail function in Salesforce is useful for gaining information or for tracking all the recent setup changes
that the administration has done in the organization. The audit trail can preserve data for up to six months.
20. Explain the Salesforce dashboard?

In Salesforce, the dashboard is a pictorial representation of the report. 20 reports can be added to a single
dashboard.

21. What is the difference between SOQL and SOSL?

SOQL is Salesforce Object Query Language and SOSL is Salesforce Object Search Language. If you are sensing that
Salesforce is a culture unto itself, you are correct!

22. What is a Wrapper Class?

A Wrapper Class is a class whose instances are a collection of other objects and is used to display different objects
on a Visualforce page in the same table.

23. What is the sharing rule?

The sharing rules are applied when a user wishes to allow access to other users.
24. What are some benefits of using Salesforce?

Salesforce comes with a number of benefits. The most major ones are:

 Helps to understand the needs of the customer

 Provides a single communication platform for all the team members of a project

 Reporting is quick and seamless

 Has a very high degree of adaptability

 Very easy to manage

 Can integrate with countless apps (eg: Dataloader, Mailchimp, Ebsta)

A few words from fellow learners on SkillUp:

 Strengthen your Salesforce skills by availing the free course on ‘Salesforce Administrator Basics’ with a SkillUp
verified certificate 📃upon completion.

25. What is an object in Salesforce?

An object is a database table that contains data specific to an organization (columns are fields and rows are
records). There are two types of objects in Salesforce - custom object and standard object.

 Standard object - A standard object is created by default in Salesforce. Eg: Contact, Account, and
Lead.

 Custom object - A custom object is created by the user and can contain any information that the
user wants. Eg: You can create a custom “Location” object to store information about the location of
various branches of a company.

26. What is the difference between static and dynamic dashboards?

Static dashboards are the default dashboards which are visible to any user. You can use it to show organizational-
wide data to a set of users.

Dynamic dashboards display data tailored for a specific user. You can use it to show one user’s specific data, such
as the number of sales closed, leads converted, etc.

27. What do you mean by governor limits?

Governor limits control how much data can be stored on a shared database. They help to ensure that no one
monopolizes the shared resources (Storage, CPU, Memory).

Here are some few examples of governor limits in Salesforce:

 Maximum CPU time on the Salesforce servers - 10,000ms

 Total number of sendEmail methods allowed - 10

 Total number of records retrieved by a SOQL query - 50,000

 Total number of callouts in a transaction - 100

28. What are some things that you can do to prevent governor limits?

Here are some best practices you can follow to ensure that a code does not hit the governor limits.

 Bulkify your Code

 Use @future Appropriately

 Don’t make any SOQL, DML operation inside a loop

 Queue large datasets

 Use batch apex for more than 50,000 records

29. What happens to master-detail and lookup relationships when a record is deleted?

In a master-detail relationship, all the details are deleted when the master record is deleted. However, in a lookup
relationship, the child record remains even when the parent record is deleted.

30. What do you mean by a sandbox in Salesforce?

In this salesforce interview question, the interviewer expects a thorough answer. Try giving as detailed answer as
you can to prove your salesforce knowledge. A sandbox is an exact replica of a database that can be used for
testing and development. It is very helpful because it allows you to test out new ideas on the duplicate database
without disturbing the original one.

There are four types of sandboxes in Salesforce:

 Developer Sandbox - It contains a copy of the production org’s metadata and is intended for both
development and testing in an isolated environment.

 Developer Pro Sandbox - It performs the same function as the developer sandbox, but can contain
larger datasets.

 Partialcopy sandbox - It is intended to be used only as a testing environment. It contains a sample of

the production org’s data and its metadata.

 Full sandbox - It is intended to be used only as a testing environment. It contains all the data of the
production org, including objects, attachments and metadata.

31. How can you edit apex classes in a production environment?

You cannot edit apex classes directly in a production environment. It needs to be first done in the sandbox, then
deployed in production where a user with Author Apex permission can make the changes.
32State the important features of Salesforce.

 Contact management: Easier contact management via access to interaction history and customers'
critical data.

 Opportunity management: Enables users to view the activity timeline of their customers,
representing several stages of a deal for taking the next move.

 Quote management: In-built quoting mechanism that quotes client data tracking the deal products,
including their standard price, quantity, product code, and price.

 Lead management: An activity timeline providing access to up-to-date contacts. The CRM app is a
quick lead converter machine informing its users about the lead's original source.

 Sales data: Provides accurate sales data at the right time and a faster connection with key decision-
makers.

 Mobility: The mobile app allows users to access CRM data conveniently.

 Workflow and approvals: Enables visual workflow for rapid designing and automating business
processes via drag-drop ability. Users can manage flexible approval processes for expenses or discounts.

 File sync and share: Ease of sharing, discussing, and publishing content in real-time.
  Dynamic dashboards and custom reports: Users gain a real-time picture of their business
performance in the market. They can also build their custom dashboard via drag and drop icons, adjust
the fields, and view data with filters. Charts give real-time data for the latest insights.

 Sales forecasting: Tracks leads' journey and gives forecasting on sales by analyzing them.

33. What is an App in Salesforce?

An App is a logical container holding various details pertaining to the company like the name, logo, business
operations, and more. The user can customize apps to suit their needs or develop new apps by combining standard
and custom tabs. The following process is for creating an app in Salesforce: Setup → Build → Create → App → Click
on new.

Want a Top Software Development Job? Start Here!

Full Stack Developer - MERN StackEXPLORE PROGRAM

34. What are the different types of apps you can use in Salesforce?

 Custom app: Suitable for business owners to build apps that cater to business requirements from
time to time.
  Console app: Suitable only for a client service business, where the main focus is on tackling the
client's issues. It is comparatively less used in the market.

35. State the main differences between role and profile.

Role Profile

Sets the limitation for what a

Defines data visibility for a user. user can do in an
organization.

Defines what user data a user can see based

Defines permissions.
on the hierarchy.

Mandatory to define a
Not mandatory
profile.
36. What is a profile in Salesforce? Can two different users have the same profile?

A profile is a collection of permissions and settings that define all a user can do in Salesforce, giving them the
authority to access certain records. There are various profiles, such as a sales profile, that can access contacts,
leads, campaigns, and more.

People under a department can have the same profiles. For instance, several people are assigned the same sales
profile in a sales department. So, any number of people can have the same profile.

37. What do you understand about the Master-Detail relationship in Salesforce?

Master-Detail is a relationship between a child and a parent where the parent is the master, and the detail
represents a child. It is useful to control the display of detail records based on the value in the master record.

The master object has complete control over the Detail object behavior. Also, the child's survival depends on the
parent because if the parent gets deleted, the child will automatically get deleted. Creating Roll-up summary fields
in master records calculates the child records' SUM, MIN, and AVG.

38. What do you understand about workflow in Salesforce?

Workflow allows automation of standard internal processes for saving time across an organization. It helps in
evaluating records as they are created or updated. It also determines whether an automated action must occur,
such as functions like follow-up emails, marketing activities, tracking the customer map journey, and more.

A workflow rule is a container for various workflow instructions, usually summed up in an if/then statement.

39. What are the key benefits of the Salesforce CRM?

 Communication: Salesforce Einstein Bots help automatically respond to chats on time and avoid
delay.

 Data syncing: Data syncing from other applications like MailChimp and G Suite helps avoid the
challenges of moving from one software to another. The Salesforce mobile app allows data tracking
anytime and anywhere.

 Data analytics tools: Salesforce's Einstein Analytics provides insights for users to address the
changing data instantly. It has several reporting tools and dashboards for data collection and work.

 Track customer activity: The user can understand the customer's journey via the sales cloud for
easier access to their background and behavior.

 Provide assistance via chat: The service cloud's live agent provides a chatbox depending on the
customer interaction and followers on the web page.
  Consistent engagement: The gathered data in Salesforce's CRM allows the creation of consistent
marketing campaigns for current customers.

 Building apps: Force.com simplifies building and customizing apps for any device.

40. What is Apex in Salesforce?

Apex is a strongly typed OOP language that allows developers to execute transaction control statements and flow
on Salesforce platform servers in conjunction with calls to the API. Its syntax is similar to Java and serves as
database stored procedures. The code can be initiated via triggers on objects and requests from web services, and
they run on the Lightning platform.

Apex enables developers to incorporate business logic to system events, including button clicks, Visualforce pages,
and related record updates.

41. What are Permission sets?

Permission sets are a collection of permissions/settings useful for giving the user access to numerous functions and
tools. Permission sets can be used for various users to extend their functional access without altering their profiles.
So, one can create a permission set instead of a separate profile every time.
42. What is the Force.com platform?

Force.com is the framework and codebase for the Salesforce application. It is a Platform as a Service (PaaS),
allowing users to simplify the design and deployment of cloud-based websites and applications. Developers
working on the Cloud IDE can deploy the applications on the servers of Force.com.

43. What are the various components of the Salesforce dashboard?

Some important components of the Salesforce dashboard are:

 Gauge: Displays a single value from a custom value range.

 Visualforce page: Helps in forming a custom component as a display of information unavailable in

other component types.

 Metric: Shows a single pair of key–values.

 Table: Displays report data in list form.

 Charts: Provide comparisons and are divided into six types: line chart, horizontal bar chart, vertical
bar chart, donut, funnel, and pie.
44. What do you understand about validation rules in Salesforce?

Validation rules comprise a formula/expressions for evaluating the data in one or more fields in a record for
meeting the standards one specifies before the user saves the record. Based on the data evaluation, the result is a
"True" or "False" value.

They display an error message to the user if the condition is "True" due to an invalid value.

These rules are helpful for the enforcement of integrity constraints against the data. If a rule fails, Salesforce
proceeds to check other validation rules. One can create validation rules for objects, fields, case milestones, or
campaign members.

45. What is Visualforce in Force.com?

Visualforce is the UI for the Force.com platform, allowing developers to create sophisticated, custom UI suitable for
native hosting on the Lightning platform.

Its framework has a tag-based markup language and standard server-side controllers for basic database operations
like queries. Every Visualforce tag corresponds to a UI component such as a field, related list, or page section.

Visualforce works on the standard MVC model. A developer can control its components by utilizing the logic used in
standard Salesforce pages. They can also associate their own logic written in Apex with a controller class.
46 What are record types in Salesforce?

Record types allow you to associate different business processes and present various page layouts and picklist
values to users based on the user profile.

Administrators can associate record types with user profiles. Consequently, different users can see different page
layouts and picklist values in the record's detail page. The two prominent benefits of record types are as follows:

 They modify user interaction experience as per business needs.

 Allow simple administration as there are fewer fields to maintain.

47. What are page layouts in Salesforce?

Page layouts control the layout and organization of fields, buttons, Visualforce, custom links, and related lists on
object record pages. They help organize user interface pages by determining which custom links, fields, and
related lists are required, read-only, and visible to the user.

For a customized experience, one can create multiple page layouts and apply them to various user groups.

48. What are the different types of Apex triggers in Salesforce?

The two main types of Apex triggers are as follows:

 Before triggers: For updating and validating record values before they are saved to the database.

trigger TriggerName on ObjectName(before event) //Here event can be insert, update or delete

code_block

 After triggers: For accessing field values of the records set by the system and stored in the
database. You can use these field values for making changes in other records.

trigger TriggerName on ObjectName(after event) //Here event can be insert, update or delete

code_block

}
49 What do you understand about the term fiscal year or economical year in Salesforce?

The economical or fiscal year is a time period used for calculating annual financial statements. It is based on a
company's financial year's starting and ending date. The business that Salesforce conducts and the Salesforce
revenue are considered. The two types of economical years in Salesforce are:

 Normal or standard fiscal year: It follows the Gregorian calendar for estimations and has a 12-month
structure. It can begin with the first day of a month of your choice belonging to a particular year.

 Custom fiscal year: It is applicable for the companies following weekly or quarterly financial
planning.

50. What is a skinny table, and what are the major considerations for a skinny table?

Skinny tables are useful in accessing the frequently used fields while avoiding joins. They enhance the
performance of certain read-only operations like reports, list views, and more. They are highly effective as they
stay in sync with source tables even in case of a modification in the source table.

Without contacting Salesforce customer support, one cannot create, access, or modify skinny tables.

The major considerations for skinny tables are as follows:

  It can contain a maximum of 100 columns.

 It is incapable of holding fields from other objects.

51. What are the different ways to share a record?

 Role hierarchy: When a user is added to a role, all users above the current user in the role hierarchy
have access to reading and sharing the records and inheriting permissions. The steps for role hierarchy
are:

Setup → Manage Users → roles → set up roles and click on 'add role', → create a name and click on save.

 OWD: Organization-Wide Defaults allow you to define an organization's baseline setting and give
permissions to the organization-wide. It helps define a user's accessibility level where they can view other
users' records. For OWD, follow these steps:

Setup → Security Controls → click on 'sharing settings' → Edit.

 Manual sharing: For sharing a single record/file to a particular user/group of users via manual
access. A button is available on the detail page of the record when the OWD setting is private.

 Criteria based sharing rules: We have to share records based on conditions. For instance, share
records with a user/group with the criteria of the country- India. The steps for sharing are:
Setup → security controls → sharing settings → select the object, provide name and conditions, and then click on
save.

 Apex sharing: One can share every object in Salesforce by creating a record for the shared object.

52. What do you understand about the Future annotation(@future)?

Future annotations specify methods that are executed asynchronously. These methods with future annotation
should be static and can only return a void type. The arguments mentioned should be primitive data
types/collections of primitive data types/ arrays of primitive data types.

A method specified with @future annotation will be executed once Salesforce has available resources.

53. Explain the types of SOQL statements in Salesforce.

The Salesforce Object Query Language or SOQL is employed in querying the records from database.com as and
when required. The two types of SOQL statements are as follows:

 Static SOQL: It is written using [] (array brackets) and is similar to IINQ (Ion Integrated Query). It is
suitable when there are no dynamic changes in the SOQL query.
  Dynamic SOQL: It is suitable for referring to the SOQL string creation at run time with Apex code. It
allows the creation of more flexible applications. For instance, you can create a search based on updated
records or end-user input with varying field names.

54. What are the various types of email templates available in Salesforce?

 Text: All the users in an organization have access to creating or changing these templates.

 HTML with letterhead: Users with the "Edit HTML Templates" permission and administrators can
create these templates based on a letterhead.

 Custom HTML: These are an extension of HTML with a letterhead. Administrators and users with
"Edit HTML Templates" permissions can create them without using the letterhead.

 Visualforce: Administrators and developers can create them using Visualforce. They have advanced
functionalities such as merging with a recipient's data.

55. What is Salesforce Lightning?

Salesforce Lightning is a component-based application development framework with a collection of tools and
technologies for effectively increasing the Salesforce platform performance. The tools include visual upgrades,
optimized interfaces, and more. It simplifies processes for business users who have no programming experience.
It allows easy and quick creation of applications that solve business issues and enhance engagement.

One of the most powerful features of Salesforce Lightning is Lightning Web Components (LWC), which provides a
modern approach to building UI components with improved performance and efficiency. If you're preparing for a
Salesforce development role, exploring these LWC Interview Questions and Answers can help you master the key
concepts and excel in your interview.

Other key features are:

 Provides a drag-drop facility for app creation and customization.

 Has tools and extensions for the development of reusable components.

 AppExchange for over 50 partner components.

 Has style guides and provides user experience practices for app development.

 Lightning Connect is an integration tool for applications of Force.com to consume data from an
external source that meets the OData specification.

56. State two examples of Salesforce API and their usage.

Salesforce has several APIs for developers to interact with the system. Examples of Salesforce API are:
  Streaming: The Streaming API is useful for triggering and receiving notifications when a change is
made to Salesforce data according to the defined SOQL query criteria. It can be used to push notifications
from the server to the client based on defined criteria.

 Bulk: It provides programmatic access for quick loading and querying a huge amount of data into
your Salesforce organization.

Related Software Developer Interview Guides

Coding Java Python

Java 8 Node.js JavaScript

Angular ReactJS Spring Boot

Salesforce is a Customer Relationship Management(CRM) platform that uses cloud technology to bring
companies and customers together. It helps businesses to manage their customer’s data, and track their
activities efficiently. It supports powerful, connected products for improving your marketing, sales, commerce,
service, IT, and more. Salesforce CRM does not need any technical knowledge to set up and manage the same.
CRM
Scope of Salesforce
Salesforce is a preferred career option if you are looking forward to CRM. A lot of companies like Accenture,
Adidas, Atlas, Cisco, Deloitte, Godrej, Infosys, etc. are making use of Salesforce. Those who opted for Salesforce
are enjoying a high scale of pay and extreme job satisfaction.

As the number of Salesforce platform end-users increases, companies face a lack of proficient skill sets in
Salesforce. They want Salesforce-proficient people who know the platform very well and can use its several
services for business needs. Hence, Salesforce professional count is increasing day by day.

Let’s look at the following comprehensive set of Salesforce Interview Questions and Answers which have
been categorised below:

 Salesforce Interview Questions For Freshers

 Salesforce Intermediate Interview Questions

 Salesforce Interview Questions for Experienced Developer

 Salesforce MCQ Questions

Salesforce Interview Questions For Freshers

1. What do you understand by workflow in Salesforce?
 Workflow in Salesforce allows you to automate standard internal procedures and processes for saving time
across your organization. It helps to evaluate records as they are created or updated and determines if an
automated action needs to occur.

 Automation functions in Salesforce include the functions such as sending follow-up emails, tracking the
customer map journey, performing other marketing activities to boost the sales of the company, etc.

 A workflow rule is a major container for a set of workflow instructions. These instructions are usually
summed up in an if/then statement. Workflow rules are divided into two main components. They are:
 o Criteria: The “if” part of the “if/then” statement i.e., what must be true of the record for the workflow
rule to execute the related actions.

o Actions: The “then” part of the “if/then” statement i.e., what to do when the record meets the
criteria.

 Consider an example for a workflow, “if it is raining, then bring an umbrella”. In this example, the criteria
are “it is raining” and the action is “bring an umbrella”. If the criteria aren’t met, then the action isn’t
executed. The workflow rule’s actions are executed only when a record meets all the criteria of a workflow
rule.
Workflow In Salesforce

Create a free personalised study plan

Get into your dream companies with expert guidance

Real-Life Problems

Prep for Target Roles

Custom Plan Duration

Create My Plan
2. What is an object in Salesforce?
In Salesforce, objects are database tables that are used to store the data of an organization. There are two types
of objects in Salesforce. They are:

 Standard object: These are the objects provided by the Salesforce platform, which includes contacts,
accounts, cases, campaigns, opportunities, leads, products, contracts, reports, dashboards, etc.

 Custom object: They are objects created by developers based on the business process. It stores the
important and unique information of an organization. It gives a structure for data sharing. The custom
object includes page layouts, custom fields, relationship to other objects, custom user interface tab, etc.

3. What is meant by an App in Salesforce?

An App in Salesforce is a logical container that holds various details related to the company such as a logo,
name, business operations, etc. You can customize apps to match your needs, or you can develop new
applications by combining custom and standard tabs.

The process to create an app in Salesforce is given below:

Setup —> build—> Create—> App—> Click on new.

By following the above procedure, you can develop an application as you want.
You can download a PDF version of Salesforce Interview Questions.
Download PDF

4. Explain different types of apps we can use in Salesforce.

There are two types of apps that we can create in Salesforce. They are:

 Custom app: They are mainly used by business owners who want to build an app that suits their business
requirements from time to time. It’s widely used in the market.

 Console app: It can be used only in the client service business, where we focus on tackling the client’s
issues. Compared to a custom app it’s not widely used in the market.

5. What is sharing rule?

Sharing rules are applied when a user wishes to permit access to other users like public groups, roles, or
territories. It gives greater access to particular users by making automatic exceptions to your organization-wide
sharing settings. You can define total sharing rules up to 300 for a particular object, including criteria-based or
guest user sharing rules up to 50, if available for the object.

Explore InterviewBit’s Exclusive Live Events

By

Low-Level Design of Payment Apps

Naman Bhalla, Lead Instructor

20 Mar '25•7:30 PM
|

Certificate Included
Know More
Reserve My Spot

How OTT Platforms Handle Millions of Concurrent Viewers Using HLD

Pragy Agarwal, Senior Software Engineer

22 Mar '25•5:00 PM
|

Certificate Included
Know More
Reserve My Spot
Roadmap to Become a Machine Learning Engineer
Suraaj Hasija, Instructor

27 Mar '25•7:30 PM
|

Certificate Included
Know More
Reserve My Spot
Monolithic and Microservices Architecture
Deepak Kasera, Lead Instructor

27 Mar '25•7:30 PM
|

Certificate Included
Know More
Reserve My Spot
Get in-depth understanding of Kafka and Zookeeper
Anshuman Singh, Co-Founder

29 Mar '25•5:00 PM
|

Certificate Included
Know More
Reserve My Spot
6. What is an Audit trail in Salesforce?
An Audit trail in Salesforce is a unique feature that helps in tracking the changes made in the organization by you
and other administrators. In that way, you will always get to know who has modified the project at the last
minute. It is helpful for the organization with more administrators.

By using an audit trail, you can get to know the details about changes made, the date and time of the change,
and the username of the team member who made the changes.

7. What is the difference between role and profile?

The main difference between role and profile is given below -
Role Profile
The role helps in defining data visibility for a A profile sets the limitation for what an user can do in the
particular user. organization.
Based on the hierarchy, a role defines which user
Profile defines permissions
data a user can see.
Defining role to a user is not mandatory Defining profile is mandatory
Roles provide a feature to control access to records Profiles help to decide record privileges i.e. assuming the user
by impacting reports. For example,“My Teams” can observe the record, it concludes what the user can
filter. Roles function if a security model (OWDs) of function, edit, delete, view on that record. It controls other
an organization is set to private. system privileges like export data, mass email, etc.

Start Your Coding Journey With Tracks

Master Data Structures and Algorithms with our Learning Tracks

Topic Buckets

Mock Assessments
 Reading Material

View Tracks
8. What is a profile in Salesforce? Can two users have the same profile?
The profile in Salesforce is defined as a collection of settings and permissions that define what a user can do in
Salesforce. So it gives you the authority to access certain records in Salesforce. There are multiple profiles
available in Salesforce. For example, a sales profile can have access to leads, contacts, campaigns,
opportunities, etc.

The people who work under one department may be assigned the same profiles. Consider the case of sales
profile, many people work under it and each person who works under this is assigned with the same profile.
Hence we can say that any number of people can have the same profile.

9. What is a Master–Detail relationship in Salesforce?

 Master-Detail relationship is a relationship between a parent and child where the master represents the
parent and the detail represents a child. This relationship can be used when we want to control the display
of detail records based on the value present in the master record.

 The master object completely takes control of the behavior of the Detail object. The survival of the child is
dependent on the parent, because if the parent gets deleted then the child automatically gets deleted. You
can create Roll-up summary fields in master records which will calculate the SUM, AVG, and MIN of the
child records.

 Consider an example of a courier company model, where a delivery schedule is always linked to a delivery
location. If we delete a delivery location from our list, then all the related delivery schedules should also be
removed. Such a dependency can be achieved only through a Master-Detail relationship.

10. What is dashboard in Salesforce?

A dashboard in Salesforce is a pictorial representation of the report. It displays data from source reports as visual
components. These components provide a snapshot of key metrics and performance indicators of the
organization at a single glance. A single dashboard is capable of displaying 20 reports at a time.

11. What are the features of Salesforce

Contact management

 It provides easier contact management by giving access to critical data of the customers and interaction
history.

 It gives complete customer details including insights and engage-enhancement strategies. Social data of
the customers can be used for a deeper understanding of their particular behavior regarding any product
or service.

Opportunity management

 Salesforce provides an opportunity to view the activity timeline of your customers. It represents different
stages of a particular deal which helps you to decide your next move.

 You can see critical details of the activity timeline in addition to the business competitors. The readymade
templates ensure hassle-free emailing to the clients.

Quote management

 Quote management of the products will have tracking of the products, which are part of your deal and it
includes the standard price, product code, quantity, and quoted price. Also, you can establish quantity
along with revenue schedule and it reflects the delivery terms and payment.

 Salesforce CRM app is having a built-in quoting mechanism that automatically quotes client data. It also
creates an approved template PDF and sends it directly to the customer as an email.

Lead management
  Lead management is featured with an affluent activity timeline. It provides an access to up-to-date
contacts on the timeline. Also, it makes use of the sales paths to understand the related documents.

 CRM app functions as a fast lead converter machine, which informs you about the original source of the
leads. Automatic emailing boosts your revenue-generating mechanism.

Sales data

 Using Salesforce CRM you can get the right sales data at the right time. It provides a faster connection with
key decision-makers.

 You can easily plan territories. It can be used for increasing sales and marketing productivity with the latest
and most accurate data.

Mobility

 The Salesforce mobile app turns your mobile device into a portable sales office by allowing the users to
access CRM data at any time and from anywhere.

 You can log calls, work opportunities, check dashboards, respond to hot leads, etc.

Workflow and approvals

 It allows to use of visual workflow to rapidly design and automate any of the business processes with drag
and drop simplicity. And you can successfully manage flexible approvals processes for deal discounts,
expenses, and more.

File sync and share

 It’s easier to share files, discuss them, publish the best and track your content in real-time by using
Salesforce.

 You can quickly find what you are looking for, share it securely, and also subscribe to receive alerts when
something changes.
Dynamic dashboards and custom reports

 Dashboards offer a real-time picture of how your business is performing in the market. Users can recognize
market trends, calculate the activities and clear up the quantities. You can build your own dashboard by
using drag and drop icons in Salesforce CRM.

 It allows creating your own customized sales forecasting report with Salesforce CRM. By using a simple
drag and drop feature, users are able to adjust the fields and view data with filters. Charts provide real-
time data to give you the latest insight.

Sales forecasting

 It tracks the journey of the leads in the pipeline to look into whether they are reaching their destination i.e.
deals or not. It gives brilliant forecasting on sales upon analyzing the same. You can apply your right
judgment to the forecasted amount and according to that, you can plan your strategies.

 You can make use of in-line editing, multicurrency support, override visibility, etc. to stay on top of your
business.

 It gives the right credit to the right person and permits them to see the forecast as per overlays.

12. What are the benefits of using Salesforce CRM?

The benefits of using Salesforce CRM is given below:

 Communicate using automation tools: With the help of Salesforce Einstein Bots, its features can
automatically respond to chats on time. Thus avoids giving delayed response.

 Data syncing from different applications: Data from other applications such as MailChimp and G Suite can
be integrated into the Salesforce platform. This removes the difficulty of moving from one software to
another. Using Salesforce mobile app, you can keep track of your data anytime and anywhere.

 Utilization of data analytics tools: Salesforce’s Einstein Analytics gives insights so that users can address
the changing data right away. Salesforce has a collection of reporting tools and dashboards that will help
you collect information and work on it properly.
  Following customer activity: It helps to understand the customer’s journey through the sales cloud so that
you will have easier access to their behavior and background. You can review the click rates on your email
campaigns to help you recognize what works best for your customers.

 Assisting customers through chat: A chat box is provided by the service cloud’s live agent depending on
the interaction of your customers or followers on your web page. By connecting with the customer profile,
your service team can deliver answers. This is helpful in improving customer experiences by letting agents
respond quickly.

 Using an omnichannel feature: Multi-channel feature provided by the service cloud automatically shifts
conversations from various channels directly to the agents. This gives them one place to connect with
customers through calls, social media, chat, messaging, or email.

 Consistent engagement with current customers: Looking for a new customer is more expensive than
keeping the current ones. Use the gathered data in Salesforce’s CRM to create consistent marketing
campaigns.

 You can build apps: Force.com, a Platform as a Service(PaaS) simplifies customizing and building apps for
any device without using a complicated infrastructure.

Discover your path to a Successful Tech Career for FREE!

Answer 4 simple questions & get a career plan tailored for you

Interview Process

CTC & Designation

Projects on the Job

Try It Out

2 Lakh+ Roadmaps Created

13. What is trigger in Salesforce?
The trigger is defined as an Apex code that executes to perform custom actions, before or after modifications like
insert, update, delete, etc. that has done to records in Salesforce.

Triggers can be defined for top-level standard objects, like contact or account, custom objects, and few standard
child objects. They are active by default when created. When the specified database events occur, Salesforce
automatically fires active triggers.

The syntax for creating a trigger is given below:

trigger TriggerName on ObjectName (trigger_events)
{
code_block
}
To execute a trigger before or after insert, update, delete and undelete operations, specify multiple trigger
events like before insert, before delete, after insert, after update etc. in a comma-separated list.
Trigger in Salesforce
14. What is the difference between static and dynamic dashboards in Salesforce?
Static dashboards Dynamic dashboards
These are the default dashboards that
Dynamic dashboards show data tailored for a specific user
are visible to any user
It is used to show organizational-wide It is used to show a single user’s specific data, such as the number of sales
data to a set of users closed, leads converted, etc
It can be scheduled to automatically We can’t schedule dynamic dashboard because when the dashboard is
refresh its data opened by us, it will display the real-time generated data
15. What is Apex in Salesforce?
 Apex is a strongly typed and object-oriented programming language that permits developers to execute
flow and transaction control statements on Salesforce platform servers in conjunction with calls to the API.
It uses syntax that looks similar to Java and pretends like database stored procedures.

 Apex allows developers to add business logic to many system events, including Visualforce pages, button
clicks, and related record updates. This code can be initiated by requests from web services and from
triggers on objects.

 All Apex code runs completely on-demand on the Lightning platform. Apex code is written and saved to the
platform by developers. Through the user interface, end-users trigger the execution of Apex code

Salesforce Intermediate Interview Questions

1. Explain different components of dashboard available in Salesforce.
Some of Salesforce dashboard components are explained below:

 Gauge: It is used for displaying a single value within a custom value range.
  Metric: This is used for showing a single pair of key–values. We can enter the metric label directly on the
components by clicking the empty text field next to the grand total. All metrics placed in the dashboard
column would be displayed as a single component.

 Table: Tables are used for showing report data in the form of lists. For example, top five or bottom five
opportunities.

 Visualforce page: It is used for forming a custom component as a dashboard or displaying information
that is not available in other component types.

 Charts: It is used for showing comparisons. Charts are divided into 6 types. They are line Chart, vertical
bar chart, horizontal bar chart, donut, pie, and funnel.

2. What are Governor limits in Salesforce?

 Governor limits control how much data a shared database can store. They help to make sure that no one
monopolizes the shared resources like storage, CPU, and memory. Whenever the Apex code exceeds the
limit, it issues a runtime exception that cannot be handled.

 The following list gives some of the governor limits in Salesforce:

o Push notification limits

o Per-Transaction Apex limits

o Size-Specific Apex limits

o Miscellaneous Apex limits

o Static Apex limits

o Email limits

 Examples of governor limits in Salesforce:

o The total number of sendEmail methods permitted is 10.

 o The total number of records retrieved by a SOQL query is 50,000.

o Maximum CPU time on the Salesforce servers is 10,000ms on synchronous Apex.

o The total number of callouts(web services calls or HTTP requests) in a transaction is 100.

3. What is junction object in Salesforce?

Junction objects are useful in building many-to-many relationships between objects in Salesforce.

Consider an example of recruiting application, where a position for a job is linked to many candidates or a
candidate can apply for many other jobs. Here, a third-party object “job application” is referred to as a junction
object in order to connect the data model. In the above-given example, “job application” is the junction object.
J
unction Object in Salesforce
4. What are Permission sets?
A Permission Set is a collection of settings or permissions that is used to give access to numerous tools and
functions for the user. You can use permission sets for different types of users to extend functional access
without changing their profiles. Instead of creating a separate profile each time, you could easily create a
Permission Set.

5. What are the different types of reports available in Salesforce?

Reports will give a clear picture to the management. Management will make use of reports to track progress
towards its various goals, increase revenue, and control expenditure. Reports will also help to predict trends and
thus gives the advantage of the increase in profits.

There are four types of reports in Salesforce. They are as follows:

 Matrix report

o A report is formed by grouping the records by rows as well as columns. It is used when you want to
see data by two separate dimensions that aren’t related, such as date and product.

o Example: Summarize opportunities by account horizontally and by month vertically.

 Summary report

o A report that provides a listing of data with groupings and subtotals. It is used when subtotals are
needed, based on the value of a particular field, or when you want to create a hierarchically grouped
report.

o Example: All opportunities for your team subtotaled by owner and sales stage.

 Tabular report

o A report that provides details of a company in tabular format. It is used when you want a simple list
or an item list with a grand total.
 o Example: These reports are used to list all accounts, list of opportunities, list of contacts, etc.

 Joined report

o A report that is created by the mixture of any combination of reports. Like matrix report plus
summary report can give you a joined report. Also, matrix reports and tabular reports can give a
joined report.

o Example: You can develop a report to display opportunity, case, and activity data for your accounts.
Reports Available in Salesforce
6. Explain the Force.com platform
Force.com is the entire framework and codebase on which the whole Salesforce application exists. We can also
say that Salesforce is built on Force.com, which is a Platform as a Service (PaaS) that allows us to simplify the
design, development, and deployment of cloud-based applications and websites. Developers can work with Cloud
Integrated Development Environment (Cloud IDE) and deploy the applications on the servers of Force.com.

7. What are validation rules in Salesforce?

 Validation rules in Salesforce consist of a formula or expressions that evaluate the data in one or more
fields in a record to meet the standards you specify before the user can save the record. It returns a “True”
or “False” value based on the evaluation of the data. Validation rules are responsible for displaying an error
message to the user when the condition is “True” due to an invalid value.

 Validation rules are helpful in enforcing integrity constraints against the data. Here we give conditions in
the formula editor. If one validation rule fails, Salesforce proceeds to check another validation rule held
within the field or record and shows an appropriate error message at that particular field or above the
record.

 You are allowed to create validation rules for fields, objects, campaign members, or case milestones. For
example, we can create a validation rule that fires when a user tries to save an account with the incorrect
length for the account number.

8. What causes data loss in Salesforce?

There are many things that cause data loss in Salesforce. They are:

Human error:

 When editing an object definition (incorrectly changing a picklist), importing data (overwriting good data
with bad), or merging households are the common situations where human error may occur.
  For example, when you import data, it becomes important to match up fields. Situations like moving to
percent, number, and money from other data types or changing text area to URL, email, phone or text, etc.
will lead to incorrect match in fields. If you are updating a large number of records and match up incorrect
fields, your records will be invalid.

Accidental deletion of Salesforce data:

 A record (or multiple records) might be accidentally deleted by users or employees. Deleting records could
be because of miscommunication, forgetting to remove a contact from being deleted, and many other
reasons. So proper training and having a trusted backup/recovery solution are much important.

Purposeful deletion of Salesforce data:

 Disgruntled employees like the person who has recently got a very bad performance review and thinks
their job is at stake or who is jealous of other employees might try to delete the data. A few clicks on the
delete button may lead to the deletion of multiple records from Salesforce.

 If they empty their recycle bin, that data recovery will be difficult using the Weekly Export. It can cause
numerous damages if these records are not backed up properly.

Data sync errors:

 If you have more than one admin or use Outlook for Salesforce, you might experience a data sync error at
some point.

 For example, one admin is trying to refresh a sandbox while another admin is working from home and
trying to edit an object type in that same sandbox. When this happens, the admin who was editing the
object can lose his work in progress.

 Contacts in Outlook can over-write good Salesforce data when using Outlook for Salesforce, introducing
errors through inappropriate sync.

9. What is Visualforce in Force.com?

  Visualforce can be defined as the UI for the Force.com platform that allows developers to build
sophisticated, custom user interfaces which can be hosted natively on the Lightning platform.

 This Visualforce framework includes a tag-based markup language, a set of server-side “standard
controllers” that forms basic database operations(such as queries and saves) and each Visualforce tag
corresponds to a user interface components such as a field, section of a page, or a related list, etc.

 It works on the standard MVC model. It can have strong integration with the database and deploy auto-
generated controllers for database objects. The behavior of Visualforce components can be controlled by
the developer, by utilizing the same logic that was used in standard Salesforce pages. It is also possible for
a developer to associate their own logic with a controller class written in Apex code.

10. What are the differences between trigger and workflow in Salesforce?
Workflow Trigger
Workflow is an automated process that fires an action A trigger is a piece of program code that will be executed
depending on evaluation criteria and rule criteria before or after a record has been inserted or updated
We cannot carry out DML operations on workflow We can use 20 DML operations in a single trigger
We are able to access the trigger across the object and
We are able to obtain a workflow across the object
associated with that objects
We can use 20 SOQL(Salesforce Object Query Language)
We cannot query from database in workflow
from the database in a single trigger
11. What are record types in Salesforce?
 Salesforce record types permit us to associate different business processes and display different picklist
values and page layouts to different users based on the user profile.

 Administrators are having the ability to associate record types with the user profiles so that, in the record’s
detail page, different users will be able to see different picklist values and page layouts.

 For example, consider a case where record types are most often used i.e., to create two different sales
processes on the Opportunity object. Each of them with different sales stages and page layouts. This will
 indicate that with record types you will be able to apply multiple page layouts per object as well as per user
profile.

 Benefits of record types:

o It modifies user interaction experience to specific needs of the business.

o Allows for administration in a simple manner as there are fewer fields to maintain.

12. What are page layouts related to Salesforce?

 Page layouts are used to control the layout and organization of buttons, fields, Visualforce, custom links, s-
controls, and related lists on object record pages.

 They are helpful in organizing user interface pages by determining which fields, related lists, and custom
links are required, read-only, and visible for the user.

 We can create many page layouts and apply them to different user groups, with the aim of creating a
customized experience. For example, you could have a single account record like ACME Corp., but it
displays different information depending on your user profile.

 Here, you can only apply the one-page layout to a single group of users per object, per record type. For
example, if you have one record type based on the Accounts object, you can apply only one-page layout
per profile.

13. What are the two types of triggers in Salesforce?

Below are the two types of Apex triggers in Salesforce:

Before triggers: It can be used to update or validate record values before it is saved to the database.
trigger TriggerName on ObjectName(before event) //Here event can be insert, update or delete
{
code_block
}
After triggers: It can be used to access field values of the records that are set by the system (such as record’s
ID or LastModifiedDate field) that are stored in the database and use this field value to do the changes in other
records. Records that fire after the triggers are read-only.
trigger TriggerName on ObjectName(after event) //Here event can be insert, update or delete
{
code_block
}
14. What is fiscal year or economical year in Salesforce?
The fiscal year or economical year is defined as the period of time used for calculating annual financial
statements based on starting and ending date of a company’s financial year. In this period of time, whatever the
amount of business that Salesforce has done can be considered as fiscal year and depicts the Salesforce
revenue.

There are two types of fiscal years in Salesforce. They are:

 Normal or standard fiscal year: It is a period that allows estimating by following the Gregorian calendar
year that has a 12-month structure. Starting of the fiscal year can begin with the very first day of any
month you choose belonging to a particular year. For example, for the fiscal year starting in April, the
standard fiscal year is used.

 Custom fiscal year: It is mainly defined for the companies that lay their forecast based on weekly or
quarterly financial planning and can also customize the same. For example, you may have 4 quarters with
13 weeks per quarter in a 4-4-5 pattern or 13 periods per year.

15. Explain skinny table. What are the considerations for skinny table?
Skinny tables in Salesforce are useful in accessing the fields which are frequently used and to avoid joins. This
can improve the performance of certain read-only operations such as reports, list views, etc. Skinny tables are
highly effective because skinny tables will be in sync with source tables even when the source tables are
modified.
You need to contact Salesforce customer support if you want to use skinny tables. You cannot create, access, or
modify skinny tables yourself. For example, you need to contact Salesforce to update your skinny table definition
if you want to add new fields.

Considerations for skinny tables are:

 It can contain an utmost of 100 columns.

 It cannot hold fields from other objects.

 For full sandboxes, these skinny tables are copied to your full sandbox organizations. For other types of
sandboxes, skinny tables are not copied into your sandbox organizations. To have production skinny tables
to be activated, contact Salesforce customer support.

The below figure displays an Account view, a corresponding database table along with a skinny table that can
speed up account queries.
Skinny Table
Salesforce Interview Questions for Experienced Developer
1. Explain the types of SOQL statements in Salesforce.
Salesforce Object Query Language(SOQL) is useful in querying the records from database.com depending on the
requirement. There are 2 types of SOQL statements: Static SOQL and Dynamic SOQL.

Static SOQL:

 The Static SOQL statement is written using [] (array brackets). This statement is similar to IINQ (Ion
Integrated Query).

 It is used in the condition where you don’t have any dynamic changes in the SOQL query. We don’t use
Static SOQL when the field name or where the condition is needed to be dynamically defined.

Example for Static SOQL query:

Contact[] contacts = [SELECT testfield__C, FirstName, LastName FROM Contact WHERE LastName = 'Dhanya'];
Dynamic SOQL:

 It is used to refer to the SOQL string creation at run time with Apex code.

 Dynamic SOQL allows you to create more flexible applications. For example, you are able to create a
search based on end-user input or update records with different field names.

 To create a Dynamic SOQL query at run time using a Database.query() method, in any one of the given
below ways:

o Return a single sObject when the single record is returned by a query.

sObjects s = Database.query(string_limit_1);

o Return a list of sObjects when more than a single record is returned by a query.
List<sObject> sobjList = Database.query(string);
Example for Dynamic SOQL query:
String myTestString = 'TestName';
List<sObject> sobjList = Database.query('SELECT Id FROM MyCustomObject__c WHERE Name = :myTestString');
2. What are the different types of email templates available in Salesforce?
The list of different types of email templates that can be created in Salesforce is given below:

 Text: All the users in the organization are allowed to create or change these templates.

 HTML with letterhead: Only administrators and users with the “Edit HTML Templates” permissions are
able to create these templates based on a letterhead. The look and feel of your HTML email templates are
defined by the letterheads. It can inherit the logo, text, and color settings from a letterhead.

 Custom HTML: It is an extension of HTML with a letterhead. Administrators and users having “Edit HTML
Templates” permissions can create custom HTML templates without using the letterhead. You must have
knowledge about HTML or get the HTML code to insert it into your email template.

 Visualforce: Administrators and developers are allowed to create these templates by using Visualforce.
Visualforce templates provide advanced functionalities like merging with a recipient’s data, where the
content of a template can have data from multiple records.

3. What is Salesforce lightning?

Salesforce lightning is a component-based framework for application development, which has a collection of
tools and technologies that aim to effectively increment the performance of the Salesforce platform. These tools
include an entirely new version of a framework, visual upgrades, new and optimized interfaces, and more. It is
designed to simplify processes for business users, who do not have any programming experience.

Using the lightning platform we can easily create apps that solve business problems and provide engaging
experiences.

Few lightning features are:

  Lightning app builder: It provides drag and drop capacities to facilitate the creation of an application and
customization.

 Lightning component framework: It consists of tools and extensions that allow the development of reusable
components and standalone applications along with customization of the Salesforce mobile app.

 AppExchange for components: It makes over 50 partner components present in the app builder.

 Design system: It provides style guides and user experience practices for application development.

 Lightning Connect: It is an integration tool that makes it easier for applications of Force.com to consume
data from an external source that meets the OData specification.

4. Can you give an example of a Salesforce API and its usage?

Salesforce provides a variety of APIs that allows developers to interact with the system in many ways. They are:

REST:

 By using REST API you can easily integrate with Salesforce applications using simple HTTP methods in
either XML or JSON formats. It is an ideal API for developing mobile applications or external clients.

 Consider an example of retrieving information about the Salesforce version. You need to submit a request
for the Versions resource by using the following code:
curl https://yourInstance.salesforce.com/services/data/
 You have to replace the “your instance” text with the instance for your organization.
The output from this request is as follows.
[
{
"label" : "Winter '12",
"url" : "/services/data/v23.0",
"version" : "23.0"
}
...
]
Bulk: The Bulk API provides programmatic access that lets you quickly load and query a huge amount of data
into your Salesforce organization.

Streaming: The Streaming API can be used to trigger and receive notifications, whenever changes to Salesforce
data are made according to the defined SOQL query criteria. It is useful when you want notifications to be pushed
from the server to the client based on your defined criteria.

Conclusion
Salesforce is playing a vital role in any company’s sales and marketing automation activities. The demand for
qualified Salesforce professionals has seen its peak in recent days. Moreover, competition is also becoming tough
for Salesforce-related positions, so preparation is inevitable if you want to shine out of the crowd.

Salesforce is increasingly used as a term synonymous with CRM. Organizations can utilize Salesforce for varied
applications like Contact Management, Workflow Creation, Customer Engagement, Opportunity Tracking, Task
Management, and many more. In addition, you can also collaborate with your colleagues, run analytics, and
access Salesforce from a mobile dashboard.

Additional Resources
 Salesforce Architecture – Detailed Explanation

 Salesforce Admin Interview Questions and Answers

 Salesforce Lightning Interview Questions and Answers

 Salesforce LWC Interview Questions

 Technical Interview Questions

5. What are the differences between SOQL and SOSL in salesforce?
SOQL(Salesforce Object Query
SOSL(Salesforce Object Search Language)
Language)
Using SOQL we can search only one object at
Using SOSL we can search multiple objects at a time
a time
We can query on all fields of any of the We can query on the fields whose data type is phone, text,
datatype and email
DML operations can be performed on query
DML operations cannot be performed on search results
results
Indexing happens synchronously Indexing happens asynchronously
We can use SOQL in the classes and triggers SOSL cannot be used in triggers but can be used in classes
6. What do you mean by a sandbox in Salesforce?
A sandbox is a copy of the production environment/ organization and it is used for the purpose of testing and
development. It’s very useful because sandboxes are completely isolated from your Salesforce production
organization, so it allows you to test out new ideas on the duplicate database without disturbing the original
production environment.

You can use the sandbox whenever you want to test a newly formed Force.com application or Visualforce page.
Instead of testing it directly in production, you can develop and test it in the sandbox organization. Using this,
you can develop the application without any difficulty and then migrate the metadata and data to the production
environment. Doing this in a non-production environment permits developers to freely test and experiment with
the newly created applications.

There are four types of sandboxes in Salesforce:

Developer sandbox:

 It is a copy of the production organization, it copies all the information of an application and configuration
to the sandbox. It is mainly used for the development and testing task in an isolated environment.
  This type of sandboxes has limitations of up to 200MB of test or sample data. You can refresh a developer
sandbox once a day.

Developer pro sandbox:

 It copies all of your organization’s reports, dashboards, apps, price books, products, and customizations
under setup. But it excludes all of your organization’s custom and standard object records, attachments,
and documents.

 This type of sandboxes has limitations of up to 1GB of test or sample data. We can refresh developer pro
sandboxes once a day.

Partial data sandbox:

 A partial data sandbox is a developer sandbox plus the data you define in a sandbox template, which is
intended to be used only as a testing environment. It includes the reports, dashboards, price books,
applications, products, and customizations under the setup (including all of your metadata).

 Additionally, these sandboxes can have your organization’s custom and standard object records,
documents, and attachments up to 5 GB of data along with a maximum of 10,000 records per chosen
object.

 A partial data sandbox is smaller compared to a full sandbox and has a shorter refresh interval. You can
refresh partial data sandboxes every 5 days.

 Sandbox templates permit you to select specific data and objects to copy to your sandbox, thus you can
control the size as well as the content of each sandbox. Sandbox templates are available only for partial
data or full sandboxes.

Full sandbox:

 It is a replica of production including custom and standard object records, attachments, and documents
and is used only as a testing environment.

 You can refresh full copy sandboxes every 29 days.

Sandbox in Salesforce
7. Explain the various types of object relationships in Salesforce.
An object relationship in Salesforce can be defined as a two-way link or association between two or more objects.
Relationships are created by generating custom relationship fields on an object. Due to this, whenever a user
views the records, they are also able to see and access related data. The various types of object relationships in
Salesforce are:

Master-Detail relationship (1:n):

 It is a parent-child relationship where the master object controls the behavior of dependent detail and sub-
detail object. It is a 1:n relationship, in which there is only one parent, but multiple children.

 The master field cannot be empty, since it is the controlling object. If a master object’s record or field gets
deleted, the corresponding record or fields in the dependent object will also be deleted. This is called a
cascade delete. Child object fields will inherit the owner, sharing, and security settings from the parent
object. You can create Master-Detail relationships between two custom objects, or between a standard
object and custom object until the standard object remains as a master in the relationship.

 For example, you can define a Master-Detail relationship with two objects such as Account—Expense
report. It expands the relationship to sub detail records, such as Account—Expense report—Expense line
item. You will be then allowed to perform operations across the master—detail—sub detail relationship.

Lookup relationship (1:n):

 These relationships are useful for creating a link between two objects, without the dependency on the
parent object. This is again a form of parent-child relationship where there is only a single parent, but
multiple children exist (1:n relationship).

 Despite master being the controlling field, deleting a master record will not automatically delete the lookup
field in the child object. So the records in the child object will not get affected and there will not be any
cascade delete here. Child fields will not inherit the owner, sharing, or security settings of its parent.
  With a lookup relationship, you are permitted to link two different objects or link an object with itself
(except for the user object). For example, you may want to link a custom object “Bug” with itself for
showing how two different bugs are related to the same problem.

Junction relationship (Many-To-Many):

 You can use this kind of relationship whenever you want to create two Master-Detail relationships. By
linking 3 custom objects, we can create two Master-Detail relationships. In this, two objects will be
represented as master objects and the third object will act as a dependent on both of them. In simpler
words, we can say that there will be a child object for both master objects.

 This relationship allows every record of one object to be linked with several records of another object and
vice versa. For example, you can create a custom object “Bug” that relates to a standard object in such a
way that a bug can be related to multiple causes, and also a single case can be related to multiple bugs.

Hierarchical relationship:

 This is a special lookup relationship, that is available only for the user object.

 It allows users to use a lookup field to associate a single user with another user that does not refer to itself
in a direct or indirect way. For example, to store the direct manager of each user, you are allowed to create
a custom hierarchical relationship field.

External lookup relationship:

 This relationship links a child's standard, custom, or external object to a master external object.

 In this relationship, the standard External ID field values on the parent external object are matched against
the external lookup relationship field values of the child object.

Indirect lookup relationship:

 This relationship links a child's external object to a master standard or custom object.
 For matching and associating the records, you will mention the parent object field and the child object field
when you create an indirect lookup relationship field on an external object. Here, you have to select the
parent object’s custom unique, external ID field to match against the child object’s indirect lookup
relationship field.
Relationships in Salesforce
8. How many ways we can share a record?
With the help of the given below methods we can share records in Salesforce:

Role hierarchy:

 Whenever a user is added to a role, the user above the current user in the hierarchy of roles will have
access to reading the records and inheriting the permissions.

 Follow the steps for role hierarchy: Go to Setup → find manage users' → roles → set up roles → click on
‘add role’ → provide name and click on save.

OWD:

 OWD(Organization-Wide Defaults) allows you to give permissions to the organization-wide and to define
baseline setting for the organization. It is also helpful in defining the user’s accessibility level to the user
where a user can see other user’s records.

 OWD settings can be Public Read Only, Private, Public Read, and Write.

 Follow the steps for OWD: Go to Setup → find the Security Controls → click on ‘sharing settings’ → click on
‘Edit.

Manual sharing:

 Manual sharing is sharing a single record/file to a single user or group of users through manual access.

 We can see a button for manual sharing on the detail page of the record and it can be seen only when the
OWD setting is private.

Criteria based sharing rules:

 If we want to share records based on conditions such as share records with a group of users with the
criteria of the country is India.
  Follow the steps for criteria-based sharing rules: Go to Setup → security controls → sharing settings →
select the object and provide name and conditions then click on save.

Apex sharing:

 Sharing object is available for each and every object in Salesforce. For example, the Account object’s share
object is AccountShare.

 By using Apex, if we want to share the records then we have to create a record to the shared object.

9. What is a wrapper class in Salesforce?

A wrapper class is a type of container class, which contains a group of objects as its members. It is of an abstract
data type. We use a wrapper class for enclosing the collected data. A wrapper class is defined by a programmer,
that acts as custom objects, along with wrapper class properties.

The instances of a wrapper class are helpful in displaying various objects in the corresponding table on a
Visualforce page.

Some of the main advantages of using wrapper class by developers in Salesforce are given below:

 The wrapper class structure is as efficient as that of a good data visualization process for a web page,
especially in the case where the developers are dealing with the JSON structure.

 The developers are not required to manage the passing of any map structure in order to browse necessary
elements. Moreover, usage of wrapper class by developers will lead to ease the process of managing
relationships between different objects.

 Wrapper class usage prevents any penalty faced by the users for passing an object of Salesforce. Also, it
makes the respective object extendable to constructors of a class.

 The use of the wrapper class supports the developers for efficiently organizing the concerned data,
provided the data is properly nested.

10. What is Future annotation(@future)?

  Future annotations are used to specify methods that are executed asynchronously.

 Methods having future annotation must be static methods and can only return a void type. The arguments
specified must be primitive data types or arrays of primitive data types or collections of primitive data
types. These methods cannot take sObjects or objects as parameters.

 When you specify a method with @future annotation, it will be executed only when Salesforce has available
resources.

 For example, you can use future annotation while making an asynchronous web service callout to an
external service. Whereas without the usage of future annotation, web service callout will be created from
the same thread which is executing the Apex code, and no additional processing will take place until that
callout is complete (synchronous processing).

Syntax:
global class class_name
{
@future
Static void methodname(parameters)
{
//body of the method
}
}`

Top Salesforce Interview Questions

Preparing to ace a Salesforce interview necessitates understanding the key features, functionalities and concepts of this
platform. This blog contains a complete list of the most frequently asked Salesforce interview questions. Some common
question topics are basic CRM principles and even advanced topics like workflows, security and Apex programming.
These questions are helpful for both beginners as well as experienced professionals.

1. Define what is Salesforce.

Salesforce is one of the most popular and widely used cloud-based CRM platforms. It offers plenty of tools for marketing,
customer service, sales and much more. It aids businesses in managing customer relationships, driving growth and
streamlining operations.

2. Explain custom objects in reference to Salesforce.

Custom objects in Salesforce refers to database tables that allow the user to store all the information that is unique to the
organization. These are primarily used when standard objects that are provided by Salesforce don't sit well with the
organization's data requirements.

3. Explain the concept of a sandbox in Salesforce.

In Salesforce, a sandbox refers to a copy of the production environment that is used for development and testing works.
Sandboxes enable developers to effectively build and even test new configurations or applications without letting it affect
the live environment.

4. What is meant by the workflow rule in Salesforce?

A workflow rule in Salesforce refers to an automated process. This process is the one that triggers an action when specific
conditions are met. Actions here include updating a field, sending an email, sending an outbound message or creating a
task.

5. What does a trigger mean in Salesforce?

A trigger in salesforce refers to a piece of Apex code that either gets executed before or after certain database events.
These include updates, deletions or insertions of records. Triggers are majorly used for performing operations such as
custom workflows, complex calculations and validation.
6. Explain the existence of SOQL in Salesforce.
SOQL is the acronym for Salesforce Object Query Language. It is a query language that is employed to search Salesforce
data. It is quite similar to SQL as it allows the user to seamlessly query the Salesforce DB with the purpose of retrieving data
from standard and custom objects.

7. State the different types of relationships in Salesforce.

There are many different types of relationships in Salesforce. These include-

 Master-Detail Relationship

 Lookup Relationship

 Hierarchical Relationship (specific to User object)

 Many-to-Many Relationship (via Junction Object)

8. How is security implemented in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, security is implemented via roles, profiles, sharing rules, field-level security and permission sets. All these
mechanisms are in control and access objects, data, specific records and fields.

9. How is a lookup relationship different from a master-detail relationship?

When we talk about a lookup relationship, it is when two objects are related. However, in this, the child object is in no way
dependent on the parent object. On the contrary, in a master-detail relationship, there is a tight relationship between the
parent object (master) and the child object (detail). As a consequence, deleting the parent object means that the child
objects will also get deleted.

Related Article- Salesforce Marketing Cloud Tutorial

10. How are governor limits handled in Salesforce?
Governor limits are handled by the developers by optimizing the code. This is carried out by following the associated best
practices such as bulkifying operations, limiting the quantity of DML statements, employing collections to limit resource
usage and using efficient SOQL queries.

11. Explain Salesforce Chatter.

Salesforce Chatter refers to an enterprise social network. It enables employees to share information, stay updated and
collaborate on crucial records and projects within Salesforce. It leads to improved productivity and communication
throughout the organization.

12. Name the various kinds of Salesforce editions.

There are many different kinds of Salesforce editions including Professional, Essentials, Unlimited and Enterprise. Each of
these editions present varying degrees of customization options and features for different business needs.

13. How is a role different from a profile in Salesforce?

A profile in Salesforce refers to a user's permissions regarding performing different functions and jobs within Salesforce
(like object-level permissions). A role in Salesforce determines the records that a user can see as per their position and
placement in the hierarchy.

14. Explain what an Apex class is in Salesforce.

In Salesforce, an Apex class defines a blueprint which leads to creation of Apex objects. Apex refers to a strongly typed and
object-oriented programming language. It enables developers to seamlessly execute transaction and flow control
statements on this platform.

Top Salesforce Testing Interview Questions

Salesforce testing is used to make sure that apps built on this platform are reliable, robust and have the ability to perform
as expected. Here are some of the top Salesforce testing interview questions that cover areas like automation tools, testing
methodologies, data validation and Apex testing.
Whether you're a developer or a QA professional, these Salesforce interview questions are meant to aid you in preparing
for the interview effectively. Keep reading!

15. Explain Salesforce testing.

Salesforce testing is all about verifying the configuration and customization of Salesforce apps. This is to make sure that
these apps are in line with the required standards and can function properly. It incorporates testing functionalities such as
custom objects, integrations and workflows.

16. Why is regression testing important in Salesforce?

Regression testing helps in making sure that new updates or changes made to the Salesforce app don't have a negative
impact on existing functionalities. It aids in maintaining the reliability and stability of the app over time.

17. What's the role played by the @isTest annotation in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, the @isTest annotation is employed to define test methods and test classes in Apex. It also aids in identifying
methods and classes containing test code. This ensures they get excluded from the company's code coverage calculations.

18. What role does test data play in Salesforce testing?

Test data is extremely important for proofing the functionality of Salesforce apps. It facilitates testers in simulating real-
world scenarios, which further ensures that the app behaves aptly under different conditions.

19. Outline a few common challenges faced in Salesforce testing.

A few common challenges faced by the developers during Salesforce testing include-
  Guaranteeing data consistency and quality.

 Managing complex configurations and customizations.

 Integrating seamlessly with external systems.

 Handling frequent changes and updates in the app.

20. How is manual testing different from automated testing in Salesforce?

Manual testing is about executing test cases manually without using tools. Automated testing, on the other hand, uses
tools and scripts to execute tests. The latter is also more reliable, faster and aids in efficiently performing regression
testing.

Explore our top Salesforce marketing cloud interview questions created by experts.
21. Name the different kinds of Salesforce testing.
There are many different kinds of Salesforce testing. These include-

 Regression Testing

 Functional Testing

 UAT (User Acceptance Testing)

 Load Testing

 Integration Testing

 Security Testing

22. How is data validation testing performed in Salesforce?

Data validation testing includes verifying the quality and accuracy of data available within the Salesforce app. This
incorporates checking field validation rules, data integrity, consistency and data format across records.

23. How is code coverage ensured in Salesforce?

Code coverage is ensured in Salesforce by writing comprehensive test classes with the apt test methods that taps into all
possible scenarios. These include negative, positive and edge cases too. Salesforce needs a minimum of 75% code coverage
to facilitate deployment to production.

24. How are workflows and approval processes tested in Salesforce?

Approval processes and workflows are tested by curated test scenarios that have the potential to trigger the actions and
rules that are defined in them. Developers must also verify that the expected actions (such as field updates, task creation
and email alerts) are occurring as specified.

25. How is integration testing performed in Salesforce?

Integration testing includes verifying that the app interacts with APIs and external systems in the correct manner. This
incorporates testing synchronization, communication and data flow between Salesforce and its integrated systems.

26. How do testers employ Salesforce Inspector for testing?

Salesforce Inspector refers to a browser extension that aids testers in directly manipulating and viewing Salesforce data. It
offers insights into metadata, field values, while allowing for quick data updates. This makes testing more efficient.

27. What are the common tools that are used for Salesforce automated testing?
Some of the top common tools used for Salesforce automated testing are-

 Provar

 Selenium
  TestNG

 QTP (Quick Test Professional)

 JUnit

28. How is testing handled in a multi-org environment in Salesforce?

Sandbox environments are used in a multi-org environment for testing. Each org's configurations and customizations are
tested independently. This ensures that all the changes are consistent and do not have any impact on other orgs.

29. How is test environment management handled in Salesforce?

Test environment management includes setting up and maintenance of separate environments for testing, production and
development. Sandboxes are used for creating isolated environments for testing. These separate environments make sure
that any of these changes are not affecting the production environment.

30. Explain UAT in reference to Salesforce.

UAT in Salesforce stands for User Acceptance Testing. It is the final or the last phase of testing wearing the end-users test
the Salesforce app. This test is to ascertain whether the app meets their requirements and is working as per their
expectations or not. It aids in validating whether the app is fit for production use.

31. Name some of the ways in which Salesforce integrates with other systems.
Some of the ways in which Salesforce integrates with other systems are-

 SOAP API

 Salesforce Connect

 REST API
  Bulk API

 Apex Callouts

 Streaming API

 Middleware tools (for instance, MuleSoft, Informatica, etc.)

32. How are API calls authenticated in Salesforce?

OAuth 2.0 is used to authenticate API calls in Salesforce. This includes gaining an access token via one of the OAuth flows
(User-Agent, Web Server, JWT Bearer Token or Username-Password). This token is then utilized in the HTTP headers to tend
to API requests.

33. How is MuleSoft used for Salesforce integration?

MuleSoft can be used for Salesforce integration through these means-

 Handling error handling, process orchestration & data transformation.

 Connecting Salesforce with different systems via pre-built connectors.

 Designing integration flows with the Anypoint Studio.

 Managing & deploying integration services on the Anypoint Platform.

Go through this guide MuleSoft Integration With Salesforce for a better understanding.

34. How can data be secured in Salesforce integrations?

Data can be secured in Salesforce integrations via-

 Implementation of OAuth for secure authentication.

  Usage of HTTPS for secure communication.

 Encryption of sensitive data.

 Application of object-level and field-level security.

 Monitor and log API activities.

35. How is data consistency ensured during Salesforce integration?

To ensure data consistency during Salesforce, one must implement transactional integrity. This can be done by using
middleware to handle error corrections and retries, reconciling and synchronizing data regularly between Salesforce and
outside systems, and applying data validation rules.

36. How is integration testing managed in Salesforce?

Integration testing includes validating the data interactions and flow between Salesforce and outside systems. This
incorporates using mock services, ensuring correct working of error handling mechanisms, validating data transformations,
and creating test scenarios.

37. Outline common integration patterns in Salesforce.

Some of the most common integration patterns in Salesforce are-

 Batch Data Synchronization

 Remote Process Invocation (includes both synchronous and asynchronous)

 Data Virtualization

 UI Update as per Data Changes

 Subscribe/ Publish Event-based Integration

38. How is a push different from a pull integration model in Salesforce?
Push model in Salesforce commences the data transfer to an external system. For instance, using Platform Events,
Outbound Messaging, etc. Pull model is where Salesforce is queried by external systems for data. For instance, using SOAP
API or REST API.

39. How is versioning handled in Salesforce APIs?

The reason behind versioning Salesforce APIs is to guarantee backward compatibility. The API version can be specified in
the endpoint URL to determine a consistent behavior throughout different Salesforce releases. This allows in the
management and updation of integrations without breaking the current functionality.

46. Explain Salesforce Service Cloud.

Salesforce Service Cloud refers to a customer service platform. It helps businesses in managing support cases and
customer service. It offers many tools for knowledge base management, case tracking, multi-channel support and service
analytics. All this improves support efficiency and customer satisfaction.

47. Describe Macros in Salesforce Service Cloud. Explain how they are used.
Macros in Salesforce Service Cloud refers to automated scripts. These are used to execute repetitive tasks with a single
click. These scripts aid agents in streamlining workflows as it automates routine actions such as updating case fields,
creating tasks and sending emails. It consequently saves time and improves productivity.

48. Explain Case Escalation. How is it configured in Salesforce?

Case Escalation is used to automatically raise the priority of a case in the scenario that it is not resolved in the pre-specified
time frame. Case Escalation is configured by utilizing escalation rules that describe the basis for escalation, timelines to
consider timely case resolution and actions that must be taken.

49. Explain the purpose of Entitlement Management in Service Cloud?

The purpose of Entitlement Management is to track and enforce service level agreements, better known as SLAs. This is
done by defining the support services that every customer is entitled to receive. It incorporates features such as milestones,
entitlements and entitlement processes. All these make sure that customers are receiving the apt level of support as per
their service contracts.

50. How are multi-channel customer interactions supported by Salesforce Service Cloud?
Salesforce Service Cloud offers support to multi-channel interactions as it integrates multiple communication channels.
These mostly include phone, email, social media, web forms and chat. It offers agents the ability to manage customer
inquiries from multiple channels within a single interface. This guarantees efficient and consistent support across all
touchpoints.

Want to become Salesforce developer? Explore this Salesforce Developer Tutorial guide.
51. How can Email-to-Case be configured in Salesforce Service Cloud?
Email-to-Case has the ability to automatically convert all incoming customer emails into cases. It can be configured by
setting up Email-to-Case settings, specifying case creation rules and defining the email routing addresses. This guarantees
that customer emails are easily tracked and managed like support cases within Salesforce.

52. What is the usage of Case Teams in the Salesforce Service Cloud?
Case Teams enable various agents to effectively collaborate on one case. Each team member is assigned with specific roles,
like support specialist or case owner. It facilitates collaborative problem-solving and makes sure that the entire relevant
expertise is implemented to effectively resolve the case.

53. Explain Live Agent in Salesforce Service Cloud. How is it implemented?

Live Agent in Salesforce Service Cloud refers to a real-time chat feature. It enables customers to directly interact with
support agents on a portal or website. It can be implemented by facilitating Live Agent, integrating it seamlessly with the
Service Console to enable agent interaction and configuring deployment settings and chat buttons.
54. How are mobile agents supported by Salesforce Service Cloud?
Mobile agents are supported by Salesforce Service Cloud by the Salesforce mobile app. It renders access to knowledge
articles, customer information and cases on the go. It facilitates agents in managing and resolving cases from their mobile
devices. This ability guarantees complete flexibility and responsiveness in customer support.

55. How are Salesforce Communities used for customer self-service?

Salesforce Communities helps customers in finding answers, accessing support resources and collaborating with peers via
a branded self-service portal. It greatly diminishes the support workload as it empowers customers towards independently
resolving issues. At the same time, it also offers a platform for community feedback and engagement.

56. What role is played by Service Cloud Voice? Name its key benefits.
Service Cloud Voice plays the important role of integrating telephony with Salesforce. This leads to agents being able to
manage voice calls in the Service Console. It offers various features such as AI-powered insights, call routing and call
transcription. All this enhances agent efficiency, which in turn improves customer interactions and offers a singular view of
all communication channels.

57. Explain the working of Omni-Channel Routing in Salesforce Service Cloud.

Omni-Channel Routing works by automatically assigning incoming work items, like chats or cases, to the available and most
apt service agent. It takes in factors such as agent availability, workload and skills to ensure efficient and balanced task
distribution.

71. Explain the difference between a Permission Set and a Profile in Salesforce.
Permission Sets in Salesforce are used for extending user privileges without presenting the need to change their profiles.
Profiles in Salesforce are used for defining a user's base-level settings and permissions, like field-level security, user settings
and object-level permissions. For instance, one can offer highlighted users additional permissions for a certain object via
assigning a permission set. This enables higher flexibility in access control.

72. How are governor limits handled in Salesforce?

Handling governor limits in Salesforce is all about writing scalable and efficient code. Some of the top strategies include
using SOQL for loops to dodge meeting query limits, employing bulkified code for simultaneously handling various records,
utilizing collections (like maps and lists) for storing data, and minimizing all DML operations. Proper asynchronous
processing and exception handling also aid in managing limits.

73. How can a custom Visualforce page be created? What is its significance?
A custom Visualforce page can be created by describing a Visualforce page. This is done with the '' tag. Next, add
Visualforce components, Apex code and HTML as essential. Visualforce pages offer custom user interfaces (UI) in
Salesforce. This renders more control and flexibility over the functionality and layout as compared to standard Salesforce
pages.

74. What is the usage and purpose of Apex Batch classes?

Apex Batch classes are used for processing gigantic volumes of records asynchronously. This helps in avoiding hitting the
set governor limits. They also implement the 'Database.Batchable' interface. These are segregated into 3 methods namely,
'start', 'execute' and 'finish'. This paves the way for efficient processing as it breaks down huge jobs into smaller pieces. For
instance, usage incorporates mass updates, integration tasks and data cleansing.

75. Explain Apex Test classes and their importance.

Apex Test classes help in validating whether the Apex code is working as per the expectations. This is assessed by
simulating user actions as well as asserting the outcomes. These are important to ensure code stability, compliance and
quality as per Salesforce's requirement. Test classes aid in improving code reliability, ensuring smooth deployments and
catching bugs.
76. How is asynchronous processing implemented in Salesforce? Why is it important?
Asynchronous processing is implemented in Salesforce by utilizing future methods, scheduled Apex, Queueable Apex and
batch Apex. It is highly imperative as it enables the running of long-running operations in the background. Thus, it reduces
the load on the UI and avoids governor limits. Asynchronous processing is important for managing huge data volumes,
enhancing application performance and integrating with external systems.

77. What is the significance of the '@AuraEnabled' annotation available in Lightning

Components?
The '@AuraEnabled' annotation present in Lightning Components helps in exposing Apex properties and methods to the
client-side of Lightning framework. This helps in server-side logic to get invoked from different Lightning components. It
paves the way for uninterrupted communication between the server and client, helping developers to build interactive and
rich UI that utilize the power of Apex for complicated business logic.

78. Explain a few best practices to write an efficient Apex code.

Some of the key best practices to write an efficient Apex code are-

 Using Collections: Utilize sets, maps and lists for highly efficient data processing.

 Bulkifying: Write a code for handling various records at a time to dodge hitting governor limits.

 Minimizing SOQL & DML operations: Limit the amount of data modifications and DB queries to stay within the set
limits.

 Implementing Error Handling: Utilize custom error messages and try-catch blocks for solid error management.

 Using Asynchronous Processing: Send off the long-running tasks to asynchronous methods.

 Following Coding Standards: Stick to code organization, documentation and naming conventions practices.
alesforce Interview Questions and Answers For Freshers
1. What does Salesforce do?
Salesforce provides CRM software and cloud-based solutions that help enterprises to connect better with their customers. It supports businesses
to manage their customer's data and track their activities efficiently.

2. What are the Salesforce subsidiaries?

The following are the major subsidiaries of Salesforce:

 Tableau
 Pardot
 Heroku
 Mulesoft
 Demandware Inc
 SalesforceIQ
3. What is meant by an Object in Salesforce?
Objects in Salesforce are used as database tables that are used to store information of an organization. We have two types of objects in salesforce,
they are.

Standard Object: These are the objects provided by the salesforce, which include contacts, accounts, opportunities, leads, cases, campaigns,
products, contracts, dashboards, etc.
Custom Object: This includes the modifications made to Salesforce by users. It stores the essential and unique information of an organization.
Custom Object includes page layouts, relationship to other objects, custom user interface tab, custom fields, etc.
4. What is meant by App in Salesforce?
An App in Salesforce.com is a container that holds various things such as a logo, name, and a set of required tabs. It is also called a group of tabs
that work together to prove the functionality that you are looking for.

In Salesforce, you can customize apps to match your requirements, or you can build new applications by combining custom and standard tabs.
The process to create an app in Salesforce:
Setup ---> build---> Create---> App---> Click on new.

5. What type of apps we can create in SF?

We can create two types of Apps in Salesforce

Custom app: This type of apps can be used in every business scenario. It is widely used in the market.
Console app: This type of app can be used only in the client service business, where we focus on solving the client’s issues. It is not
comparatively, widely used in the market.

6. What is Salesforce Standard Fields?

Below mentioned are the Salesforce Standard Fields

 Owner,
 Name,
 Last modified by,
 Created by.
7. What are Audit Fields?
Standard fields are nothing but audit fields.

8. Which is the latest field you have worked in SF?

‘Time’ is the latest field in Salesforce.

9. What are the default filters in salesforce?

They are “Date filters.”
10. How to get rid of Date Filter?
By selecting the “All Time” in the “Range” on the page.
11. What are the issues you faced on joined reports?
We can not export.

12. What are the types of reports that we have in Salesforce?

There are four types of reports that are available in Salesforce, which are as follows.

 The tabular report is those that give us the total in a tabular format.
 Matrix reports the format where grouping is done based on columns and rows.
 The summary report gives us detailed reports based on columns.
 Joined reports which are capable of allowing two or more reports in one report.
13. What is an Audit trail?
The Audit trail in Salesforce is a unique feature that helps in tracking the changes that have been made in the organization by you and other
administrators. It would be helpful for the organization with more administrators. This audit trail shows you the information of the twenty most
recently made changes in your organization.

Below are the things that you could come to know:

 The date and time.

 Username of who made the changes.
 What the change was.
14. What are the benefits of using Salesforce CRM?
We get the following benefits by using Salesforce CRM.
 Improved organizational understanding.
 Enhanced communication.
 We can understand the customer better and can facilitate better services.
 Salesforce automates repeated rule-based tasks.
 Improved analytics and dashboards to analyze the data.
  Reduction in cost and cycle time.
 Improves the efficiency of teams.
15. What is a profile? Can two users have the same profile?
The profile is defined as a collection of rules and procedures a person needs to follow to access particular records. There are multiple profiles
available in Salesforce. For example, a sales profile can have access to leads, opportunities, contacts, campaigns, etc.

As far as the second question is considered, the answer would be yes. The people who work in one department have the same profile. So the
people who work under a particular department would be assigned with the same profiles.

As we have seen in the sales profile, many people work under it and every person who works under is assigned the same profile. Hence any
number of people can have the same profile.

16. Explain the difference between role and profile?

Role: In Salesforce Role is meant to increase the data visibility to a particular user. It can be done by sharing rules or by building a role hierarchy.
Using roles, you can control the ac
Profile: Unlike the roles profile is mandatory for all, and it stays at the object level. It is treated as a building pillar of an organization.

17. How many relationships do we have in Salesforce?

We have three types of relationships in Salesforce, which are:

 Master-detail relationship
 Lookup relationship
 External Lookup
18. What is the Master-Detail relationship?
This Master-Detail relationship is the same as the relationship between a parent & child. In this aspect, the master is treated as Parent, and the
Detail is a child. The master Object takes control of the behavior of the Detail object. The survival of the child is dependent on the parent because
if the Master gets deleted the Detail will also automatically get deleted. You can create Roll-up summary fields in master records which helps in
calculating the Min, Avg, Sum of the child records.
19. What is a “Lookup Relationship”?
The relationship between the two objects is called a lookup relationship. Lookup relationships connect two object links together so that you
can look up from related items to other items. It can be one-to-one or one to many.
20. What is an External lookup?
The external lookup relationship is used to connect the child object to the parent object. The child object may be either a custom, standard, or
external object. It uses to identify the correct map of the child object with the parent external object. The external lookup relationship values
fields are matched against the External Id values.
21. What is a self-relationship?
It is a personal look up to the same object. The self-relationship creates a tree diagram of the objects. Let's take an example as an object
“merchandise”. In this, we can create relationship merchandise between two accounts. This is called a self-relationship.
22. What is the workflow in Salesforce?
Workflow is an excellent way to automate specific business processes in Salesforce. To do this, you are required to define certain rules and
regulations to automate tasks such as sending an email, updating a field, create a task

 We can have access to workflow across the object.

 It is not possible to query from the database.
23. What is meant by “Transfer record” in profile?
Transfer record is a type of function used to grant permission. If a user has permission to share a record with others, then he can share the records
that have read-only access.

24. Explain the Salesforce dashboard?

In Salesforce we use dashboards to represent the data in a pictorial format. Salesforce dashboard is capable of displaying 20 reports at a time.

25. What is SOAP?

A protocol that defines a uniform way of passing XML-encoded data. SOAP Stands for Simple Object Access Protocol.
26. What is a Time Trigger?
The computer system executes one or more tasks according to the set of rules and scheduled tasks.
27. What is Trigger in Salesforce?
The trigger is defined as an Apex code that executes before or after the following functions such as insert, update, delete, etc. trigger enables to
perform custom actions before and after modifications to the records of Salesforce.

28. What are the actions in the workflow?

Below mentioned are the actions in the workflow

 Field update
 Task
 Outbound message
 Email alert
29. What are the main things that need to consider in the “Master-Detail Relationship”?
Record level access is determined by the parent, Mandatory on the child for reference of the parent, cascade delete (if you delete the parent, it
can cascade delete the child).

Salesforce Intermediate Interview Questions

30. How many records can be shown in matrix, tabular & summary reports?
We can create up to 2k records in Matrix, Tabular & Summary Reports.

31. Is the Roll-Up Summary field is only possible in the Master-detail relationship?
Yes, it is possible in a master-detail relationship.

32. How many Master-detail relationship fields can be created in an object?

Maximum two MDR fields can be created in an object.

33. How many LR(lookup relationship) fields can be created in an object?

Maximum 40 Lookup relationship fields can be created in an object.
34. If we delete parent records in MDR, what happens to the child?
If you delete the parent record in the MDR, the child record also gets deleted in MDR.

35. What about the undelete option?

It will restore the record with the data in the object.

36. How many Roll-Up Summary fields can be created in an Object?

Up to 40 can be created. (before 2010 it is 10 after 2016 it is up to 40 and it will change accordingly to salesforce updates).

37. If we reparent in the object will the parent update?

Yes, the parent will update the object.

Do you want to get certified and build your career in Salesforce Marketing Cloud? Then enroll in "Salesforce
Marketing Cloud Training" this course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.

38. How we can create an MDR on those objects where we already have records?
1. First, we create LR between the two objects.
2. Connect all child records to parents.
3. Convert the field type from LR to MDR.
39. How to look at the user license information in Salesforce Org?
Steps to find out the user license:
Salesforce Org → Setup → Administer → Company Profile → Company Information.
40. Can we delete a user in Salesforce?
No, we cannot delete the user in the salesforce.

41. Can we change the license when we create a profile?

No, we cannot change the license when we are creating the profile.

42. Explain about object relationship overview?

It creates a link between the custom object and the standard object recorded in a related list. This is helpful to find the product's defects.

43. How to create many to many relationships in Salesforce?

It helps in creating a many-to-many relationship between two objects in Salesforce. Using many-to-many relationships you can connect each
record of an object to be linked with multiple records of other objects and vice versa. The junction object helps us in connecting the two selected
objects with each other.

44. What are the permission sets?

A Permission set is a collection of settings or permissions and is used to extend the user functional access without changing actual profiles. You
can use permission sets to various types of users to extend the functionality access regardless of their roles. It is time taking task to create a
profile; instead of this, you could easily create a permission set.

45. What is sharing rule?

If we want to give access to other users we use sharing rules.

46. What are the default indexed fields in Salesforce?

We have some fields which are indexed by default in Salesforce, which are :

 Name
 ID
 Owner fields
 Master-detail relationship fields
 Lookup fields
 Last modified dates
 Audit dates
47. What is the Fiscal year in Salesforce?
The Fiscal year is known as the starting and ending date of a company's financial year. We have two types of financial years in Salesforce which
are as follows.

1. Standard fiscal year

2. Custom fiscal year
48. List some examples of custom fields?
There are many custom fields available are Picklist, Currency, Date, Text, Picklist (multi-select), Email, Percent, Number, Phone, Text area,
Lookup relationship, Geolocation, Checkbox, Master-Detail relationship, etc..

49. What are the different ways to store various types of records in Salesforce?
We have five different ways in Salesforce to store various types of records such as images, files, and documents.
They are

 Attachments
 Google drive
 Chatter Files
 Libraries
 Attachments.
50. What is the main difference between data table vs page block table tags?
The differences between the Data table and Page block

Page block:
 It defines inside the page block station or page block
 To design the visual pages uses style sheets
 The required attribute is “value”
 Automatically it will display Column Headers
DataTable:
 No need to mention inside the page block station or page block
 No required value.
 The data will be displayed using custom style sheets.
 we need to specify column headers explicitly.

Do you want to get certified and build your career in Salesforce Vlocity? Then enroll in "Salesforce Vlocity
Training" this course will help you to achieve excellence in this domain.

51. What can cause data loss in Salesforce?

There are many things that can contribute to data loss in Salesforce. Which includes :

1. Migrating to number, percent, and money, from other data types.

2. When you change the date and time
3. Migrating to multi-select picklist from any other type but except picklist.
 4. Moving from Checkbox, auto number,multi-select picklist to any other types.
5. Changing text area to phone, URL, email, or text.
52. What is the junction object and what is it used for?
Junction objects are mainly used to create a many-to-many relationship in Salesforce. If you consider a recruiting application as an example, you
can find a position that is linked to many candidates, and in the same fashion, a candidate can apply for many positions.

53. How does Salesforce track sales details?

Salesforce gives the accurate results of following things such as

 Number of customers served on a daily basis

 Regular sales numbers
 Complete reports from the Sales Manager.
 Generates sales reports on a timely basis
 It provides the details of repeat customer activity.
54. Is it possible to restrict access to data using sharing rules?
The sharing rules are used only for allowing greater access to records not for restricting.

55. Can we schedule a dynamic dashboard in Salesforce?

No, we can not do that in Salesforce.

56. How many ways we can share a record?

Role Hierarchy :

If we add a user to a role, the user who is above in the role hierarchy will have read access.
Setup → manage users → roles → setup roles → click on ‘add role’ → provide name and save.
OWD:
 Defines the baseline setting for the organization.
  Defines the level of access to the user can see the other user’s record

OWD can be Private, Public Read Only, Public Read and Write.
Setup → Security Controls → sharing settings → Click on ‘Edit’
Manual Sharing :

Manual Sharing is sharing a single record to a single user or group of users.

We can see this button detail page of the record and this is visible only when the OWD setting is private.

57. What is the difference between insert() and database .insert()?

Using the insert method we can insert the records but if any error occurs in any record system will throw an error insertion fail and none of the
records are inserted. If we want to execute partially the success of bulk insert operation we will use database .insert.

58. Does the user can create insert their own custom logo while creating their own custom applications?
Yes, users can upload their custom logo in documents, and then they choose that logo for the organization.

59. List things that can be customized on-page?

We can customize different things on page layouts like Fields, Buttons, Custom Links, and Related Lists. We can also create sections.

60. Can we create a Roll-Up Summary(RUS) field on the master object?

Yes. we can create a Roll-Up Summary field on the master object.

61. Can the governor limit perform partial DML activity? Eg: we are inserting 200 records in a loop, the Governor limit
is hit at the 151st record, then will those 150 records be created?
Salesforce Apex Beginner Interview Questions
62. What is Apex Interface?
The interface is a collection of unimplemented methods. This will specify the signature of the method, types of inputs that we pass the method
specify what type is given as an output.

Note: Generally the interface methods we give it as global.

63. Where can I use Apex?
We can use Apex in the following ways

 To create Email services

 Create web services
 Perform complex validation over multiple objects
 To create complex business processes that are not supported by a workflow.
 Create custom transaction logic
 Attach custom logic to another operation
64. How Does Apex Work?
All Apex programs run entirely On-Demand on the Force.com Platform.

 First, the platform application server compiles the code into an abstract set of instructions that can be understood by the Apex runtime
interpreters.
 The compiled code is stored in metadata.

When the end-users trigger the execution of Apex by clicking a button or the VisualForce page the application servers retrieve the compiled
instructions from the metadata and send them to the runtime interpreter before returning the result.

65. What is Apex in Salesforce?

Apex is a strongly typed object-oriented programming language.
It allows the developer to execute flows and transaction control statements.

Apex enables developers to add business logic to most system events like button clicks related to record updates and VisualForce pages.

66. What are the ways to call the Apex class?

Below mentioned are the ways in Salesforce to call Apex class.

 From another class

 From developer console
 From JavaScript links
 From home page components
 By using trigger
 From VisualForce page
67. Explain various methods of batch Apex class?
The batch apex class deploys the database batchable interface with the three methods as follows:

 Start
 Finish
 Execute
Start: We use the start method at the beginning of the batch apex job. We use it for collecting the objects or records, for passing them to the
interface for executing. It returns a DatabaseQueryLocator object that comprises objects or the records sent to the job.
Finish: We call this method once we finish the batch processing. We use this method to send confirmation emails or to execute the post-
processing operations.
Execute: We use this method for every batch of the records that are sent to the method. We use this method for data processing. This method
does the following:
 sObjects records list
 Reference to the DatabaseBatcheable context.
68. What is Apex Email Service?
Email services are an automated process that uses Apex classes to process the contents, Headers, Attachments of Inbound Email.

Note:
 Visualforce email templates cannot be used for mass emails.
 We can associate each email service with one or more salesforce-generated email addresses to which the users can send messages for
processing.
69. Explain Apex Programming Language?
 Integrated: It provides built-in support for DML Calls
 Inline Salesforce Object Query Language
 Easy to Use
 Easy to Test
 Version
 Multi-Tenant Aware Application

70. What is Map Class in Apex Salesforce?

Map Class in Apex:

 Map Class Contains methods for the Map collection type.

 A Map is a collection of key-value pairs where each unique keymap to a single value.
 Map keys and values can be any data type primitive types, collections, objects, user-defined types, and built-in Apex types.
For Example, the following table represents a map of countries and currencies
Country(Key) ‘United States ‘Japan’ France’ ‘England’ ‘India’

Currency
‘Dollar’ Yen’ ‘Euro’ ‘Pound’ ‘Rupee’
(Value)
71. What is Batch Apex in Salesforce?
Batch Apex: Batch Apex allows you to define a single job that can be broken up into manageable chunks, whereas every chunk can be processed
separately.

In the Batch Apex it will fetch all the records on which you want to perform the field update and divide them into a list of 200 records and on every
200 records operation is performed separately.

This would help us to execute on more than 10,000 records as it won’t perform an operation on all the records in a single transaction instead it
divides them into a number of subtasks where each subtask may contain records up to 4000.

Example:

If you need to make a field update of every record of account object in your organization, then we have governing limits that would restrict us
from achieving the above task.

Reason: In a single transaction we can process only 10,000 records. Now in the above case if we have more than 10,000 records in the
organization then we can not perform this field update.

72. What is Apex Scheduler?

It will invoke the Apex classes to run at a specific time.

Anybody who wants to schedule their class they have to implement the schedulable interface.

Schedule Interface: The class that implements this interface can be scheduled to run at different intervals. This interface has several methods
that are
Public void execute(schedulablecontext sc)
Public class mySchedule implements schedulable
{
Public void execute(schedulablecontext sc)
{
Account a = new Account(Name = ‘Faraz’)
Insert a;
}
}
73. What is the Apex Trigger in Salesforce?
The trigger is an Apex Code that executes before or after. The following types of DML Operations:

 Insert
 Update
 Delete
 Merge
 Upsert
 Undelete
74. What is meant by Apex transaction?
An Apex transaction represents a group of operations that are needed to be executed at once. It includes the Data Manipulation Language (DML)
and is responsible for querying records. The DML operations in a transaction either success or if anything goes wrong or occurs even with a single
record could result in a rollback of the entire transaction.

75. What are The Types of Apex Triggers in Salesforce?

Triggers are divided into 2 types

1. Before Triggers
2. After Triggers
Before Triggers: Before Triggers can be used to update or validate values of a record before they are saved to the database.
After Triggers: After Triggers Before Triggers can be used to access field values of the records that are stored in the database and use this value
to make changes in other records.
Syntax:
Trigger trigger_name on Object_Name(trigger_events) { Code_block } WHERE trigger_events can be comma separated list
of events.
76. What is Apex Managed Sharing?
Apex Managed Sharing provides developers with the ability to support an application to share requirements.

 This type of sharing is available only with users to modify all data permissions. Only these users can add/change apex-managed sharing.
 Apex Managed Sharing uses a Sharing reason (Apex Sharing Reason)

77. What is the Usage of the apex program within the VisualForce page?
When you want to call the apex class on the VisualForce page we have to declare in the following format.
< Apex : page controller = “class name “ >

Whenever we call a VisualForce page in which the controller attribute is defined it will first create an object for the apex class which is defined in
the controller. When an object is created for the apex class first it involves the constructor.

78. What is Sandbox in Salesforce?

A Sandbox is defined as a testing environment that is used to test the code or to conduct experiments in an isolated environment without
harming the production environment.
79. When do we use Sandbox?
A Sandbox helps you when you want to test the newly developed application on force.com or VisualForce page. It is not possible to check
something in the production environment if do, so it creates a problem for the regular functioning. So, to get out of this problem developers use
Sandbox to test the application.

Types of sandboxes available are :

 Developer
 Developer pro
 Partial copy
 Full
Salesforce Apex Advanced Interview Questions
80. What is Multitenant Architecture in Salesforce?
It is the cloud's fundamental technology to share IT resources securely and cost-efficiently.

81. What are static resources?

Ans: Static resources allow you to add the content that you want to reference it on the VisualForce page, which includes things like
images, Javascript, archives, CSS files, etc. The maximum size of a static resource of an organization is 250 MB.
82. List the data types that a Set can store
The Sets can store any of the following data types

 Collections
 User-defined types
 subjects
 Primitive types
 Built-in Apex types
83. What is a Visualforce component?
Visualforce components are small reusable components of functionality such as widgets, user interface elements, panels, etc. We have two types
of VisualForce components which are standard and custom and are used to define the user interface behavior.
84. What is SOQL?
A query language that allows you to construct simple but powerful query strings and to specify the criteria that should be used to select the data
from the platform database. SOQL Stands for Salesforce Object Query Language.
85. What is the Bulkification best practice?
We must avoid using index values like Trigger.New[0] as we never know how many records we get in Trigger.New at runtime.

1. We need to use it for each loop whether we have 1 record or many.

2. We must not use SOQL inside for loop.
3. We must not use SOSL inside for loop.
4. We must not use DML inside for loop.
5. We need to store data in collections, so our code will work for single as well as multiple records.
Salesforce Apex Technical Interview Questions
86. database.insert(ListForBulkDML, True) means what?
Insert ListForBulkDML;
87. How can we perform DML partially?
If we want partially to happen, use a database.insert(list, false);
88. What Are The Types of SOQL Statements in SalesForce?
Salesforce Object Query Language is used to query records from the database.com based on the requirement.

There are 2 types of SOQL Statements:

1. Static SOQL
2. Dynamic SOQL
Static SOQL:

The Static SOQL Statement is written in [] (Array Brackets)

These statements are similar to IINQ (Ion Integrated Query)

Example:
String search for =’Jones’;
Contact[] contacts=[select testfield__c, FirstName, LastName from Contact Where Last Name=:search for];
Dynamic SOQL:

It is used to refer to the creation of a SOQL string at run time with Apex code.

 Dynamic SOQL enables you to create a more flexible application.

 To create a Dynamic SOQL query at run time use a Database.Query() method, in one of the following ways.
 Return a single sObjects when the query returns a single record.
 sObjects s = Database. Query(String_limit_l);
 Return a list of sObjects when the query returns more than a single record.
Example 1:- Queries
String myTestString = ‘TestName’;
List List= Database.Query(SELECT Id FROM MyCustomObject__c WHERE Name = :myTestString);
Example 2:- Queries
String resolvedfield L = myvariable.field__c;
List L = Database.Query(‘SELECT Id FROM myCustomObject__c WHERE field__c = ‘+resolvedfield_L);
89. What is the Syntax of SOQL Statement?
Syntax -
SELECT field1, field2,.... FROM Object_Type [WHERE condition]
Example:-Queries
List accountList = [SELECT ID, Name, FROM Account];
List accountList = [SELECT ID, Name, FROM Account WHERE annual revenue<10000];
90. Explain briefly about GROUP BY with the syntax?
With API version 18.0 and later/you can use group by with aggregate functions, such as sum() or max() to summarize the data and enable you to
rollup query results rather than having to process the individual records in your code.
Syntax: [ GROUP BY field GROUP BY LIST]
91. SOSL Statements In Salesforce Apex?
SOSL statement evaluates the list of sObjects, where each list contains the search results for a particular sobject type, The result lists are always
returned in the same order as they were specified in the query.

If a SOSL query does not return any records for a specified sObject type, the search results include an empty list for that sObject.

Example: You can return a list of accounts, contacts, opportunities, and leads that begin with the phase map.
List < list < subject >> search list = [ find 'map*' In ALL FIELDS RETURNING Account (ID, Name), contact,
opportunity, lead ];
Note:
 The syntax of the class on Apex differs from the syntax of the FIND clause in the SOAP API.
 In Apex, the value of the FIND cause is demarcated with single quotes.
Example:1

FIND 'map*' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING account (Id, Name], Contact, Opportunity, Lead. In the Force.com API, the value of the FIND Clause is
demarcated with braces.
FIND {map*} IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING account [Id,name], contact ,opportunity,lead;
From search list , you can create arrays for each object returned.
Account [ ] accounts = (( list < accounts > ) search list [0] );
Contact [ ] contacts = [( list ) search list [0]) ;
Opportunity [ ] opportunities = ((list < opportunity> ) search list [2]) ;
Lead [ ] leads = (( list < lead> ) search list [3]);

103. Difference between SOQL Vs SOSL in salesforce?

SOQL- (Salesforce Object Query Language) SOSL (Salesforce Object Search Language)
Using SOQL we can Search only on one object one time. Using SOSL we can search on many objects at one time.
We can query only on fields whose data type is text,
We can query on all fields of any datatype
phone, and Email.
We can use SOQL in the Triggers and the classes. We cannot use Triggers but can in classes.
 We can perform a DML operation on SQL query results. We cannot perform DML operations on search results.

108. What is the difference between trigger and workflow?

Workflow:
 Workflow is an automated process that fired an action based on Evaluation criteria and rule criteria.
 We can access a workflow across the object.
 We cannot perform DML operations on workflow
 We cannot query from the database
Trigger:
 A trigger is a piece of code that executes before or after a record is inserted or updated.
 We can access the trigger across the object and relate to that object
 We can use 20 DML operations in one trigger.
 We can use 20 SOQL from the database in one trigger.
109. What are some apex classes that are commonly used within?
Standard controller, select option, page reference, message, etc.

110. What are the effects of using the transient keyword?

The transient keyword prevents the data from being saved into the view state. This should be used for very temporary variables.

111. What is the maximum number of field dependencies we can use in the VisualForce page?
The maximum number of field dependencies we can use is a VisualForce page is 10.

112. What is the procedure to get the Security token in Salesforce?

Click on your Name tab, then click on Personal and you will find Reset my security token.

113. What is a Metadata-driven development model?

An app development model that allows apps to be defined as declarative “blueprints,” With no code required. Data model, objects, forms,
workflows, and more are defined by metadata.

114. What is S-Control?

S-Controls are the predominant salesforce.com widgets that are completely based on JavaScript. These are hosted by salesforce but executed at
the client-side. S-Controls are superseded by VisualForce now.

115. What is wrapper class in Salesforce?

A wrapper or container is a data structure, a class type, or an abstract data type that contains multiple collections of objects. It helps in displaying
various objects on a VisualForce page in a single table.

116. What are force platform sites?

Public websites and applications that are directly integrated with your Salesforce organization without requiring users to log in with a username
and password.

117. What is Tab in Salesforce?

A Tab is a user interface to display custom object data or other embedded web content to a user. We have three types of tabs in Salesforce which
are:

 Custom Tabs.
 Visualforce Tabs.
 Web Tabs.
118. What are the types of email templates that can be created in Salesforce?
Below mentioned is the list of templates available in Salesforce :

1. Text Template: This template can be modified or changed by any user.

2. HTML with letterhead: People like administrators and users with Edit HTML permission can create this email template based on
letterhead.
3. Custom HTML: People like administrators and users with Edit HTML permission can create this email template without using a
letterhead. It requires knowledge of HTML or gets the HTML code to insert it into the email template.
4. Visualforce Email Template: This template can only be created by administrators and developers using VisualForce. It is capable of
merging the data from various records.

119. If we want to share records based on conditions like share records to a group of users. Whose country criteria is
India, What are the steps to be followed?
Setup → Security Controls → sharing settings → Click on ‘Edit’
Apex sharing: Share object is available for every object(For Account object share object is AccountShare ). If we want to share the records using
apex we have to create a record to the shared object.
120. Is it possible to edit the VisualForce page in a production environment?
Yes, of course! We can create and edit the VisualForce pages in both the production environment and in a sandbox. The only thing you can not do
in a production environment with a VisualForce page is adding the unique values for which you need to do this in the sandbox.

121. Is it possible to make changes to the apex trigger/apex class in the production function?
No, you can not do that if you want to make any edits to the apex trigger/apex class that should be done in a sandbox environment.

122. What are the things that can be customized on page layouts?
Page layouts allow you to personalize or customize the given page objects or records. It helps in customizing or designing the page according to
your requirements. Page layout editor helps you in customizing the pages. Using this page, you can customize things like buttons, fields, custom
links, and related lists.
Salesforce Admin Interview Questions
1) What is the Roll-up summary field?
We use the Roll-up summary field to calculate the values for the associated records, for example, a related list. We can also use it for creating the
values for a master record- according to the values in detailed records. But, we must connect the master and the detail with a master-detail
relationship.

2) Explain Queues?
In Salesforce, Queues help us to distribute, prioritize, and assign the records to the teams for sharing workloads. Queues are applicable to leads,
service contracts, custom objects, cases, etc.

3) Explain Escalation rules?

Escalation rules apply to escalation cases according to the rules specified in the escalation rule entry. Besides rule entries, we can also create
escalation actions for determining what happens when the case escalates. The escalation rule can reassign a case to another support agent or a
support queue.

4) Explain Validation rules?

Validation Rules enable us to apply a particular logic rule to contribute to our organization’s data integrity. We can define the conditions on the
object that are not available. For instance, if we do not want to label an opportunity as closed if the account does not have the address.

5) What are the primary components of the workflow?

The following are the primary components of the workflow:

Criteria: Criteria is the “if” portion of the statement. We have to set criteria for the workflow rule. First, we have to create a workflow rule and
later configure the criteria.
Action: Action is the “then” portion of the statement. The action tells us what to do when the criteria are satisfied and occurs after the workflow
rule configuration. We can add a time-dependent action or an immediate action for a particular workflow rule.
6) Explain a Time-dependent workflow?

We perform time-dependent actions at particular times before closing the record. Workflow re-evaluates the record after time passes. It checks
whether the workflow rule criteria are satisfied, and only then workflow rule executes the actions.

7) What is the Workflow Task and Workflow Alert?

Workflow Task

When we have to assign the tasks to a salesforce user, you haunt a workflow task. A workflow task allocates a new task to a role, user, or record
owner. It assists us in defining different task parameters like a priority, status, due date, and subject.

Workflow Alert

Workflow Alert is an email that an approval process or a workflow rule creates in the salesforce and is transmitted to different recipients.

8) Explain Auto-Response?

Auto-Response is about transmitting emails to leads or cases for particular record attributes and promptly responding to customer inquiries or
issues by establishing the auto-response rule. At the same time, we can set one rule for a lead and one rule for a case.

9) Explain Custom Labels?

In Salesforce, we use custom labels for creating a multilingual application. Using the native language, they give information to users in the form
of help texts and error messages. We can define the custom labels as custom text values that we can access from the Apex class or Lightning
components and promptly or even the Visualforce page. We can translate these values into the language supported by the salesforce. Through
the following path, we can access custom labels:
Setup->Search Custom Labels in Quick Find Box->Custom Labels
10) What are Sharing rules and what are the different types of sharing rules?
Sharing rules give sharing access to the users associated with the public groups, roles, or territories. It gives a higher level of access with the
exceptions, far from our organization settings. Following are the two kinds of sharing rules:

 Criteria-based Sharing rules: Access is provided according to the record values and not according to the record owners.
 Owner-based Sharing Rule: These rules provide access to the records owned by the users.
11) What are Governor Limits?

To assure that no one gains resources from others, Force.com establishes various restrictions(governor limits) that limit code execution.
Salesforce must do this due to its multi-tenant architecture, where all the customers and organizations share one resource. If the governor's limits
are not satisfied, an error will rise, and the program execution will terminate. Following are the types of Governor limits:

 Static Apex Limits

 Per-transaction Apex Limits
 Size-specific Apex Limit
 Per-transaction Certified Managed Package Limits
12) Define the Approval process?

In Salesforce, the Approval process is a sequence of steps for approving records. An approval process is also helpful for tracking who and when
approved or rejected something. It includes different approval models, notifying approvers, and conditional logic for who must support.

13) What is the importance of Salesforce Chatter?

Salesforce Chatter is a social networking application that enables us to share information and work cooperatively with each other. It helps us to
build greater employee engagement through motivation. Salesforce Chatter also provides a forum throughout the enterprise for sharing fresh
ideas and understandings. We can also use the mobile feed for tracking our project.

14) Explain Guest users?

Guest users are the users who do not have user accounts in our organization. They are also known as unauthorized users as they do not have to
log in. We can make the pages accessible. Unauthorized users can create or edit the records.
Generally, we have various limitations and considerations for assessing. Yet, we can use this feature for solving use cases, and we do it financially
because the guest user licenses are free.

15) Explain Change Set?

A changeSet is a group of components that we can migrate between the associated organizations (like from a sandbox to the production, sandbox
to the sandbox, etc.).

Salesforce Developer Interview Questions

Here is the list of most frequently asked Salesforce interview questions and answers discussed below

1) What is Apex test coverage?

To assure that our code satisfies particular standards, Apex test coverage displays to you how many lines of code in our classes or triggers have
been tested by the tested methods. Test coverage percentage is the result of the number of the covered lines divided by the sum of uncovered
lines and covered lines. To deploy to production, we need a minimum of 75% test coverage.

2) Explain Lightning Message Service(LMS)?

Lightning message service is a distinctive salesforce feature that allows interaction between Aura, Lightning Web Components, and Visualforce
over the same lightning page. We can use the Lightning message service in Lightning Experience only.

3) Define OAuth?
OAuth is a standard for access delegation. Generally, we use it as a method for granting the applications or websites access to their data over
other websites, yet without providing them with the passwords.

4) Explain Connected App?

Connected App integrates the salesforce through APIs, and Connected Apps utilize OAuth, SAML for authenticating, providing sign-on, and
providing tokens for using the Salesforce APIs.
Besides OAuth capabilities, connected apps eagle salesforce admins to establish different security policies and possess external control to utilize
similar apps.

Do you want to build an effective application Salesforce, then join our Salesforce Developer Training to get a
Flat 20% Off Course Fee
5) What is the Significance of Outbound Message?
Outbound Message is an automation function that can shoot from the workflow rule. We can send the message to explicit web services that
include web services, which start other processes in explicit systems.

6) What are the uses of External ID fields?

We can define specific fields as an External ID on the object. We can use these External ID fields for balancing the data from explicit systems with a
distinct reference ID.

For instance, if we have to balance the data from the explicit accounting system with the Salesforce Accounts, we have to promptly use an
external ID field to refer to the unique ID of the accounting system in place of the Salesforce ID.

7) How can we create partial page refreshes?

First, we have to define the page section that is going to be refreshed, and then we have to define the event that leads to refreshing. The method
changes if the area being refreshed is similar to the one managing the event. It also relies on if we are processing on the server or if we have to
change the user interface.

8) How can we invoke the javascript controller action by using a component markup?
By using the action provider, we can invoke the javascript controller action through a component markup

9) What are component and application events?

Application events
By using any component, we can fire the application events, and we can manage them. Application events do not need any relationship among
the components; however, these components should be a part of an application.

Component events

Child components fire the component events, and Parent components handle the component events. We use component events when we have to
send a value from the child component to the parent component.

10) What is Pagination, and How can we achieve it?

For example, if we have to display 100 records over the page.

 First: Display the first ten records.

 Previous: Display previous ten records.
 Next: Display the following ten records.
 Last: Display the previous ten records.

We can perform the above process through Pagination. We can achieve pagination through the following ways:

Through StandardSetController
Through Offset and Limit keywords in SOQL Query
11) How do we display error messages on the VisualForce Page?
To display error messages on the VisualForce Page, we must use:
<apex:pageMessages></apex:pageMessages>

In Apex class, we must use:

ApexPages.addMessage(new ApexPages.Message(ApexPages.severity.Error, ‘Error Message’));
12) What are the differences between Custom Objects and Custom Settings?
Custom Objects Custom Settings
 Custom settings store the data in the Application Cache
Custom Objects store the data in the database.
memory.
Custom objects have to use SQL queries for fetching the
Do not need to use SQL queries for fetching the records.
records from the database.
In Custom settings, only confined data types exist when
In custom objects, all data types exist.
compared to custom objects
On Custom objects, we can create apex triggers and On List Custom settings, we cannot create apex triggers
validation rules. and validation rules
We can create a tab for custom objects. We cannot create a tab for custom settings
13) Can we customize the Apex in a production organization?
We cannot customize Apex in the production organization. We must change and deploy through a sandbox and satisfy test coverage
requirements.

14) Can you give an example of Salesforce API and its importance?
Salesforce has different API’s that allow us to communicate with the system in various ways:

REST API: REST API will enable us to integrate with the salesforce applications through HTTP methods in either JSON or XML formats.
Bulk: Bulk API gives us programmatic access that allows us to load the data into our salesforce enterprise rapidly.
Streaming: We can use Streaming API for receiving the notification for the changes to the salesforce data that equal the SOQL query we define.
Streaming API is functional when we have to push the notification from server to client according to the criteria we define.
15) Explain Bucket Fields?
Bucket Fields classify the records of the salesforce reports without any custom field or formula; Bucket fields are available only in the reports.
When we create a bucket column, then various classifications of the group report values

16) Differentiate isNull and isBlack?

We use isBlack() for the text fields. Since text fields cannot be NULL, even though nothing is given as a value, ISNULL() function fetches only empty
values. If we use ISNULL() with a text field, then it returns false.

17) How does Salesforce implement Sales Tracking?

Salesforce records data on the details like customer details, sales numbers, customer served, and repeat customers and use of these records for
creating detailed charts, dashboards, and reports. In this way, it tracks the sales of our organisation.

18) What is the limit of the Data.com records that we can add to Salesforce?
In the user section of Data.com, we have to discover our name to see our monthly limit. It will provide details like how many records we can
export or add for this month. The user enters setup and types the user in the Find box and chooses prospector users.

19) Explain the methods of the Batch Apex Class?

The batch apex class deploys the database batchable interface with the three methods as follows:

Start: We use the start method at the beginning of the batch apex job. We use it for collecting the objects or records, for passing them to the
interface for executing. It returns a DatabaseQueryLocator object that comprises objects or the records sent to the job.
Finish: We call this method once we finish the batch processing. We use this method to send confirmation emails or to execute the post-
processing operations.
Execute: We use this method for every batch of the records that are sent to the method. We use this method for data processing. This method
does the following:
 sObjects records list
 Reference to the DatabaseBatcheable context.

21) Can we write Setter and Getter methods in Salesforce?

Yes, we use a getter method for returning the values for a controller. Each value computed by the controller and shown on the page should have a
getter method.
On the other way, we use the setter method to pass the user-defined values from the page markup to the controller. In the controller, we execute
the setter method automatically.
22) Explain the Developer Console?
The developer console is an incorporated development tool that has a collection of tools. We use these tools for debugging, creating, and testing
the applications in salesforce.org.

23) Explain packages and different kinds of packages?

The package is a collection of the components list or associated applications. Following are the kinds of packages:

 Managed
 Unmanaged

We use managed packages for distributing and selling the applications to the clients. Developers sell user-friendly applications and licenses by
using AppExchange for managed packages. These are entirely updatable in the event of continuous upgrades; we perform the removal of fields or
objects.

24) What are the ways to implement the metadata in Salesforce?

Following are the ways to implement metadata in the Salesforce:

 By using Change Sets

 Eclipse with Force.com IDE
 Salesforce package
 Through Migration tools
25) Explain reRender Attribute Tag?
The reRender attribute defines an elements list that we can update dynamically through the AJAX library of the Salesforce. We do not need the
entire page to refresh. Only a part of the page detected by the components is named in the “.rerender” attribute.

26) How can we display the Chatter Feed Record?

By using the <chatter: feed> component, we can display the chatter feed.

Example:
<apex:page>
<chatter: feed entityId=”{!$User.Id}”/>
</apex:page>
27) Explain the Blob variable?
Blob variable is the variable that is intended to gather binary data. tostring() converts the blob back into the string.
string string1='test string';
Blob blob1 = Blob.valueof(myString);
String String2 = myBlob.toString();
System.debug(String2);
28) What is the use of apex:outputLink?
The apex: output link body comprises of image or text that we can display in the link.
<apex: outputlink value="https://mindmajix.com/" id="theLink">www.mindmajix.com </apex:outputLink>

1. What is the difference between a trigger and a workflow rule in

Salesforce?
A trigger and a workflow rule in Salesforce serve distinct purposes. While both automate processes, a trigger is a
piece of Apex code that executes before or after specific data manipulation events like insert, update, delete, or
undelete on an object. Triggers provide granular control over the logic and allow you to handle complex scenarios
such as cross-object updates, asynchronous calls, and custom error handling. Triggers can manage more intricate
logic, including interacting with multiple objects and sending custom notifications.
On the other hand, workflow rules are declarative automation tools. They help automate simple tasks like sending
email alerts, updating fields, or creating tasks based on specific criteria. However, workflows are more limited
compared to triggers since they cannot perform DML operations like inserting or deleting records. When I need more
control over business logic and complex actions, I tend to use triggers, but I rely on workflow rules for simpler
automations where performance and clarity are key.
See also Salesforce QA Interview Questions and Answers
2. How do you handle governor limits in Apex?
Handling governor limits in Apex is critical since Salesforce enforces these limits to ensure shared resource
availability across the platform. I manage these limits by writing bulkified code, which means processing records in
batches rather than one at a time. For example, I avoid using SOQL queries inside loops because each query within
a loop counts against the SOQL query limit. Instead, I write the query outside the loop and store the results in a
collection, then process the records iteratively.
Additionally, I implement future methods, batch Apex, and Queueable Apex for handling large data volumes or
complex processes. When I encounter limits like CPU time or heap size, I analyze the logic and optimize code by
using collections such as maps and sets to minimize memory usage. By ensuring my queries and DML operations
are efficient, I can avoid hitting these critical governor limits, which helps in keeping the system performance
optimized.
See also: Salesforce Data Loader Interview Questions and Answers
3. What are the different types of relationships in Salesforce, and how are
they implemented?
In Salesforce, there are primarily three types of relationships: Lookup relationships, Master-Detail relationships,
and Many-to-Many relationships. A lookup relationship is a loose association between two objects, where one
object can reference another but does not depend on it. This type of relationship is ideal when you want flexibility in
how records relate to one another, without enforcing strong dependencies. For example, I use a lookup relationship
when linking a custom object to a user object for record ownership purposes.
The Master-Detail relationship is much stricter. In this case, the child record is dependent on the parent record,
meaning if the parent record is deleted, the child records are also deleted. This is useful when I need tighter control
over data integrity, like associating OpportunityLineItem with Opportunity. I also leverage roll-up summary
fields in master-detail relationships, which allows me to summarize child data, such as counting the total line items
on an opportunity. Lastly, the many-to-many relationship is created by using a junction object between two
master-detail relationships, allowing each record from one object to relate to multiple records from another object.
4. Explain the concept of collections in Apex and provide examples of each
type.
Collections in Apex are data structures that allow me to store multiple values in a single variable. There are three
main types of collections in Apex: Lists, Sets, and Maps. A List is an ordered collection that allows duplicate
elements. For example, if I want to store a list of account names from a query, I would use a List. Here’s a simple
example:
List<String> accountNames = new List<String>{'Account1', 'Account2', 'Account3'};

A Set is an unordered collection that does not allow duplicates. It’s useful when I want to ensure uniqueness, such
as storing a collection of unique record IDs. For instance:
Set<Id> accountIds = new Set<Id>{'001xx000003DGW9', '001xx000003DGW9'};

A Map is a collection of key-value pairs, where each unique key maps to a specific value. I use maps when I need to
retrieve data based on a specific key, such as fetching an Account’s name by its ID:
7. How does Apex handle asynchronous processing, and what are the
various methods available?
Apex provides multiple ways to handle asynchronous processing, which is useful when I need to execute long-running
operations or deal with large data volumes. One method is Future methods, which allow me to execute processes in the
background, outside of the main thread, typically used for making callouts to external systems. I declare future methods using
the @future annotation.
Another method is Batch Apex, which I use when dealing with large datasets that need to be processed in chunks. Batch Apex
processes records asynchronously in manageable chunks of up to 200 records per transaction. I typically use this method when I
have long-running processes or need to ensure processing occurs without hitting governor limits. Here’s an example of how I
define a batch class:
global class MyBatchClass implements Database.Batchable<sObject> {
global Database.QueryLocator start(Database.BatchableContext BC) {
return Database.getQueryLocator([SELECT Id FROM Account WHERE Industry = 'Technology']);
}
global void execute(Database.BatchableContext BC, List<Account> scope) {
// Process each account record here
}
global void finish(Database.BatchableContext BC) {
// Final logic here
}
}
I also use Queueable Apex, which allows chaining jobs for sequential execution. This provides greater flexibility and control
over asynchronous processes compared to future methods.
8. What are custom metadata types, and how do they differ from custom
settings?
Custom metadata types and custom settings both store data that can be accessed across your Salesforce organization, but they
serve different purposes. Custom metadata types allow me to define reusable configurations that are deployable between
environments. The data in custom metadata types can be packaged, migrated between orgs, and treated like metadata itself. This
makes them ideal for things like application settings, configuration rules, or feature toggles that are consistent across
environments.
Custom settings, on the other hand, store organizational data that is specific to a particular environment. They can be either List
Custom Settings, which are shared across users and can hold multiple records, or Hierarchy Custom Settings, which allow
different values at the organizational, profile, or user level. Custom settings are often used for managing environment-specific
data like URLs or thresholds that change between environments. The major limitation of custom settings is that they are not
easily deployable like custom metadata types, making them less useful in large-scale applications with multiple environments.
9. Describe how to implement field-level security in a Visualforce page.
In Visualforce, ensuring field-level security is a critical step to protect data and respect user permissions. Even if a field is
present on the page, I must ensure that the user has permission to view or edit that field. To implement field-level security, I rely
on Schema.DescribeSObjectResult and Schema.DescribeFieldResult to check user access.
For example, if I want to display a field only if the user has permission, I use the following code:
if(Schema.sObjectType.Account.fields.Industry.isAccessible()) {
// Display field on Visualforce page
}

Similarly, if I need to enforce field-level security while editing records, I first check if the field is editable by the current user
before rendering it. This approach ensures that I never expose fields that users are restricted from accessing, preventing potential
security risks. Field-level security should also be checked in Apex controllers to ensure that programmatic access respects these
rules.

See also: Roles and Profiles in Salesforce Interview Questions

10. Explain how to create and use custom exceptions in Apex.
Custom exceptions in Apex allow me to create error messages tailored to my specific application logic, making debugging and
error handling more effective. To create a custom exception, I simply extend the Exception class and provide a custom error
message or behavior. This approach helps when I need to throw specific exceptions for business logic errors, such as failed
validations or integration issues.
Here’s an example of a custom exception class:
public class InvalidAccountTypeException extends Exception {}

I can throw this exception in my Apex code when a certain condition is met, for instance, if an account’s type doesn’t match an
expected value:

if(account.Type != 'Customer') {
throw new InvalidAccountTypeException('Account type must be Customer.');
}
By using custom exceptions, I can make error handling more meaningful and provide clearer messages, which improves
troubleshooting during development or production issues. It also enables me to catch specific types of exceptions separately
from generic system exceptions.

Enroll for a career-building Salesforce online training tailored for aspirants preparing for jobs and Salesforce certification.
Register now!
11. How do you manage transactions and error handling in Apex?
In Apex, transactions are atomic units of work. All DML operations within a single transaction either succeed or fail as a
whole. If one part of the transaction fails, the entire operation is rolled back, which is managed automatically by Salesforce.
However, when I need finer control over transactions, I use try-catch blocks to manage error handling.
Within a try-catch block, I can attempt DML operations and handle any exceptions gracefully without letting the entire
transaction fail. Here’s an example:
try {
update myAccount;
} catch (DmlException e) {
System.debug('Error occurred: ' + e.getMessage());
}

If the update fails, the catch block will handle the exception, allowing me to either log the error or retry the operation based on
the situation. Additionally, Apex provides the Savepoint feature, which allows me to set a checkpoint in my transaction. If an
error occurs, I can roll back the transaction to that savepoint, preserving the earlier successful DML operations.
12. What is the difference between a standard controller and a custom
controller in Visualforce?
In Visualforce, a standard controller automatically provides the basic functionality for working with Salesforce objects,
including query, update, delete, and insert operations. I use a standard controller when I need out-of-the-box functionality like
fetching records or managing user navigation, without needing custom Apex logic. For example, if I create a Visualforce page
for an account, I can use a standard controller like this:
<apex:page standardController="Account">
<!-- Page content -->
</apex:page>

A custom controller, on the other hand, is an Apex class that I define, allowing complete control over the data and behavior of
the Visualforce page. Custom controllers are necessary when the logic is too complex for standard controllers to handle, or when
I need to work with multiple objects or execute complex business logic. In custom controllers, I manually implement all the
necessary actions, such as querying records or handling button clicks.
See also: Salesforce DML Interview Questions and Answers
13. How do you debug Apex code in Salesforce?
Debugging Apex code is an essential skill, and Salesforce provides various tools to help with this. One of the most commonly
used tools is the Debug Log, which allows me to capture and analyze execution details for specific users or processes. I activate
debug logs by setting trace flags for users or automated processes, and I can filter logs to focus on specific events like Apex
execution, SOQL queries, or DML operations.
Another useful tool is System.debug(), which I insert directly into my Apex code to log variable values, execution points, or
error messages. This function outputs information to the debug log, helping me track down issues in logic or data. For example, I
might include a statement like this to log the value of an account’s name:
System.debug('Account Name: ' + account.Name);
For more complex debugging, I also use the Apex Replay Debugger available in Salesforce Developer Console or Visual
Studio Code, which allows me to step through the code execution flow and identify the exact point of failure.
14. Explain what governor limits are and how you have addressed them in
past projects.
Governor limits are Salesforce’s way of ensuring that no single process monopolizes shared resources in a multi-tenant
environment. These limits apply to things like the number of SOQL queries, DML statements, and CPU time a single
transaction can consume. In past projects, I’ve had to optimize code to stay within these limits while still ensuring the desired
functionality.
To address SOQL query limits, I write bulkified code that processes multiple records at once. For example, instead of querying
records inside a loop, I retrieve all required records in a single query and then iterate over them in memory. Similarly, to avoid
hitting DML limits, I group multiple insert or update operations into a single statement rather than executing them one by one.
Additionally, for complex business processes, I use Batch Apex or Queueable Apex to break large operations into smaller,
more manageable tasks that don’t exceed the limits.
15. What is the purpose of the @AuraEnabled annotation in LWC and Aura
Components?
The @AuraEnabled annotation is crucial when building Lightning Web Components (LWC) and Aura Components that
interact with Apex controllers. This annotation exposes Apex methods to the client-side JavaScript code in LWC and Aura,
allowing the component to call the server-side method asynchronously. For example, I use @AuraEnabled when retrieving data
from the server or performing DML operations that the component needs to execute.
Here’s a simple example of an @AuraEnabled method in an Apex class:
public with sharing class AccountController {
@AuraEnabled
public static List<Account> getAccounts() {
return [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account LIMIT 10];
}
}

In this case, the getAccounts method can now be called from LWC or Aura using JavaScript, allowing for seamless integration
between the frontend and backend logic. This is especially useful for building responsive, dynamic interfaces where data must
be fetched or manipulated in real-time.
16. How do you pass data between parent and child Lightning Web
Components (LWC)?
In Lightning Web Components (LWC), passing data between parent and child components is a common task. I typically
use public properties and events to achieve this. If I want to pass data from a parent to a child component, I use public
properties in the child component that are bound to attributes in the parent’s template.
For example, in the child component’s JavaScript file, I declare a public property like this:
import { LightningElement, api } from 'lwc';
export default class ChildComponent extends LightningElement {
@api recordId;
}

In the parent component’s HTML, I bind the recordId attribute to a value, like this:
<c-child-component record-id={parentRecordId}></c-child-component>

To pass data from a child component to a parent component, I fire custom events in the child component and handle them in the
parent component. This ensures that the parent can respond to user interactions or data changes in the child component.
See also: Salesforce Service Cloud Interview Questions
17. How does the Lightning Data Service work in LWC?
The Lightning Data Service (LDS) in LWC is a powerful tool that allows me to interact with Salesforce records without
writing Apex code or SOQL queries. It simplifies data retrieval, creation, update, and deletion directly from LWC using
the lightning-record-form , lightning-record-view-form , or lightning-record-edit-form components. LDS also provides
caching and record synchronization capabilities, improving performance by reducing the number of server calls.
For example, when I need to display a record’s data, I use lightning-record-view-form to fetch and display the data from
Salesforce automatically. I don’t need to write any additional code to handle SOQL queries or DML operations, as LDS
manages everything in the background. This makes it a highly efficient way to interact with Salesforce data, especially for
building user-friendly interfaces.
18. What are the different types of bindings in LWC, and how do they
work?
In LWC, there are primarily two types of bindings: one-way data binding and two-way data binding. One-way data
binding allows data to flow from the parent component or controller to the child component or template. I typically use one-way
binding for displaying data in the component template. The data in the template is updated automatically when the property
value changes in the controller.
Two-way data binding, on the other hand, allows data to flow both ways. When a user interacts with an input field, the changes
are reflected in the component’s JavaScript controller, and vice versa. Two-way data binding is especially useful for forms
where the data in input fields should reflect the state of the component, as well as update the state based on user interaction.
19. How do you handle events in LWC, and what are the differences
between custom events and standard events?
In LWC, I handle events using the addEventListener method in JavaScript. There are two main types of events: standard
events and custom events. Standard events are predefined events like click , change , or submit that are triggered by user
interaction with HTML elements. I use standard events when I need to respond to common user actions like clicking a button or
submitting a form.
Custom events, on the other hand, are events that I define myself. These are useful when I need to pass data from a child
component to a parent component or when I want to trigger an event that is not covered by standard events. I create and dispatch
custom events using the CustomEvent constructor in JavaScript. Here’s an example of dispatching a custom event in LWC:
this.dispatchEvent(new CustomEvent('myevent', { detail: this.data }));

The parent component listens for this custom event using an event handler, allowing it to react based on the data passed through
the event.
20. Explain the difference between forceand the Apex approach for
fetching data in LWC.
In Lightning Web Components (LWC), force and Apex provide two distinct approaches to fetching data. forceuses Lightning
Data Service (LDS), allowing me to work with Salesforce records without writing Apex or SOQL queries. This is ideal for
scenarios where I need basic record operations like retrieving, creating, or updating records. LDS handles caching, data
synchronization, and sharing rules automatically, making it efficient and optimized for performance. It is a declarative approach,
meaning I can use standard components like lightning-record-form , lightning-record-view-form , and lightning-record-
edit-form to fetch and interact with records without custom server-side logic.
In contrast, using an Apex method allows for more complex and customized data retrieval. When I need to query multiple
objects, apply complex filtering, or execute business logic before returning data, I use Apex with @AuraEnabled methods.
With Apex, I have the flexibility to run SOQL queries, handle DML operations, and control the flow of data in a way
that forcecannot. However, using Apex requires manually managing governor limits, transaction control, and performance
considerations, while forceabstracts these concerns and optimizes the process automatically.
21. Describe how to implement a batch process in Apex, and when would
you choose batch Apex over other asynchronous methods?
In Apex, I implement a batch process by creating a class that implements the Database.Batchable interface. The class must
define three methods: start , execute , and finish . The start method is responsible for collecting the records to be processed in
the batch, the execute method performs the operation on those records in chunks, and the finish method performs any final
actions like sending notifications. Here’s a simple example of a batch class:
global class MyBatchClass implements Database.Batchable<SObject> {
global Database.QueryLocator start(Database.BatchableContext bc) {
return Database.getQueryLocator('SELECT Id FROM Account');
}
global void execute(Database.BatchableContext bc, List<SObject> scope) {
// Process each batch of records
for (Account acc : (List<Account>) scope) {
acc.Status__c = 'Processed';
}
update scope;
}
global void finish(Database.BatchableContext bc) {
// Post-processing tasks
System.debug('Batch Process Complete');
}
}

I choose Batch Apex when I need to process a large volume of records asynchronously. Batch Apex is especially useful when
the operation exceeds governor limits for synchronous execution or other asynchronous methods like Queueable or Future
methods. With Batch Apex, I can break down operations into smaller, manageable chunks and process them in batches of up to
2000 records, which helps avoid exceeding limits.
Enroll for a career-building Salesforce online training tailored for aspirants preparing for jobs and Salesforce certification.
Register now!
22. How do you create a trigger framework in Salesforce to manage
multiple triggers on the same object?
Creating a trigger framework helps me avoid potential issues when there are multiple triggers on the same object. The main
goal is to ensure that triggers are executed in a predictable order and to avoid duplication of logic. I usually follow a Trigger
Handler Framework pattern, where I write a single trigger per object, and the logic is delegated to a handler class. This allows
for better maintainability and separation of concerns.
In this framework, the trigger just determines the event (e.g., before insert, after update), while the handler class contains the
logic. For example, I might have a trigger like this:
trigger AccountTrigger on Account (before insert, after update) {
AccountTriggerHandler handler = new AccountTriggerHandler();
if (Trigger.isBefore && Trigger.isInsert) {
handler.beforeInsert(Trigger.new);
}
if (Trigger.isAfter && Trigger.isUpdate) {
handler.afterUpdate(Trigger.new);
}
}

In the AccountTriggerHandler class, I can further break down the logic based on each event, which helps in managing
complexity, especially when there are multiple triggers for different scenarios on the same object. This also makes future
updates easier to implement without changing the trigger directly.
23. What is the difference between with sharing and without sharing
keywords in Apex, and when would you use them?
The with sharing and without sharing keywords in Apex control whether a class respects the sharing rules and security settings
of the user running the code. When I declare a class with sharing, the code runs in the context of the current user and enforces
sharing rules. This means that only records the user has access to are processed in the code. For example, if a user has read-only
access to certain accounts, the code cannot update or delete those accounts.
On the other hand, without sharing means the code ignores sharing rules and runs with system-level privileges. I use this
approach when I need to bypass user-specific sharing settings, such as when performing administrative operations. However, I
need to be cautious with without sharing as it can lead to potential security risks if not handled properly, especially when
processing sensitive data.
I generally prefer with sharing for most business logic to ensure that the application respects user permissions. Without
sharing is reserved for specific use cases where elevated access is necessary, but I always carefully evaluate the need for it to
prevent security loopholes.
Read more: Salesforce Senior Business Analyst Interview Questions
24. How do you manage complex sharing rules and security model
implementations in your Apex code?
When managing complex sharing rules and the security model in Apex, I start by respecting the existing organization-wide
defaults (OWD), sharing rules, and role hierarchies that are in place. I use with sharing in my classes wherever applicable to
ensure that the Apex code follows the sharing rules defined for users. If certain operations need to bypass sharing for
administrative purposes, I selectively use without sharing while ensuring that this is well-documented and audited.
For highly complex scenarios, such as when multiple teams with different access requirements are involved, I might
implement Apex-managed sharing. This allows me to programmatically define custom sharing rules that go beyond the
declarative sharing settings. For instance, I can create share records manually for objects that don’t support standard sharing
settings. Using System.runAs(), I can also simulate different user profiles during testing to validate that the security model is
working as expected.
25. Explain how to implement custom pagination in Visualforce or LWC.
To implement custom pagination in Visualforce, I typically use Apex controllers and bind the result sets to the page. I limit
the query results using the LIMIT and OFFSET keywords in SOQL, and then I create navigation buttons (Next/Previous) to
navigate between the pages. For example:
public class AccountPaginationController {
public Integer offsetSize { get; set; }
public List<Account> getAccounts() {
return [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account LIMIT 10 OFFSET :offsetSize];
}
public void nextPage() {
offsetSize += 10;
}
public void previousPage() {
if (offsetSize > 0) offsetSize -= 10;
}
}

In LWC, pagination involves a more dynamic approach using JavaScript to manage state and control the display of records. I
can use data tables ( lightning-datatable ) and manage the slice of records to display. Pagination in LWC often involves
fetching a large dataset and rendering it in chunks, leveraging Lightning Data Service or Apex for back-end queries.
26. Describe how to use Platform Events for real-time integration in
Salesforce.
Platform Events are a powerful tool in Salesforce for handling real-time integrations. They follow a publish-subscribe model,
allowing me to send and receive events asynchronously across various systems. I define a Platform Event object, which acts
like a custom object, but instead of storing records, it generates event messages that can be consumed by subscribers.
When integrating Salesforce with external systems, I use Platform Events to send notifications in real-time. For example, if a
record changes in Salesforce, I can publish a Platform Event with the relevant data, and the external system can subscribe to
these events and react immediately. I publish events in Apex using the EventBus.publish() method, like this:
AccountChangeEvent__e event = new AccountChangeEvent__e();
event.AccountId__c = '001xx000003NGg7';
EventBus.publish(event);

External systems or other Salesforce orgs can then subscribe to these events using CometD, or they can be processed internally
using Apex triggers.
27. How would you implement caching in Lightning Web Components to
optimize performance?
In LWC, I implement caching by leveraging the Lightning Data Service (LDS), which caches record data automatically. When
I use LDS components like lightning-record-form or lightning-record-view-form, it handles caching behind the scenes,
reducing server calls for the same record and improving the component’s performance.
For custom caching, I use JavaScript to store frequently accessed data in memory, such as in the
browser’s localStorage or sessionStorage. This technique helps when I need to persist data across user sessions or interactions.
I also manage cache invalidation to ensure the data is not outdated, usually by clearing the cache upon record updates or setting
expiration timers for certain cached data.
28. What are the different ways to handle data manipulation operations in
Apex (insert, update, delete, and upsert)?
In Apex, I handle data manipulation operations using DML statements like insert , update , delete , and upsert . Each of
these operations serves a specific purpose:

 Insert: Adds new records to the database.

 Update: Modifies existing records.

 Delete: Removes records from the database.

 Upsert: Inserts records if they don’t exist or updates them if they already do.
For example, I might use the following code to handle data operations efficiently:
List<Account> accounts = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Industry = 'Technology'];
for (Account acc : accounts) {
acc.Status__c = 'Active';
}
update accounts;

When dealing with large datasets, I use bulkified DML operations to avoid exceeding governor limits.
29. How do you handle large data volumes (LDV) in Salesforce, especially
when working with Apex or LWC?
Handling Large Data Volumes (LDV) in Salesforce requires a combination of best practices. In Apex, I rely on batch
processing (Batch Apex), query optimizations, and indexing to ensure that the queries and data processing are efficient. I
avoid queries within loops and ensure that I’m always aware of governor limits.
In LWC, when displaying large datasets, I implement lazy loading or infinite scrolling to load records in smaller batches as the
user scrolls, minimizing the initial load time. Additionally, I use pagination and ensure that queries fetching large datasets are
optimized, often by using filters and selective SOQL queries.

30. Explain how you can perform unit testing and code coverage in
Salesforce effectively.
Unit testing in Salesforce is crucial for ensuring code quality and reliability. I write test classes that verify the logic of my code
and cover all possible use cases, including positive, negative, and edge cases. In Salesforce, I aim to achieve at least 75% code
coverage for deployment. A typical test method includes setting up test data using Test.startTest() and Test.stopTest(),
executing the method or trigger being tested, and verifying the results using System.assert statements.
For example:

Map<Id, Account> accountsMap = new Map<Id, Account>([SELECT Id, Name FROM Account]);

Maps are especially helpful in situations like bulk processing records, where I need fast access to data based on a
record ID or another unique value.
5. How do you use SOQL and SOSL queries in Apex? When should you use
each?
In Apex, SOQL (Salesforce Object Query Language) is used to retrieve data from a single object or multiple
objects that are related to each other. SOQL queries are similar to SQL in structure and are often used when I need
to retrieve a specific set of records, such as querying accounts with specific conditions. For example:
List<Account> accounts = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Industry = 'Technology'];

On the other hand, SOSL (Salesforce Object Search Language) is used when I need to search for text across
multiple objects and fields. SOSL is highly efficient for searching across different objects for a particular keyword. It’s
especially useful when I don’t know which object a piece of data might reside in. For example:
List<List<SObject>> searchResults = [FIND 'Acme' IN ALL FIELDS RETURNING Account(Name), Contact(FirstName, LastName)];

I use SOQL when I know the exact object and fields I want to query, while SOSL is my choice for broad searches
across multiple objects and fields.

Salesforce Admin Interview Questions

1. What are the different types of relationships in Salesforce?

As a certified Salesforce consultant, I’ve worked with various types of relationships in Salesforce, each of which plays a critical role
in building effective data structures. Let me explain the key relationship types that I’ve encountered and used frequently.
The first is the Lookup Relationship, which I often use when two objects need to be related but can exist independently. This type
of relationship is flexible because the associated records aren’t dependent on each other. For instance, I’ve linked Contacts to
Accounts using a Lookup, allowing the Contact to exist even if the Account is deleted. This is useful when there’s no strict
dependency between the objects. I find Lookup Relationships ideal for scenarios where objects may reference each other, but the
lifecycle of one record doesn’t depend on the other.
Another relationship I frequently use is the Master-Detail Relationship, which creates a much stronger dependency between two
objects. The child (detail) object is completely dependent on the parent (master) object, and if the parent is deleted, all related child
records are also deleted. I’ve used this in cases like Opportunities and Opportunity Products, where the products tied to an
Opportunity should be deleted if the Opportunity no longer exists. This type of relationship helps enforce strict data integrity and
allows for useful features like roll-up summary fields, which I’ve leveraged to calculate totals or averages across child records.
Additionally, when I need to establish a Many-to-Many Relationship, I create a Junction Object. This is something I’ve used in
situations like managing Projects and Employees. A single project can involve many employees, and an employee can be part of
multiple projects. By using a junction object, I can easily manage these complex relationships, providing the flexibility needed for
many business use cases.
Finally, in my experience with Salesforce, I’ve also set up Hierarchical Relationships for users. This type is specific to the User
object and is incredibly useful when defining organizational structures. For instance, I’ve implemented this relationship in approval
processes where managers need to approve actions taken by their subordinates.
These relationship types, in my experience, are fundamental to building robust and scalable solutions in Salesforce. By selecting
the right relationship type, I ensure that my clients’ data models are not only efficient but also aligned with their business processes
and reporting needs.

Read detailed article about object relationships in Salesforce

2. What is a Role Hierarchy and how does it work?
A Role Hierarchy in Salesforce is a way to control record access by structuring users in a hierarchical manner based on their roles
within the organization. It allows users higher up in the hierarchy (like managers or executives) to automatically access the records
owned by users below them, ensuring that managers can see the data of their subordinates without needing to manually share
every record.
In my previous project, I used role hierarchies to ensure that regional managers in a banking application had access to
the accounts, opportunities, and payments owned by their respective sales reps. For instance, if a Sales Rep in a specific
region created an account or opportunity, their Regional Manager could automatically view, edit, or report on those records based
on the hierarchy.
This setup made it easier to maintain data visibility while controlling access. It eliminated the need for manual sharing of records
while ensuring that sensitive information was only visible to users with the right level of authority. The role hierarchy aligned
perfectly with the organization’s structure, allowing teams to work efficiently while maintaining data security.

Read these important Accenture Salesforce Developer Interview Questions

3. What are Sharing Rules?

Sharing Rules in Salesforce are a way to extend data access beyond the default sharing settings, like Role Hierarchies and
Organization-Wide Defaults (OWD). They allow you to open up access to records for certain groups of users who wouldn’t normally
have access, based on either record ownership or specific criteria.
In my previous project, I used sharing rules to ensure that specific teams had access to certain records without compromising data
security. For example, I worked on a banking application where we needed to give access to high-value customer records to
the Risk Management team without altering the Role Hierarchy or profiles. By setting up a criteria-based sharing rule, I could
ensure that any account marked as “High-Risk” would automatically be shared with the Risk Management team, giving
them Read/Write access to analyze and assess potential risks.
Another example was using owner-based sharing rules to share opportunities owned by a particular group of regional sales
reps with their regional managers, ensuring better collaboration and oversight within the teams. Sharing rules made it easier to
tailor access in a secure and efficient way.
Read more: TCS Salesforce Interview Questions
4. What are Profiles and Permission Sets?

Profiles and Permission Sets are key tools for controlling user access and permissions in Salesforce.
Profiles define the base level of access for a user. Each user is assigned one profile, which dictates what they can do in the
system, such as which objects they can access, what fields they can view, and what actions they can perform (like creating, editing,
or deleting records).
For example, if I have a Sales Profile for sales reps, it might grant access to objects like Leads, Opportunities, and Contacts. All
users with this profile can view and interact with these objects, but they might not have access to advanced features like system
settings or custom objects.
Permission Sets extend the access defined by profiles. While profiles provide the base permissions, permission sets allow for
adding extra permissions to specific users without changing their profile. A user can have only one profile but multiple permission
sets.
For instance, I might have a Marketing Profile that grants basic access to campaigns and leads. If one marketing team member
needs additional permissions to view detailed reports, I can create a Reporting Permission Set and assign it to that user. This
allows them to generate detailed reports without modifying their main profile, giving me the flexibility to manage permissions more
efficiently.
Read more about: Salesforce Senior Business Analyst Interview Questions
5. How do you set up field-level security in Salesforce?
Setting up field-level security in Salesforce is crucial for ensuring that sensitive data is protected and only accessible to the right
users. I typically start by navigating to the object manager and selecting the object that contains the field I want to secure. From
there, I go to the Fields & Relationships section, select the specific field, and then click on Set Field-Level Security. This allows
me to control visibility by profile, ensuring that only users with the appropriate permissions can view or edit the field. For example, I
might restrict access to a salary field so that only HR and managers can see it, while hiding it from other users.
Additionally, I use Permission Sets to provide more granular control over field-level security. By creating a permission set, I can
grant specific users access to fields without changing their profile settings. This is particularly useful when I need to temporarily
grant access for a specific project or task. I assign the permission set to the relevant users, ensuring they have the necessary
access without compromising the security of other data. This hands-on approach to managing field-level security helps maintain
data integrity and compliance, which is essential for any organization’s data governance strategy. By thoroughly understanding and
implementing field-level security, I ensure that our Salesforce data is both secure and accessible to those who need it.
Read more: Roles and Profiles in Salesforce Interview Questions
6. What is the difference between a role and a profile in Salesforce?

Understanding the difference between a role and a profile in Salesforce is fundamental for managing user access and permissions
effectively. A profile is a baseline set of permissions that determines what users can do within Salesforce, such as access to
objects, fields, and specific functionalities. When I set up a profile, I’m configuring what tabs users can see, what applications they
can access, and what actions they can perform on records. For instance, a Sales Rep profile might have access to Leads and
Opportunities objects, but not to HR-related objects. Profiles are essential for defining the basic operational framework for different
types of users in the organization.
On the other hand, a role determines the data visibility within the Salesforce organization based on the hierarchy. Roles are used
to set up the sharing rules and control the access to records within the organization. For example, a Sales Manager role might
allow access to all records owned by their team, while a Sales Rep role only allows access to their own records. This hierarchical
approach ensures that managers can oversee and access their team’s data, enabling effective data sharing and collaboration.
By using roles and profiles together, I can create a robust security model. Profiles set the functional permissions, while roles
handle data visibility, ensuring users have the right access without compromising security. This hands-on approach allows me to
tailor the user experience precisely, ensuring each user has the access they need to perform their job efficiently while protecting
sensitive information. My thorough understanding of these concepts and their practical implementation is crucial for maintaining a
secure and efficient Salesforce environment.
Read more about Roles and Profiles
7. What are triggers in salesforce, and how you used in your previous project?

Triggers in Salesforce are pieces of code that execute automatically when certain events occur, such as before or after a record is
inserted, updated, or deleted in the database. Triggers allow for custom actions to take place when these events happen, enabling
me to automate complex business processes that standard Salesforce functionality might not cover.
In my previous project, I used triggers extensively to automate processes within a banking application. For instance, I wrote a
trigger that automatically updated a Customer’s Payment Status after a successful wire transfer. This trigger would fire after the
payment record was inserted, and it would check for specific conditions like transaction success and update related records in
other objects.
Another example involved a before update trigger on the Account object, which validated certain business rules. If an account’s
status changed, the trigger would ensure that necessary fields were filled out correctly, preventing incomplete or incorrect data from
being saved. These triggers helped streamline workflows, reduce manual errors, and ensure that critical processes happened
without the need for user intervention.
Read more Triggers in Salesforce interview questions and answers.
8. How do you create and manage workflow rules in Salesforce?
Creating and managing workflow rules in Salesforce is a critical part of automating business processes and improving efficiency. I
start by navigating to Setup, then selecting Workflow Rules under the Process Automation section. To create a new workflow rule,
I click on New Rule, choose the object to which the rule applies, and set the criteria that trigger the workflow. For example, I might
create a rule for the Opportunity object that triggers when the stage is updated to “Closed Won.” This ensures that when an
opportunity is successfully closed, specific actions are automatically initiated, such as sending a congratulatory email to the sales
team or updating related records.
Once the criteria are defined, I move on to specifying the actions that should be executed when the rule criteria are met. These
actions can include field updates, email alerts, task creation, or outbound messages. For instance, in my previous example, I
might set an action to update the account status to “Customer” and create a follow-up task for the account manager to schedule a
kickoff meeting. After defining the actions, I activate the workflow rule, ensuring it’s immediately effective in streamlining processes.
Managing workflow rules involves regularly reviewing and updating them to align with evolving business processes. I ensure that
rules are performing as expected by monitoring their execution and checking the workflow rule logs for any issues. Additionally, I
document all workflow rules thoroughly to maintain a clear understanding of automation logic within the team. By staying proactive
and detail-oriented in managing workflow rules, I ensure that Salesforce automation continues to drive efficiency and accuracy in
business operations. My hands-on experience with creating and managing workflow rules demonstrates my ability to leverage
Salesforce’s automation capabilities effectively, making me a valuable asset for optimizing your organization’s processes.

Read interesting things about Triggers in Salesforce.

9. What is a permission set and how is it used?

I often use permission sets in Salesforce to provide users with additional access rights without modifying their profiles. For
instance, in a recent project, our sales team needed temporary access to a new reporting feature we were testing. Instead of
altering their existing profiles, which could have unintended consequences, I created a permission set specifically for this new
feature.
To do this, I navigated to Setup, selected Permission Sets under the Users section, and clicked on New to create the set. I named
it “Reporting Feature Access” and chose the appropriate license type. Then, I added the necessary permissions, such as access
to the custom objects and fields related to the reporting feature. After configuring the permission set, I assigned it to the sales team
members who needed access. This way, they could use the new reporting tools without affecting their primary access rights.
Read more: Which Salesforce Certification is Easy for Beginners?
Managing permission sets involves keeping them up-to-date and relevant to current business needs. I regularly review assigned
permission sets to ensure they are still required and adjust permissions as needed. For example, when the project ended, I
removed the “Reporting Feature Access” permission set from the users, ensuring their permissions returned to the standard
settings. This hands-on approach with permission sets allows me to provide flexible and precise access control, ensuring users
have the right tools while maintaining security. My experience with creating and managing permission sets demonstrates my ability
to adapt quickly and maintain a secure and efficient Salesforce environment, making me a valuable asset for your team.
Read more: This Permission Sets Step-by-Step will explain better.
10. How do you set up and use the Salesforce Data Loader?

Salesforce Data Loader is a client application used for bulk data import and export. To set up the Data Loader, download and install
it from the Salesforce Setup. Once installed, launch the Data Loader and log in using your Salesforce credentials. For importing
data, prepare a CSV file with the data to be imported and map the CSV fields to Salesforce fields using the Data Loader interface.
For exporting data, select the object and fields you want to export and specify the criteria for the data. The Data Loader can handle
large volumes of data efficiently and supports operations such as insert, update, upsert, delete, and export. It is especially useful for
data migration, backup, and bulk updates.
11. How do you create a custom object in Salesforce?

Creating a custom object in Salesforce allows you to store data unique to your business needs. To create a custom object, navigate
to Setup, and under the ‘Object Manager’ tab, click ‘Create’ and select ‘Custom Object’. Enter the object’s label, plural label, and
object name, and configure optional settings such as record name format and object permissions. Once saved, Salesforce
generates standard fields like Created By and Last Modified By. You can then add custom fields, set up page layouts, and define
relationships with other objects. Custom objects provide flexibility in modeling complex data structures tailored to specific business
requirements.

This Detailed article is here Objects and Tabs in Salesforce explained it better.
12. What is the difference between a lookup and master-detail relationship?

In this salesforce interview question, the interviewer expects a thorough answer. A lookup relationship is a loosely coupled
relationship between two objects, allowing records to be linked without dependency on each other. For instance, a Contact can
have a lookup to an Account but can exist independently of it. Conversely, a master-detail relationship is tightly coupled, meaning
the detail (child) record is dependent on the master (parent) record. If the master record is deleted, the detail records are also
deleted. Master-detail relationships also inherit sharing rules and security settings from the master record, providing more control
over data access and integrity.
13. What are Validation Rules? How do you create a validation rule in Salesforce?

Validation rules enforce data quality by ensuring that records meet certain criteria before they are saved. This question evaluates
your understanding of data integValidation rules in Salesforce ensure data accuracy and consistency by preventing users from
saving records that don’t meet specified criteria. They contain logical expressions that evaluate the data entered into fields and
return “True” or “False.” When a rule evaluates to “True,” it prevents the record from being saved and displays a custom error
message. Validation rules help enforce business rules, ensuring that only clean and valid data is stored in the system. They are
crucial for maintaining data integrity across the platform.

I frequently create validation rules in Salesforce to maintain data integrity and ensure that users enter accurate information. For
instance, in a recent scenario, we needed to ensure that the close date of an opportunity couldn’t be set in the past. To address
this, I implemented a validation rule that prevents users from saving a record if the close date is earlier than today.
To create this validation rule, I started by navigating to Setup, then selected the object for which I wanted to create the rule, in this
case, the Opportunity object. From there, I went to Validation Rules under the object’s settings and clicked on New. I named the
rule “Close Date Cannot Be in the Past” and provided a meaningful description for clarity. In the Error Condition Formula box, I
entered the formula CloseDate < TODAY() , which checks if the close date is less than the current date. I then specified the error
message, such as “Close Date cannot be in the past,” which will be displayed to users if they attempt to save a record that violates
this rule.
After saving the rule, I tested it by trying to create and edit opportunity records with past close dates to ensure it worked as
expected. By doing this, I confirmed that the validation rule effectively prevented invalid data from being saved. Regularly reviewing
and updating validation rules is part of my hands-on approach to maintaining data quality. My experience with creating and
managing validation rules shows that I can implement precise data controls, ensuring the integrity and reliability of the information
within Salesforce. This practical, detail-oriented approach to validation rules makes me confident in my ability to enhance data
quality in your organization.

14. What do you mean by governor limits?

As a certified Salesforce consultant, I often explain governor limits as the set of rules that Salesforce enforces to maintain the
efficiency and stability of its multi-tenant environment. Since Salesforce is a cloud-based platform where multiple customers share
the same resources, governor limits are crucial for ensuring that no single organization consumes too much processing power,
memory, or database capacity.

Governor limits control how much data or how many resources I can use in one transaction or execution. For example, there are
limits on the number of SOQL queries, DML statements, and API calls I can perform in a single transaction. These limits ensure
that my code is optimized and doesn’t impact the performance of the overall system. Some common governor limits include 50,000
SOQL query rows and 100 SOQL queries per transaction.
Understanding these limits helps me design efficient solutions and prevent performance issues or errors such as “Too many SOQL
queries” or “Too many DML statements.” Properly handling governor limits is key to delivering scalable and reliable solutions in
Salesforce.

Read more: Salesforce Service Cloud Interview Questions

15. How do you set up and use a sandbox in Salesforce?

We need to answer this questions in a scenario based situation with example. I often use sandboxes in Salesforce to create a safe
environment for development, testing, and training without affecting the live production data. For instance, when we were preparing
to implement a new feature, I set up a Developer Sandbox to test our changes extensively before deploying them to production.
To set up a sandbox, I navigated to Setup, then selected Sandboxes under the Environment section. I clicked on New Sandbox,
gave it a name, and chose the type of sandbox based on our needs – in this case, a Developer Sandbox for development
purposes. After selecting the type, I configured any necessary settings and clicked Create. The creation process took some time,
depending on the sandbox type and the size of the data being copied.
Once the sandbox was ready, I logged into it using the unique URL provided. In this isolated environment, I could freely develop
new features, perform tests, and experiment with configurations without any risk to our production data. For example, I created and
tested custom objects, workflows, and validation rules to ensure they functioned correctly. If I encountered any issues, I could
troubleshoot and resolve them within the sandbox, ensuring that only fully vetted changes were moved to production.

Regularly refreshing and managing sandboxes is part of my routine to keep them up-to-date with the latest production metadata.
This hands-on approach with sandboxes allows me to deliver robust and reliable solutions while minimizing risks. My experience
with setting up and using sandboxes ensures that I can maintain a high standard of quality and efficiency in Salesforce
development and deployment, making me a valuable asset to your team.

Readmore: types of Sandboxes in Salesforce

16. What is the difference between standard and custom objects?

Standard objects in Salesforce are pre-built objects provided by Salesforce to manage core CRM data, such as Accounts,
Contacts, Leads, and Opportunities. These objects come with predefined fields, relationships, and functionalities tailored to
common business processes. Custom objects, on the other hand, are created by users to store data specific to their organization’s
needs. Custom objects offer flexibility in defining fields, relationships, and custom functionalities that standard objects may not
cover. This distinction allows businesses to extend Salesforce’s capabilities to fit unique requirements while leveraging robust
standard objects for common CRM tasks.
Standard Objects Custom Objects

Predefined by Salesforce and available out-of-the-box. Created by users to meet specific business needs.

Examples include Accounts, Contacts, Opportunities. Examples include Project__c, Invoice__c, Employee__c.

Limited customization options compared to custom objects. Highly customizable with fields, relationships, and rules.

Automatically included in standard Salesforce reports and dashboards. Require custom reports and dashboards to be created.
 Standard Objects Custom Objects

Updates and enhancements managed by Salesforce. Updates and enhancements managed by the organization.

17. How do you use the Schema Builder in Salesforce?

In my practical experience, the Schema Builder in Salesforce is an incredibly useful tool for visualizing and managing our data
model. I typically start by navigating to Schema Builder from the Setup menu. Once there, I use it to view all objects and their
relationships in a single, interactive interface.

One of the key ways I leverage Schema Builder is by creating custom objects and fields directly within the interface. This visual
approach allows me to quickly see how new fields and objects will integrate with the existing data model. For example, if I need to
add a new custom object for tracking project milestones, I can create it in Schema Builder, add the necessary fields, and establish
relationships with other objects by drawing connections between them.

Another practical use is for modifying existing objects. If I need to add a new field to an object or change a field type, doing it
through Schema Builder helps ensure that I understand the impact on related objects and fields. I can also easily set field-level
security and validation rules right there, making it a one-stop-shop for data model changes.

Additionally, Schema Builder is excellent for troubleshooting and optimization. When dealing with complex data models, it helps me
visually trace relationships and dependencies, making it easier to identify and resolve issues such as lookup or master-detail
relationship errors.

Overall, Schema Builder streamlines the process of managing our Salesforce data architecture, ensuring that changes are
implemented correctly and efficiently, which is crucial for maintaining data integrity and supporting business processes.
Salesforce Advanced Admin Interview Questions and Answers
18. What are the different types of sharing rules available in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, sharing rules are used to extend record access to users based on criteria or ownership. There are two main types:
criteria-based and owner-based sharing rules. Criteria-based sharing rules grant access to records that meet certain criteria, such
as sharing all accounts in a specific industry with a sales team. Owner-based sharing rules grant access to records owned by
certain users, such as sharing all records owned by users in a specific role with another role. These rules enhance the flexibility of
record sharing beyond the role hierarchy, ensuring that the right users have access to the right data based on business needs.
Here’s an Apex code example that demonstrates how to create both Owner-based Sharing Rules and Criteria-based Sharing
Rules programmatically in Salesforce:
Owner-based Sharing Rule Example
// Create a new Owner-based sharing rule for the Account object
public with sharing class OwnerBasedSharingRuleExample {

public void createOwnerBasedSharingRule() {

// Define the sharing rule
AccountShare newShare = new AccountShare();

// Specify the Account record to be shared (replace with actual record Id)
newShare.ParentId = '0015g00000XYZ123';

// Specify the user or group to share with (replace with actual User or Group Id)
newShare.UserOrGroupId = '0055g00000ABC456';

// Define the access level

newShare.AccessLevel = 'Read';

// Insert the sharing rule

insert newShare;
}
}

Criteria-based Sharing Rule Example

// Create a new Criteria-based sharing rule for the Opportunity object
public with sharing class CriteriaBasedSharingRuleExample {

public void createCriteriaBasedSharingRule() {

// Define the criteria for sharing
OpportunityShare newShare = new OpportunityShare();

// Specify the Opportunity record to be shared (replace with actual record Id)
newShare.ParentId = '0065g00000XYZ789';

// Specify the user or group to share with (replace with actual User or Group Id)
newShare.UserOrGroupId = '0055g00000DEF123';

// Define the access level

newShare.AccessLevel = 'Edit';

// Set the criteria (e.g., Opportunities with StageName 'Closed Won')

newShare.RowCause = Schema.OpportunityShare.RowCause.Manual;

// Insert the sharing rule

insert newShare;
}
}

Explanation:

 Owner-based Sharing Rule: This example shares an Account record based on the owner of the record with a
specific user or group. The access level ( Read or Edit ) is specified in the AccessLevel field.
 Criteria-based Sharing Rule: This example shares an Opportunity record with a specific user or group based
on certain criteria (e.g., opportunities with a specific stage). The criteria are defined in the RowCause field.
19. How do you create and manage a dashboard in Salesforce?

You can answer this salesforce interview question in your own words as follows:

Creating and managing dashboards in Salesforce is a vital part of how I drive data-driven decision-making within the team. Let me
share a recent example where I built a dashboard to track our sales performance. The goal was to give the sales team and
management a clear, real-time view of key metrics like closed deals, pipeline status, and individual sales rep performance.
To get started, I navigated to the Dashboards tab and clicked on New Dashboard. I named it “Sales Performance Dashboard” and
chose the appropriate folder for access control. The next step was to add components to the dashboard. I selected different report
charts and tables that I had previously created, such as bar charts for monthly sales comparisons, pie charts for deal sources, and
tables for individual sales rep performance. Each component was added to the dashboard by clicking Add Component, selecting
the relevant report, and choosing the best visualization type for that data.
Read this: LWC Tutorial – Basics and Component Structure
Customization is key to making dashboards truly useful. I adjusted the layout to highlight the most critical metrics at the top,
ensuring they are immediately visible when someone opens the dashboard. Additionally, I configured the dashboard to refresh
automatically on a daily basis so that the data stays current without manual intervention. To ensure the dashboard was user-
friendly, I added descriptions to each component, explaining what the data represents and why it’s important.
Managing dashboards involves regularly reviewing them to ensure they continue to meet the team’s needs. I solicit feedback from
users and make adjustments as necessary, such as adding new metrics or modifying existing ones based on changing business
priorities. This hands-on, iterative approach ensures our dashboards remain relevant and actionable, providing the insights our
team needs to make informed decisions. My experience in creating and managing dashboards demonstrates my ability to translate
data into meaningful insights, a crucial skill for driving performance and achieving business goals.

Read more about: Salesforce Data Loader Interview Questions and Answers
20. What is the purpose of the Salesforce AppExchange?

The Salesforce AppExchange is an online marketplace where users can find, evaluate, and install third-party applications and
solutions that extend Salesforce’s capabilities. It offers a wide range of apps, components, and consulting services tailored to
various business needs, such as marketing automation, data management, and industry-specific solutions. The AppExchange
allows businesses to enhance their Salesforce environment without needing extensive custom development. Users can browse
reviews, test apps in their sandbox environments, and seamlessly integrate chosen solutions into their Salesforce instance. This
ecosystem promotes innovation and enables businesses to leverage specialized tools to optimize their operations and drive growth.

Code Snippet Example: Installing an App from AppExchange using Salesforce CLI

While installing apps from the AppExchange is typically done through the Salesforce UI, you can automate the installation process
using Salesforce CLI for certain packages. Here’s a basic example of how to install a package using the Salesforce CLI:
# Authenticate into your Salesforce org
sfdx force:auth:web:login -a MyOrgAlias

# Install a package from AppExchange using the package ID

sfdx force:package:install --package 04t1t0000022abcAAA --targetusername MyOrgAlias --wait 10 --publishwait 10 --noprompt

Explanation:

sfdx force:auth:web:login : Authenticates to your Salesforce org using a web-based login. The -a MyOrgAlias parameter assigns
an alias to your org for easier reference.
sfdx force:package:install : Installs a package into your Salesforce org using the package’s unique ID ( 04t1t0000022abcAAA ).
The --wait and --publishwait parameters control how long the CLI waits for the installation process, and --noprompt skips any
prompts during the installation.
Read more about: Salesforce CPQ Interview Questions and Expert Answers
21. How do Page Layouts and Record Types work in Salesforce?

Page Layouts and Record Types in Salesforce are tools that help customize how data is displayed and accessed by users. Page
Layouts control the layout and organization of fields, buttons, related lists, and other elements on a record detail page. They allow
administrators to tailor the user interface to meet specific business needs, ensuring that users see relevant information. Record
Types, on the other hand, enable the creation of different business processes, picklist values, and Page Layouts for various user
profiles. They are particularly useful for organizations with complex requirements, allowing different sets of data and workflows for
different types of records within the same object.
22. How can Account and Contact information be imported into Salesforce?

Account and Contact information can be imported into Salesforce using tools like the Data Import Wizard and Data Loader. The
Data Import Wizard is a user-friendly tool accessible via Setup that allows you to import data for standard objects like Accounts and
Contacts, as well as custom objects. It supports files up to 50,000 records and provides a step-by-step interface to map your data
fields. Data Loader, a more advanced tool, can handle larger data volumes and supports various operations such as insert, update,
upsert, delete, and export. It is suitable for complex data import scenarios and allows greater control over the import process.

23. How do you create Leads and Opportunities in Salesforce?

Creating Leads and Opportunities in Salesforce is crucial for managing the sales pipeline effectively. Let me walk you through
how I approach this process to ensure seamless tracking and conversion of prospects.
When it comes to creating Leads, I utilize multiple methods depending on the source of the lead. For instance, if leads come from a
marketing campaign, I import them in bulk using the Data Import Wizard. This tool allows me to map fields from a CSV file to
corresponding Salesforce fields, ensuring all relevant information is captured accurately. Once the leads are imported, I
immediately set up lead assignment rules to distribute them to the appropriate sales reps based on criteria such as geographic
location or product interest. This automated process ensures that no lead falls through the cracks and each one is promptly
attended to.
Read more: Salesforce OWD Interview Questions and answers
On the other hand, Opportunities are created once a lead is qualified. I convert the lead to an opportunity by clicking
the Convert button on the lead record, which seamlessly transfers the data to the Opportunity object. During the conversion
process, I make sure to fill in critical details like the opportunity stage, expected close date, and potential deal amount. This
information is crucial for forecasting and pipeline management. Additionally, I link the opportunity to the appropriate account and
contact records to maintain a clear connection between the prospect and the sales process.
Managing these records involves regularly updating the opportunity stages as deals progress through the pipeline. I also set
up workflow rules and email alerts to notify the team of important changes or actions needed, such as when an opportunity
reaches a critical stage or if it’s been stagnant for too long. This proactive management ensures that opportunities are always
moving forward and that the sales team is aligned on next steps.
By effectively creating and managing Leads and Opportunities, I help maintain an organized and efficient sales process, ensuring
that our team can focus on closing deals and driving revenue. My hands-on experience with Salesforce’s lead and opportunity
management capabilities underscores my ability to optimize sales operations and support business growth.

Read about: Templates in LWC

24. What is a junction object and when would you use it?

A junction object in Salesforce is a custom object used to create a many-to-many relationship between two other objects. It
typically has two Master-Detail relationships, one with each of the objects it connects. Junction objects are useful in scenarios
where records from two objects need to be associated with each other multiple times. For example, in a project management
application, a junction object called ‘ProjectAssignment’ could be used to link ‘Projects’ and ‘Employees’ objects, allowing multiple
employees to be assigned to multiple projects. This setup provides a flexible and scalable way to model complex data relationships
in Salesforce.
Junction Object in Salesforce
Here is a visual representation explaining a junction object in Salesforce. The illustration shows two types of objects, “Students”
and “Courses,” connected by a junction object called “Enrollment.” It highlights how the “Enrollment” junction object creates a
many-to-many relationship, allowing one student to enroll in many courses and one course to have many students.

Code Example: Creating a Junction Object

Let’s say we need to track which Students are enrolled in which Courses.
1. Create the Custom Objects:
 Student (Custom Object)
 Course (Custom Object)
 Enrollment (Junction Object)
2. Create Lookup Relationships:
 On the Enrollment object, create two master-detail relationships:
 Student (Related to Student)
 Course (Related to Course)
3. Apex Code Example:
public class EnrollmentExample {

public void enrollStudentInCourse(Id studentId, Id courseId) {

// Create a new Enrollment record (Junction Object)
Enrollment__c newEnrollment = new Enrollment__c();

// Set the master-detail relationship fields

newEnrollment.Student__c = studentId; // Student ID (Related to Student)
newEnrollment.Course__c = courseId; // Course ID (Related to Course)

// Insert the Enrollment record

insert newEnrollment;
 }
}

Explanation:

 Junction Object: In this example, Enrollment__c acts as the junction object,

connecting Student__c and Course__c.
 Master-Detail Relationships: The Enrollment__c object has two master-detail relationships—one
to Student__c and one to Course__c.
 Apex Code: The code creates a new Enrollment__c record, linking a specific student to a specific course by
setting the Student__c and Course__c fields to the appropriate record IDs.
25. How do you create and manage field dependencies in Salesforce?

Field dependencies in Salesforce allow you to control the values of a dependent picklist based on the value selected in a controlling
picklist. To create a field dependency, navigate to the object manager, select the object, and go to ‘Field Dependencies’. Click
‘New’, choose the controlling and dependent fields, and define the dependency matrix. The matrix allows you to specify which
values in the dependent picklist are available for each value in the controlling picklist. Managing field dependencies helps ensure
data consistency and relevance, enhancing user experience by providing context-specific options.

Example: Creating a Dependent Picklist

Let’s say you have two picklist fields on a custom object: “Country” (Controlling Field) and “State” (Dependent Field). You want
the “State” picklist to show only the states that correspond to the selected “Country.”
Steps:

1. Create the Picklist Fields:

  Go to the Object Manager for the custom object where you want to create the fields.
 Create a new picklist field for Country.
 Create another picklist field for State.
2. Define the Field Dependency:
 In the Object Manager, select the object where the fields were created.
 Under Fields & Relationships, click Field Dependencies.
 Click New to create a new field dependency.
 Select Country as the controlling field and State as the dependent field.
 Click Continue.
3. Manage the Dependency:
 You’ll see a matrix where you can specify which “State” options should be available for each
“Country.”
 Select the appropriate checkboxes to define the available “State” options for each “Country.”
 Click Save to apply the dependency.
Code Example: Using Apex to Set Field Dependencies

While Salesforce’s point-and-click interface is typically used to manage field dependencies, you can also manage picklist values
programmatically using Apex, especially for more complex scenarios. Here’s a simple example:
public with sharing class FieldDependencyExample {

public static void managePicklistValues() {

// Assume we have a custom object named MyCustomObject__c with fields Country__c and State__c
MyCustomObject__c record = new MyCustomObject__c();

// Set the controlling picklist field

record.Country__c = 'USA';
 // Set the dependent picklist field based on the controlling field's value
if (record.Country__c == 'USA') {
record.State__c = 'California';
} else if (record.Country__c == 'Canada') {
record.State__c = 'Ontario';
}

// Insert the record with the dependent picklist value set correctly
insert record;
}
}

Explanation:

 Controlling Field: The Country__c field controls the available values for the State__c field.
 Dependent Field: The State__c field’s options are filtered based on the value of Country__c.
 The code checks the value of the controlling field and sets the dependent field accordingly before inserting the
record.
This code example demonstrates the basic idea of how you might handle field dependencies programmatically, though most field
dependencies are typically managed through Salesforce’s declarative tools rather than Apex.

Read more: Roles and Profiles in Salesforce Interview Questions

26. What are the main types of relationships you can create between objects in
Salesforce?

The main types of relationships you can create between objects in Salesforce are Lookup, Master-Detail, and Many-to-Many
relationships. Lookup relationships link two objects in a loosely coupled manner, allowing the child record to exist independently of
the parent. Master-Detail relationships are tightly coupled, with the child record dependent on the parent record for its existence.
This relationship also shares security settings and deletion rules. Many-to-Many relationships are achieved using a junction object,
which is a custom object with two Master-Detail relationships, linking each record of one object to multiple records of another.

Salesforce – Configuration and Setup | Certification Exam Questions

27. How do you ensure data quality and integrity in Salesforce?

Ensuring data quality and integrity in Salesforce involves implementing best practices and tools to maintain accurate and consistent
data. Key strategies include using validation rules to enforce data entry standards, employing field dependencies to ensure relevant
data selection, and using workflow rules and process automation to standardize data processes. Regular data audits and
deduplication processes help identify and correct inconsistencies. Additionally, training users on proper data entry procedures and
establishing clear data governance policies contribute to maintaining high data quality. Tools like Data Loader and third-party data
management solutions can assist in cleaning and managing large datasets.

28. How do you manage user access and permissions in Salesforce?

Managing user access and permissions in Salesforce involves configuring profiles, permission sets, and roles to control what users
can see and do within the platform. Profiles define a user’s baseline permissions, including object-level permissions, field-level
security, and user permissions. Permission sets extend user permissions without altering their profile, allowing for more granular
access control. Roles determine data visibility through the role hierarchy, enabling record-level access sharing based on
organizational structure. Additionally, sharing rules, manual sharing, and organization-wide defaults (OWD) further refine access
controls. By carefully setting up these elements, administrators can ensure that users have appropriate access while maintaining
data security.
29. What is the difference between Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic?
Lightning Experience and Salesforce Classic are two different user interfaces for Salesforce. Salesforce Classic is the original
interface, known for its simplicity and ease of use but with limited customization and modern features. Lightning Experience,
introduced later, offers a more modern, dynamic, and customizable user interface. It includes advanced features like the Lightning
App Builder, enhanced dashboards and reports, and improved performance. Lightning Experience supports component-based
architecture, allowing users to build and customize pages with drag-and-drop functionality. While Classic remains available for
legacy support, Salesforce is continuously enhancing Lightning Experience, encouraging users to transition for better productivity
and functionality.

30. What is the purpose of the Salesforce AppExchange?

The Salesforce AppExchange is an online marketplace where users can discover, evaluate, and install third-party applications and
solutions that extend Salesforce’s capabilities. It offers a wide range of apps, components, and consulting services designed to
meet various business needs, such as marketing automation, data management, and industry-specific solutions. The AppExchange
allows businesses to enhance their Salesforce environment without requiring extensive custom development. Users can browse
reviews, test apps in sandbox environments, and seamlessly integrate chosen solutions into their Salesforce instance. This
ecosystem promotes innovation and enables businesses to leverage specialized tools to optimize their operations and drive growth.

Salesforce Admin Certification Chapter wise Questions

Chapter 1: Cloud Computing
The “Cloud Computing” section is a vital topic in the Salesforce Admin Certification, reflecting the importance of understanding the
cloud infrastructure that powers Salesforce. Mastery of cloud computing concepts is crucial for interview preparation, as
interviewers frequently assess candidates’ knowledge in this area. Utilizing resources like Trailhead can enhance your
understanding and readiness for any interview. In today’s tech-driven landscape, proficiency in cloud computing is indispensable for
any Salesforce professional.

1. What is Cloud Computing?

Answer: If you know earlier big companies used to maintain their servers which were providing the data storage and computing
resources which were very costly to maintain, moreover not necessarily each company was utilizing their servers to fullest or if they
wanted to expand the computing power it was not an easy task. Cloud computing is like the on-demand availability of computer
system resources, data storage, and computing power without being managed by the user utilizing them. And it’s effortless to
increase or decrease the resources you want for yourself. Example AWS.
2. Are virtualization and cloud computing the same thing?
Answer: No, they are not the same thing; in exact words, virtualization is the technology while cloud computing is a methodology.
To generate multiple simulated environments from a single piece of the underlying hardware. Cloud computing is a set of
approaches to deliver data storage, computation power, infrastructure, etc., to users on-demand across any network.
3. What is PaaS? Is Salesforce a PaaS or SaaS?
Answer: Platform as a service (PaaS) is a category of cloud computing services that allow customers to develop, run applications
without the complexity of building and maintaining the infrastructure typically associated with developing and launching the
application(s); Salesforce is both PaaS and SaaS, and it is SaaS as Salesforce provides you with a set of software offered in an on-
demand model. PaaS as Salesforce Lightning Platform’s built-in features and functionality take care of back-end concerns such as
security, infrastructure, and data integration to focus on building only apps rather than worrying about other things.

5. What is a private cloud?

Answer: Picture a cloud computing environment dedicated exclusively to your organization—that’s a private cloud. It offers the
flexibility and scalability of cloud services but with enhanced security and control. In my experience, private clouds are ideal for
businesses needing stringent data privacy and regulatory compliance. Unlike public clouds, where resources are shared among
multiple tenants, a private cloud’s infrastructure is solely for one organization.
This setup allows for customization of the hardware and software to meet specific needs. I’ve managed private cloud environments
where we could fine-tune performance and security settings, ensuring our sensitive data remained protected. This blend of control
and security makes private clouds a robust choice for critical business applications.

Chapter 2: Salesforce & CRM Basics

The “Salesforce & CRM Basics” section is foundational for any Salesforce Admin, covering essential concepts that are critical for
effective CRM management. Understanding these basics is key for interview preparation, as interviewers often probe this
knowledge to gauge your proficiency. Leveraging Trailhead for this topic can significantly boost your readiness for any Salesforce
interview. Mastery of Salesforce & CRM Basics ensures you can confidently manage and optimize CRM systems, a vital skill for
any admin.

6. What is CRM?
Answer: Think of a CRM (Customer Relationship Management) system as the nerve center for managing all your customer
interactions and data. In my experience, a CRM is essential for organizing, automating, and synchronizing sales, marketing,
customer service, and technical support. It centralizes customer information, tracks interactions, and streamlines processes,
making it easier to build and maintain relationships.
For example, in a sales environment, I use CRM to track leads, manage opportunities, and monitor performance metrics. This not
only boosts productivity but also provides valuable insights into customer behavior and preferences. By leveraging CRM, we can
deliver personalized experiences, enhance customer satisfaction, and ultimately drive business growth, showcasing my ability to
harness technology for impactful results.

Read more: Guide to Salesforce Certifications in 2024

7. What are a few other software and apart from Salesforce providing CRM
software?
Answer:
Several other software providers offer CRM (Customer Relationship Management) solutions apart from Salesforce. Some of the
notable ones include:

1. Microsoft Dynamics 365: A comprehensive CRM solution that integrates seamlessly with other Microsoft
products, offering sales, customer service, and marketing automation.
2. HubSpot CRM: Known for its user-friendly interface and free CRM offering, HubSpot provides tools for
marketing, sales, and customer service.
3. Zoho CRM: Offers a wide range of features at competitive pricing, suitable for small to medium-sized businesses,
with modules for sales automation, marketing automation, and customer support.
4. SAP Customer Experience: Part of the SAP suite, this CRM focuses on providing a unified customer experience
across various channels and touchpoints.
5. Oracle CX: A robust CRM system from Oracle, offering sales, marketing, and service automation with strong
analytics and AI capabilities.
6. Pipedrive: A sales-focused CRM designed to help small and medium-sized businesses manage their sales
processes and pipelines effectively.
7. SugarCRM: Known for its flexibility and customization options, SugarCRM offers sales, marketing, and customer
support functionalities.
8. Salesforce Service Cloud: While part of the Salesforce suite, it specifically focuses on customer service and
support, providing robust tools for case management and customer interactions.
These CRM solutions cater to various business needs and sizes, offering different levels of functionality, customization, and
integration capabilities.

Read more: Salesforce Senior Business Analyst Interview Questions

8. How many times does Salesforce release updates every year?
Answer:
Salesforce releases updates three times a year. These updates, known as seasonal releases, are named after the seasons in
which they occur: Spring, Summer, and Winter. Each release brings new features, enhancements, and bug fixes, ensuring that the
platform remains current and continuously improves to meet the needs of its users.

For example:

 Spring Release typically occurs around February or March.

 Summer Release generally happens around June or July.
 Winter Release usually takes place around October or November.
These regular updates help keep Salesforce users equipped with the latest innovations and improvements, contributing to better
performance and expanded functionality of the platform.

9. What are different Salesforce Editions? Why are there so many editions?
Answer: Salesforce provides bundles of features and services, each geared toward specific business needs. These bundles,
called editions, share a look and feel but vary by functionality and pricing. For example, Custom fields allowed per object are
different in each edition. In the Enterprise edition, we can create up to 500 fields per object, while in the unlimited edition, we can
create 800. Salesforce comes in these editions: Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
Salesforce Admin Certification Chapter wise Questions
Chapter 1: Cloud Computing
The “Cloud Computing” section is a vital topic in the Salesforce Admin Certification, reflecting the importance of understanding the
cloud infrastructure that powers Salesforce. Mastery of cloud computing concepts is crucial for interview preparation, as
interviewers frequently assess candidates’ knowledge in this area. Utilizing resources like Trailhead can enhance your
understanding and readiness for any interview. In today’s tech-driven landscape, proficiency in cloud computing is indispensable for
any Salesforce professional.

1. What is Cloud Computing?

Answer: If you know earlier big companies used to maintain their servers which were providing the data storage and computing
resources which were very costly to maintain, moreover not necessarily each company was utilizing their servers to fullest or if they
wanted to expand the computing power it was not an easy task. Cloud computing is like the on-demand availability of computer
system resources, data storage, and computing power without being managed by the user utilizing them. And it’s effortless to
increase or decrease the resources you want for yourself. Example AWS.
2. Are virtualization and cloud computing the same thing?
Answer: No, they are not the same thing; in exact words, virtualization is the technology while cloud computing is a methodology.
To generate multiple simulated environments from a single piece of the underlying hardware. Cloud computing is a set of
approaches to deliver data storage, computation power, infrastructure, etc., to users on-demand across any network.
3. What is PaaS? Is Salesforce a PaaS or SaaS?
Answer: Platform as a service (PaaS) is a category of cloud computing services that allow customers to develop, run applications
without the complexity of building and maintaining the infrastructure typically associated with developing and launching the
application(s); Salesforce is both PaaS and SaaS, and it is SaaS as Salesforce provides you with a set of software offered in an on-
demand model. PaaS as Salesforce Lightning Platform’s built-in features and functionality take care of back-end concerns such as
security, infrastructure, and data integration to focus on building only apps rather than worrying about other things.

4. What is a public cloud?

Answer: Public Cloud – In simple terms, it’s a hosting solution where your data is stored in the provider’s data center. He is
accountable for maintaining and manage the data center and is being shared with other organizations. Salesforce is a public cloud.
Salesforce interview questions and answers PDF free download
Salesforce-Admin-Interview-Questions-and-Answers-PDFDownload
5. What is a private cloud?
Answer: Picture a cloud computing environment dedicated exclusively to your organization—that’s a private cloud. It offers the
flexibility and scalability of cloud services but with enhanced security and control. In my experience, private clouds are ideal for
businesses needing stringent data privacy and regulatory compliance. Unlike public clouds, where resources are shared among
multiple tenants, a private cloud’s infrastructure is solely for one organization.
This setup allows for customization of the hardware and software to meet specific needs. I’ve managed private cloud environments
where we could fine-tune performance and security settings, ensuring our sensitive data remained protected. This blend of control
and security makes private clouds a robust choice for critical business applications.

Chapter 2: Salesforce & CRM Basics

The “Salesforce & CRM Basics” section is foundational for any Salesforce Admin, covering essential concepts that are critical for
effective CRM management. Understanding these basics is key for interview preparation, as interviewers often probe this
knowledge to gauge your proficiency. Leveraging Trailhead for this topic can significantly boost your readiness for any Salesforce
interview. Mastery of Salesforce & CRM Basics ensures you can confidently manage and optimize CRM systems, a vital skill for
any admin.

6. What is CRM?
Answer: Think of a CRM (Customer Relationship Management) system as the nerve center for managing all your customer
interactions and data. In my experience, a CRM is essential for organizing, automating, and synchronizing sales, marketing,
customer service, and technical support. It centralizes customer information, tracks interactions, and streamlines processes,
making it easier to build and maintain relationships.
For example, in a sales environment, I use CRM to track leads, manage opportunities, and monitor performance metrics. This not
only boosts productivity but also provides valuable insights into customer behavior and preferences. By leveraging CRM, we can
deliver personalized experiences, enhance customer satisfaction, and ultimately drive business growth, showcasing my ability to
harness technology for impactful results.

Read more: Guide to Salesforce Certifications in 2024

7. What are a few other software and apart from Salesforce providing CRM
software?
Answer:
Several other software providers offer CRM (Customer Relationship Management) solutions apart from Salesforce. Some of the
notable ones include:

1. Microsoft Dynamics 365: A comprehensive CRM solution that integrates seamlessly with other Microsoft
products, offering sales, customer service, and marketing automation.
2. HubSpot CRM: Known for its user-friendly interface and free CRM offering, HubSpot provides tools for
marketing, sales, and customer service.
3. Zoho CRM: Offers a wide range of features at competitive pricing, suitable for small to medium-sized businesses,
with modules for sales automation, marketing automation, and customer support.
4. SAP Customer Experience: Part of the SAP suite, this CRM focuses on providing a unified customer experience
across various channels and touchpoints.
5. Oracle CX: A robust CRM system from Oracle, offering sales, marketing, and service automation with strong
analytics and AI capabilities.
6. Pipedrive: A sales-focused CRM designed to help small and medium-sized businesses manage their sales
processes and pipelines effectively.
7. SugarCRM: Known for its flexibility and customization options, SugarCRM offers sales, marketing, and customer
support functionalities.
8. Salesforce Service Cloud: While part of the Salesforce suite, it specifically focuses on customer service and
support, providing robust tools for case management and customer interactions.
These CRM solutions cater to various business needs and sizes, offering different levels of functionality, customization, and
integration capabilities.
Read more: Salesforce Senior Business Analyst Interview Questions
8. How many times does Salesforce release updates every year?
Answer:
Salesforce releases updates three times a year. These updates, known as seasonal releases, are named after the seasons in
which they occur: Spring, Summer, and Winter. Each release brings new features, enhancements, and bug fixes, ensuring that the
platform remains current and continuously improves to meet the needs of its users.

For example:

 Spring Release typically occurs around February or March.

 Summer Release generally happens around June or July.
 Winter Release usually takes place around October or November.
These regular updates help keep Salesforce users equipped with the latest innovations and improvements, contributing to better
performance and expanded functionality of the platform.

9. What are different Salesforce Editions? Why are there so many editions?
Answer: Salesforce provides bundles of features and services, each geared toward specific business needs. These bundles,
called editions, share a look and feel but vary by functionality and pricing. For example, Custom fields allowed per object are
different in each edition. In the Enterprise edition, we can create up to 500 fields per object, while in the unlimited edition, we can
create 800. Salesforce comes in these editions: Essentials, Professional, Enterprise, Unlimited, and Developer Editions.
Chapter 3: Force.com & Environments
The “Force.com & Environments” section is crucial for any Salesforce Admin, encompassing the platform’s architecture and various
environments used for development and testing. Understanding these concepts is vital for effective system management and
customization. Utilizing Trailhead can enhance your interview preparation, ensuring you are well-equipped for any Salesforce
interview. Mastery of Force.com & Environments enables you to efficiently manage and optimize the CRM platform, an essential
skill for any Salesforce admin.

10. What is the difference between Salesforce.com and Force.com?

Answer: Salesforce.com is built over Force.com only; force.com allows you to develop your custom applications, while
Salesforce.com is a set of pre-packaged solutions such as sales and service cloud. Salesforce.com is SaaS, while force.com is
PaaS.
11. What is Database.com?
Answer: Database.com is Salesforce’s primary enterprise that is built to store data on the cloud. It is a massive data storage
platform. Users can securely stash a vast number of records. Create transactions with speedy response times. Retrieve records for
developing apps.
12. What are the different types of sandboxes available in Salesforce, and what are
their uses?
Answer: There are four types of sandboxes in Salesforce, namely –
 Developer Sandbox – This is a basic sandbox-provided Salesforce with all the metadata from the production
environment, but no data copied over, and for development will use it.
 Developer Pro Sandbox – They are a better version of developer sandbox only; they come with more storage
than developer sandbox, but even here, only moving the production metadata.
  Partial Copy Sandbox – This type of sandbox not only allows you to copy metadata rather than some part of live
data as well. But this is also usually used as SIT environment where you can test your integration. Other functionality
with data similar to actual live data.
 Full Sandbox: This is a replica of the production environment, usually used to test functionalities and give user
training thoroughly.
13. What is work.com?
Answer: Work.com is a Salesforce product that targets employee engagement in three areas:
1) Alignment of the team and personal goals with business goals,
2) Motivation through public recognition, and
3) Real-time performance feedback.
4) Employees to meet goals through a system
Read more: Salesforce DML Interview Questions and Answers
Chapter 4: Data Modelling
The “Data Modelling” section is a fundamental topic for any Salesforce Admin, involving the structuring of data within the Salesforce
CRM. Proficiency in data modelling is crucial for organizing and optimizing data to meet business needs. Leveraging Trailhead for
this topic can significantly enhance your interview preparation, ensuring you are ready for any Salesforce interview. Mastery of data
modelling concepts is essential for any admin to effectively manage and maintain a robust CRM system.

14. What is the difference between Standard and Custom objects?

Answer:
Imagine you’re working with a toolbox: Standard objects are the pre-built tools provided by Salesforce, like Accounts, Contacts,
and Opportunities. They’re designed to cover common business needs right out of the box. On the other hand, Custom
objects are like bespoke tools you create yourself. They allow you to tailor the Salesforce environment to fit unique business
requirements that standard objects can’t address. For instance, I’ve built custom objects to track project milestones or inventory
levels specific to a client’s workflow. This flexibility ensures that Salesforce can adapt to any business model, enhancing its
functionality and effectiveness.
Code Example: Working with a Standard Object ( Account )
// Querying a Standard Object - Account
Account acc = [SELECT Id, Name FROM Account WHERE Name = 'Acme Corporation' LIMIT 1];

// Updating a field in the Account object

acc.Phone = '123-456-7890';
update acc;

Code Example: Working with a Custom Object ( Project__c )

// Creating a new record in a Custom Object - Project__c
Project__c project = new Project__c();
project.Name = 'New Website Development';
project.Status__c = 'In Progress';
insert project;

// Querying the Custom Object - Project__c

Project__c proj = [SELECT Id, Name, Status__c FROM Project__c WHERE Name = 'New Website Development' LIMIT 1];

15. What is an app in Salesforce?

Answer: An App in Salesforce is nothing but a container containing the app’s name, a logo, and a set of ordered tabs. Remember,
all the metadata, such as your objects, apex classes, triggers, etc., have nothing to do with an app. App just allows you to group all
the things that help you achieve a flow. For example, the Sales app(Standard application ) Contains a tab for the object that is part
of Sales flow like Account, Contact, Opportunity, Lead, Order, etc.
16. What are the different types of object relationships available in Salesforce?
Answer: Consider object relationships in Salesforce as the glue that binds data together. Lookup relationships create a loose
association between objects, allowing for flexibility without dependencies. Master-detail relationships establish a tight bond where
the child’s lifecycle is tied to the parent, enabling roll-up summary fields. For scenarios needing multiple connections, many-to-
many relationships come into play, using a junction object. Lastly, hierarchical relationships are specific to user objects,
structuring data in a management chain. These relationships are pivotal for data integrity and efficient organization, and my
expertise ensures they are implemented to maximize business insights and operational efficiency.
Read more: Salesforce Data Architect Interview Questions with Answers
17. Can we stop users from deleting the record using a validation rule?
Answer: No, we cannot stop users from deleting a record using a validation rule. Validation rules are triggered when records are
created or updated, but they do not run during record deletion. To prevent deletion, you would need to use other methods, such as
sharing rules, permissions, or Apex triggers.
Collections in Apex: Lists, Sets, and Maps
18. Is it possible to fire a validation rule only when a record is being inserted and
not being updated?
Answer: Yes, it is possible to fire a validation rule only when a record is being inserted. You can use the ISNEW() function in the
validation rule to achieve this. The ISNEW() function returns true if the record is being created and false if it is being updated.
19. Can we rollup summary field from Contact to Account?
Answer: No, we cannot roll up summary fields from Contact to Account because Contacts are not in a master-detail relationship
with Accounts. Contacts have a special relationship with Accounts that allows cascade delete, but they can also exist without an
Account.
20. Can a standard object be on the detail side of a relationship?
Answer: No, standard objects cannot be on the detail side of a master-detail relationship in Salesforce. They must be the master or
parent side in such relationships. Custom objects can be on the detail side, but standard objects must always be the master.
21. Can I convert a lookup relationship to master detail?
Answer: Yes, you can convert a lookup relationship to a master-detail relationship. However, you must ensure that there are no
existing records with null values for the lookup field. All detail records must have a parent record. Additionally, you need to have
“Read/Write” access to the detail records and “Read” access to the master records.
22. Can we convert the master-detail relationship to lookup?
Answer: Yes, you can convert a master-detail relationship to a lookup relationship. However, this is only possible if no roll-up
summary fields exist on the master object for the relationship. If roll-up summary fields are present, they must be deleted before
converting the relationship.
23. Can I use formula fields as filter criteria while defining rollup summaries fields?
Answer: Yes, you can use formula fields as filter criteria when defining rollup summary fields. The formula field values are
evaluated in the context of each child record, and the rollup summary field will aggregate data based on these evaluated values.
24. Does a change in rollup summary fields also fire trigger?
Ans: Yes, changes in rollup summary fields can fire triggers. Specifically, when a rollup summary field recalculates due to changes
in the related child records, it can trigger updates on the parent object, which in turn can fire the corresponding triggers on the
parent object.
What is Wrapper Class in Salesforce?
25. What is a schema builder?
Answer: Schema Builder is a tool in Salesforce that provides a dynamic environment to add new custom objects, fields, and
relationships to your schema. It allows you to view and modify your data model with a drag-and-drop interface, making it easier to
visualize and understand the relationships between objects.
Code Example: Creating a Custom Object Using Apex (Alternative to Using Schema
Builder)
While Schema Builder provides a visual way to create and manage objects, you can also create custom objects programmatically
using Apex. Below is a code example of how to create a custom object using Apex:
// Apex code to create a custom object called 'Project'
public class CreateCustomObject {

public void createProjectObject() {

// Define the metadata for the custom object
MetadataService.CustomObject projectObj = new MetadataService.CustomObject();
projectObj.fullName = 'Project__c'; // Object API Name
projectObj.label = 'Project'; // Object Label
projectObj.pluralLabel = 'Projects';
projectObj.nameField = new MetadataService.CustomField();
projectObj.nameField.label = 'Project Name';
projectObj.nameField.type_x = 'Text';
projectObj.nameField.length = 80;
projectObj.deploymentStatus = 'Deployed';
projectObj.sharingModel = 'ReadWrite';

// Create the custom object

MetadataService.MetadataServiceClient client = new MetadataService.MetadataServiceClient();
MetadataService.SaveResult[] results = client.createMetadata(new MetadataService.Metadata[] { projectObj });

// Check if the object was created successfully

if (results[0].success) {
System.debug('Successfully created the Project object.');
} else {
System.debug('Failed to create the Project object: ' + results[0].errors[0].message);
}
}
}

Schema Builder: Allows you to visually create and manage objects, fields, and relationships within Salesforce. It’s useful for
admins and developers who prefer a visual interface over writing code.
Apex Code Example: This code snippet demonstrates how to create a custom object named Project__c using Apex. The object is
defined with a label, a name field, and its sharing model. The MetadataService is used to handle the creation of the object
programmatically.
26. Can you change the value formula field on the record?
Answer: No, you cannot change the value of a formula field on a record directly. Formula fields are read-only and their values are
automatically calculated based on the defined formula. To change the value displayed in a formula field, you need to modify the
fields that the formula references.
What is Salesforce Batch Apex?
27. What is a dependent picklist?
Answer: A dependent picklist is a type of picklist in Salesforce that allows you to filter its values based on the value selected in
another controlling picklist or checkbox field. This creates a relationship where the value of the dependent picklist changes
dynamically based on the selected value of the controlling field, enhancing data consistency and user experience.
28. What fields can be made dependent?
Answer: In Salesforce, picklist fields (both standard and custom) and custom checkbox fields can be made dependent fields.
Dependent fields have their values filtered based on the value of a controlling field.
Read more: Important Salesforce Experience Cloud Interview Questions
29. What is the difference between ISNULL and ISBLANK?
Answer: ISBLANK has the same functionality as ISNULL but also supports text fields as text fields are never null; hence using
ISNULL on text fields would always return false while is blank returns T or F depending on if the field is empty or not.
 ISNULL : This function checks if a field is null (empty). It can be used with number, currency, and date fields. It
returns true if the field is null.
 ISBLANK : This function checks if a field is empty or contains only spaces. It can be used with text fields. For text
fields, ISNULL will not work as expected, but ISBLANK can be used instead. It returns true if the field is empty.
In most recent Salesforce versions, ISBLANK is preferred over ISNULL because it covers more use cases.
30. Can we convert formula fields into any other data type?
Answer: No, formula fields cannot be directly converted into other data types. If you need to change a formula field to another data
type, you must create a new field with the desired data type and then populate it with the required values, potentially using a data
migration or update process.
31. Can we mark standard fields as dependent fields?
Answer: No, standard fields cannot be marked as dependent fields. Only custom picklist fields and custom checkbox fields can be
marked as dependent fields in Salesforce.
32. Can we define checkbox and multi-select fields as controlling fields?
Answer: No, we can’t define multi-select as the controlling field, but we can define the checkbox as the controlling field.
Chapter 5: UI Customization
The “UI Customization” section is pivotal for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on tailoring the Salesforce interface to improve user
experience and efficiency. Proficiency in UI customization ensures that the CRM system meets the specific needs of its users.
Utilizing Trailhead for this topic can significantly boost your interview preparation, equipping you for any Salesforce interview.

33. What is the page layout in Salesforce?

Answer: Page layouts control the layout and organization of buttons, fields, related lists on object record pages, and custom links.
Use them to customize the content of record pages visible to your users. Page layout determines which fields are visible, read-only,
and required.
34. Can we have multiple page layouts defined for the same record type?
Answer: Yes, you can have multiple page layouts defined for the same record type and assign them to different profiles to
customize the user experience.
Accenture Salesforce Developer Interview Questions
35. What are compact layouts?
Answer: Compact layouts in Salesforce are a way to display a record’s key fields at a glance. They determine which fields appear
in the highlights panel of a record page and in the record’s detail view in the Salesforce mobile app. Compact layouts help users
quickly find important information without having to navigate through the entire record.
36. Have you seen the master record type on an object? What do you understand
about it?
Answer: Yes, an object has no custom record types defined. The admin can see a master record type which is just a placeholder,
for example, while assigning page layouts, etc.
Note: Master record type does not have record type id associated with it. Moreover, once a custom record type is defined, the
master record type is no more available.

37. What is the search layout, and how do we see it?

Answer:
Search layouts in Salesforce determine which fields are displayed in various search results, lookup dialogs, list views, and related
lists on record detail pages. They help users quickly identify and select records based on the fields most relevant to them.

To view or modify search layouts:

1. Go to Setup.
2. Enter the name of the object in the Quick Find box and select the object.
3. In the object management settings, click on Search Layouts.
4. You can then customize the different search layouts for the object, such as search results, lookup dialogs, and list
views.
Important Salesforce Experience Cloud Interview Questions
38. What are object-specific actions?
Answer:
Object-specific actions in Salesforce are actions that are directly related to a particular object. These actions allow users to create
records, update records, log calls, send emails, or perform other custom actions directly from a record page.

Object-specific actions include:

 Create a Record: Allows users to create a new record that is automatically linked to the current record.
 Log a Call: Lets users log call details related to the current record.
 Update a Record: Enables users to update the current record with specific fields.
 Send Email: Allows users to send an email from the current record.
 Custom Actions: Custom actions can be created using Visualforce, Lightning components, or Flow.
Object-specific actions are typically added to page layouts, allowing users to access them from the record pages.

39. Can you call an LWC component from quick action?

Answer:
Yes, you can call a Lightning Web Component (LWC) from a quick action in Salesforce. This is done by embedding the LWC in an
Aura component and then using that Aura component in a quick action. Here’s a step-by-step outline of how to achieve this:

Create the LWC Component: First, create the LWC component that you want to use in the quick action. For example, let’s create
a simple LWC called myLwcComponent .
// myLwcComponent.js
import { LightningElement, api } from 'lwc';

export default class MyLwcComponent extends LightningElement {

@api recordId; // to receive the recordId from the Aura component
}
<!-- myLwcComponent.html -->
<template>
<div>
<!-- Your LWC HTML and JavaScript logic here -->
Record Id: {recordId}
</div>
</template>

Create an Aura Component to Wrap the LWC: Next, create an Aura component that wraps the LWC component. This Aura
component will be used in the quick action.
<!-- myLwcQuickAction.cmp -->
<aura:component implements="force:lightningQuickActionWithoutHeader,force:hasRecordId" access="global">
<aura:attribute name="recordId" type="String" />
<c:myLwcComponent recordId="{!v.recordId}" />
</aura:component>
<!-- myLwcQuickActionController.js -->
({
// Controller logic if needed
})
<!-- myLwcQuickActionHelper.js -->
({
// Helper logic if needed
})
<!-- myLwcQuickActionRenderer.js -->
({
// Renderer logic if needed
})

Create a Quick Action: Now, create a quick action in the object where you want to use the LWC. Go to the object manager, select
the object, and then create a new quick action.
 Action Type: Lightning Component
 Lightning Component: Select the Aura component c:myLwcQuickAction
Add the Quick Action to the Page Layout: Finally, add the quick action to the page layout where you want it to be available.
40. Can you call flows from object-specific actions and global actions?
Answer: Yes, you can call flows from both object-specific actions and global actions in Salesforce. When creating an action, you
can select a flow as the action type. This allows users to launch flows directly from record pages (for object-specific actions) or from
the global actions menu (for global actions).
Read more: Salesforce Advanced Admin Interview Questions and Answers
41. What are global actions, and how are they different from object-specific
actions?
Answer:
Global actions in Salesforce are actions that are not tied to a specific object and can be accessed from various locations in
Salesforce, such as the global actions menu in the Salesforce app, the Chatter feed, or the Home page.

Differences between global actions and object-specific actions:

 Global Actions:
 Can be accessed from anywhere in Salesforce, not tied to any particular object.
 Can create records, log calls, send emails, and more, independent of a specific record context.
 Examples: Create a new task, log a call, send an email, create a custom action.
 Object-Specific Actions:
 Are tied to a specific object and can be accessed from the record pages of that object.
 Can create related records, update the current record, log calls, and send emails within the context of
the current record.
 Examples: Create a new contact related to an account, log a call on an opportunity, update a case.
42. Are the custom actions also available in Salesforce 1 automatically?
Answer: Yes, custom actions are available in Salesforce1 (the Salesforce mobile app) automatically. When you create custom
actions, they appear in the mobile app in the same way they do in the desktop interface, allowing users to access and use these
actions on the go. This ensures a consistent user experience across different devices and platforms.
Chapter 6: Data Management
The “Data Management” section is critical for any Salesforce Admin, encompassing the strategies and tools used to maintain data
integrity and accuracy within the Salesforce CRM. Understanding data management is vital for any job interview, as it directly
impacts business operations and decision-making. To prepare for these questions, utilize Trailhead for hands-on experience and
comprehensive learning. Mastery of data management ensures that you can efficiently handle data tasks, a key competency for
any Salesforce admin interview.

43. What is the difference between 15 digit and 18 digit record ID?
Answer:
In Salesforce, every record has a unique identifier called a record ID. There are two formats for these record IDs:

 15-Digit Record ID: This is the case-sensitive version of the record ID. It is used primarily in the Salesforce user
interface and is what you see in the URL when viewing a record.
 18-Digit Record ID: This is the case-insensitive version of the record ID, often used for API interactions and
integrations. The 18-digit ID is created by appending a three-character checksum to the 15-digit ID, which helps systems
that do not support case sensitivity to distinguish between different records.
44. How can we convert a 15 digit record ID to 18 digits and vice versa in the
formula field?
Answer:
Converting a 15-digit record ID to an 18-digit record ID in a formula field is not natively supported by Salesforce formula fields due
to their complexity. However, you can achieve this conversion using Apex code or external tools.
For instance, in Apex, you can use the following code to convert a 15-digit ID to an 18-digit ID:
public static String convertTo18DigitId(String id) {
String suffix = '';
String[] chunks = new String[3];

for (Integer i = 0; i < 3; i++) {

String chunk = id.substring(i * 5, (i * 5) + 5);
chunks[i] = chunk;
}

for (String chunk : chunks) {

Integer flag = 0;
for (Integer i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
String c = chunk.substring(i, i + 1);
if (c >= 'A' && c <= 'Z') {
flag += (1 << i);
}
}
suffix += 'ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ012345'.substring(flag, flag + 1);
}

return id + suffix;
}

Converting an 18-digit ID back to a 15-digit ID simply involves truncating the last three characters:
public static String convertTo15DigitId(String id) {
return id.substring(0, 15);
}

45. What is an external ID?

Answer:
An external ID in Salesforce is a custom field that contains unique record identifiers from a system outside of Salesforce. It is used
to match and integrate records between Salesforce and other systems, facilitating data import, export, and synchronization.
Characteristics of External IDs:
 They must be unique and indexed for performance.
 They can be used in upsert operations to insert new records or update existing records based on the external ID.
 They help in data migration and integration processes by maintaining data consistency between systems.
You can designate custom fields as external IDs by selecting the “External ID” checkbox when creating or editing the field.

If you have more questions or need further details, feel free to ask!

Accenture Salesforce Marketing Cloud interview Questions

46. Can we have the same external Id on multiple records?
Answer: In Salesforce, an external ID is used to uniquely identify records from an external system within Salesforce. By design,
external IDs are intended to be unique to ensure proper data mapping and integrity during integration processes. Therefore, having
the same external ID on multiple records would defeat this purpose and lead to data inconsistencies. Salesforce enforces
uniqueness for external IDs at the database level, meaning you cannot have duplicate external ID values across different records
within the same object. This ensures that operations like upserts, which rely on external IDs to either insert or update records,
function correctly without ambiguity.
47. What are unique fields?
Answer: Unique fields in Salesforce are custom fields that have the “Unique” attribute enabled, ensuring that no two records can
have the same value in this field. This is crucial for maintaining data integrity and avoiding duplicate records within an object. When
a field is marked as unique, Salesforce enforces this uniqueness constraint both at the database level and within the user interface,
preventing users and integrations from creating or updating records with duplicate values in that field.
This feature is particularly useful for fields like email addresses, account numbers, or any identifier that must remain unique across
the dataset. Understanding and correctly implementing unique fields is essential for Salesforce administrators, and it is a common
topic in Salesforce admin exam guides and interviews. Questions in these contexts often explore scenarios where unique fields are
beneficial, the implications of using them, and the technical specifics of how Salesforce enforces uniqueness.

48. What is the use of the action “Export All” in the data loader?
Answer: The “Export All” action in Salesforce’s Data Loader tool is a powerful feature that allows users to export all records from a
specific object, including those in the Recycle Bin. Unlike the standard “Export” action, which only retrieves active records, “Export
All” fetches both active and deleted records. This is particularly useful for data recovery, auditing, and historical data analysis, as it
ensures that no data is left behind, even if it has been marked for deletion. The Data Loader generates CSV files containing the
exported data, which can then be used for various purposes such as backups, migrations, or integrations with other systems. Using
“Export All” is a critical capability for administrators and developers who need comprehensive access to their Salesforce data,
ensuring that all information is accounted for during data management tasks.
Chapter 7: Data Security
The “Data Security” section is essential for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on protecting sensitive information within the Salesforce
CRM. This topic includes user permissions, field-level security, and data sharing settings. Understanding data security is crucial in
any job interview, as it ensures the protection of business data and compliance with regulations. To prepare for these questions,
utilize Trailhead for in-depth learning and practical experience, enhancing your interview preparation and demonstrating your
expertise as a Salesforce admin.

49. What is OWD?

Answer: OWD stands for “Organization-Wide Defaults” in Salesforce. It is a fundamental component of Salesforce’s security model
that sets the baseline level of access to records for all users across the organization. OWD defines the default sharing settings for
an object and determines the level of access (Private, Public Read Only, Public Read/Write) that users have to records they do not
own. These settings are crucial for controlling data visibility and ensuring that sensitive information is only accessible to authorized
users. By establishing the default access levels, OWD helps organizations maintain data security while still allowing flexibility
through additional sharing rules and role hierarchy settings to grant more specific access where needed.
Read about A Comprehensive Guide to Organization-Wide Defaults (OWD).
50. Can we disable access via role hierarchy?
Answer: Yes, it is possible to disable access via the role hierarchy in Salesforce. By default, the role hierarchy in Salesforce allows
users higher up in the hierarchy to access all records owned by users below them. However, for certain custom objects,
administrators have the option to disable this default access. This is done by unchecking the “Grant Access Using Hierarchies”
checkbox in the object’s sharing settings. Disabling this option ensures that access to records is strictly controlled by the object’s
sharing settings and other sharing mechanisms, such as sharing rules or manual sharing, without being influenced by the role
hierarchy.
51. What is a public group?
Answer:
Imagine needing a way to efficiently manage access for a dynamic set of users—that’s where a public group in Salesforce excels.
Public groups are collections of users, roles, and other groups that simplify permission management and sharing rules. In practice,
I’ve used public groups to streamline the sharing of records and collaboration across different departments. For example, if I need
to grant read-only access to specific reports for the marketing and sales teams, I create a public group including both teams and
apply the sharing rule once. This not only enhances security but also ensures consistency and efficiency in managing user access.
My experience with public groups allows me to optimize user permissions, ensuring seamless and secure collaboration within the
organization.
52. What is the difference between a public group and a Queue?
Answer:
A public group in Salesforce is a collection of users, roles, and other groups that can be used to simplify the process of managing
sharing rules, folder access, and record visibility. Public groups are versatile and can be used across different objects and for
various purposes, such as setting up sharing rules or managing access to dashboards and reports.
A queue, on the other hand, is specific to certain objects and is used to manage the distribution of workload among a group of
users. Queues are commonly used for objects like Cases, Leads, and custom objects that require team-based ownership and
assignment. When records are placed in a queue, they are not owned by a specific user but can be taken up by any member of the
queue. This is particularly useful for managing tasks or records that need to be addressed by any available team member, ensuring
efficient handling of high-volume work.

53. Who can manually share the record?

Answer: In Salesforce, manual sharing of records allows users to grant access to specific records to other users who would not
otherwise have access. The ability to manually share a record typically depends on the user’s permissions and the record
ownership. Generally, the owner of the record, users above the record owner in the role hierarchy, and administrators can manually
share records. Additionally, users with “Full Access” or “Modify All Data” permissions on the object can also share records
manually. This feature is particularly useful for granting temporary or specific access to records without changing the overall sharing
settings or role hierarchy.
54. When is the button to share the record manually available?
The button to share the record manually in Salesforce is available when the organization’s sharing model for the object is set to
Private or Public Read Only. This means that if the default access level for the object restricts access to only the record owner and
their superiors in the role hierarchy, the manual sharing button will appear to allow users to share the record with others.
Additionally, the user attempting to share the record must have sufficient permissions, such as being the record owner, being above
the owner in the role hierarchy, or having the “Full Access” permission on the record.

55. Can we create a user without a role and profile?

Answer: No, in Salesforce, a user must have a profile assigned to them at the time of creation. The profile determines the user’s
permissions, access settings, and other configuration settings, making it a mandatory component of a user’s configuration. While
roles are optional and primarily used for sharing and visibility purposes, a profile is essential for defining what a user can do within
the Salesforce environment. Therefore, it is not possible to create a user without assigning them a profile, although creating a user
without a role is permissible.
56. How is the access of detail objects in the case of master relationship
controlled?
Answer: OWD of the child is controlled by the parent, and the parent object’s access to the detail object is controlled only; while
defining the relationship, you select either option to define the access. If a user has minimum read access on the parent record,
they can edit the child record. They can edit the child record, If the user has edit access on the parent record only. Remember,
users also need to have access at the profile level to edit the object.
57. What is public read-write transfer available on specific objects in OWD?
Answer: In Salesforce, the “Public Read/Write/Transfer” setting in the Organization-Wide Defaults (OWD) is an access level
available for certain objects, such as Cases and Leads. This setting allows all users within the organization to not only read and
write (edit) records of the object but also transfer ownership of these records to other users. This level of access is useful in
scenarios where collaboration and flexibility in managing records are essential, such as in a customer support environment where
cases might need to be reassigned frequently to different support agents.
Read more: Salesforce Business Analyst Interview Questions
58. What will happen to child records if we delete a parent record in Lookup
Relationship?
Answer: In a Lookup Relationship in Salesforce, the behavior of child records when a parent record is deleted depends on the
configuration of the lookup field. By default, deleting a parent record does not delete the related child records; instead, the lookup
field on the child records is cleared (set to null). This means the child records remain in the database but lose their association with
the parent record. However, if the lookup relationship is defined with the option to enforce a cascade delete, deleting the parent
record will also result in the deletion of the related child records. This cascading delete behavior must be explicitly set up in the
relationship definition and is not the default behavior for lookup relationships.
59. What will happen to child records if we delete a parent record in case of a
Master-Detail Relationship?
Answer: In a Master-Detail Relationship in Salesforce, the child records (detail records) are directly tied to the parent record
(master record). When a parent record is deleted, all of its associated child records are automatically deleted as well. This
cascading delete behavior ensures that the integrity of the relationship is maintained and that there are no orphaned child records
left in the system. This feature underscores the tight coupling and dependency between the parent and child records in a Master-
Detail Relationship.
Read more: Lead Assignment Rules in Salesforce
60. If we restore the master record, does it also restore the detail records?
Answer: Yes, if a master record is restored from the Recycle Bin in Salesforce, its associated detail records are also restored. This
restoration process ensures that the Master-Detail Relationship and the hierarchical data structure are preserved. Both the master
record and its detail records are reinstated to their previous state before deletion, allowing the user to continue working with the
data as it was.
61. What is “View all” and “Modify All” permission?
Answer: View all and modify all fields trump everything in the system, i.e., irrespective of OWD, what sharing rules are set up in
system user with this permission will be able to see or edit all the records present in the system for a particular object. It gives a
user the ability to mass update, mass transfer, and mass delete records.
62. What will happen if a field is hidden through Field level security and the user
searches for values in that field?
Answer: Field-level security doesn’t prevent users from searching on the values in a field. When search terms match field values
protected by field-level security, the associated records are returned without the protected fields and their values in the search
results.
63. Can we restrict permissions using a permission set?
Answer: No, permission sets in Salesforce are used to grant additional permissions to users, not to restrict them. While profiles
define the baseline level of access for users, permission sets are designed to extend these permissions to meet specific
requirements or grant temporary access. If you need to restrict permissions, you must do so at the profile level or through other
security controls, such as sharing settings and role hierarchies.
64. If a user doesn’t have access to a record type, can they still see the records of
that record type?
Answer: Yes, they will be able to see it; they just won’t be able to create records of that particular record type.
65. Can we restrict users logging in from unauthorized IP addresses?
Answer: Yes, Salesforce allows administrators to restrict users from logging in from unauthorized IP addresses by setting IP
address restrictions. These restrictions can be configured at the profile level or the organization level. At the profile level, you can
define a range of IP addresses that users assigned to that profile are allowed to log in from. If a user attempts to log in from an IP
address outside of this range, they will be denied access. At the organization level, trusted IP ranges can be set to specify which IP
addresses are considered safe for login without additional verification. This feature helps enhance security by ensuring that users
can only access Salesforce from approved locations.
66. What is the difference between defining IP ranges in network access and on
profile?
Answer: IP ranges that we define in-network access. Just tell us a list of secure IPs that don’t require any login challenges, like
receiving an OTP, while IP ranges are defined on the profile. It will restrict the user from logging in other IPs other than described
on the profile.
67. Can we restrict the login of users based on time?
Answer: Yes, Salesforce allows administrators to restrict the login of users based on time. This can be done by setting login hours
at the profile level. By defining specific login hours for a profile, you can control the times during which users with that profile are
allowed to access Salesforce. If users attempt to log in outside of the specified hours, they will be denied access. This feature is
particularly useful for enforcing working hours and enhancing security by preventing unauthorized access during off-hours.
68. Can we force users to set up a complex password while setting users in
Salesforce?
Answer: Yes, Salesforce provides the ability to enforce complex password requirements to enhance security. Administrators can
configure password policies to require users to set up complex passwords that include a mix of uppercase and lowercase letters,
numbers, and special characters. Additionally, password policies can enforce minimum password length, expiration periods,
password history to prevent reuse, and other criteria that contribute to password complexity. These settings ensure that users
create strong, secure passwords when setting up their accounts or changing their passwords.
Chapter 8: Queues
The “Queues” section is a vital topic for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on the management and assignment of records within the
Salesforce CRM. This includes understanding how to set up and configure queues, manage queue members, and automate record
assignment. Proficiency in queues is important in any job interview, as it demonstrates your ability to streamline workflows and
improve efficiency. To prepare for these questions, leverage Trailhead for practical exercises and comprehensive learning,
ensuring thorough interview preparation and showcasing your expertise in Salesforce & CRM Basics.

69. Are all objects supported by Queues?

Answer:
Think of queues in Salesforce as a way to manage and prioritize workloads among a group of users. While they are incredibly
useful, not all objects support queues. Typically, standard objects like Cases, Leads, and Custom objects can be placed in
queues, allowing teams to collectively work on incoming items and distribute tasks efficiently. However, certain objects, such as
Accounts and Opportunities, don’t support this feature.
In my experience, utilizing queues for supported objects has streamlined our workflow significantly. For instance, when managing
incoming leads, I set up a queue to ensure that leads are evenly distributed among the sales team, enhancing response times and
productivity. Understanding which objects support queues helps me optimize Salesforce for better team collaboration and task
management. My hands-on expertise in leveraging queues ensures efficient task handling and improved operational efficiency.

Salesforce Business Analyst Interview Questions

70. Who all can be part of Queue?
Answer:
Imagine setting up a system where tasks can be efficiently distributed to the right people—that’s where Salesforce queues come
into play. A queue can include users, roles, and even public groups. In my experience, this flexibility allows for efficient
management of workloads. For example, I often set up queues that include specific users for specialized tasks, such as lead
qualification, ensuring that leads are handled by experienced personnel.
In addition, incorporating roles into queues allows me to ensure that tasks are available to all individuals in a specific position, such
as all customer support agents. Adding public groups enhances collaboration by including cross-functional teams when necessary.
This comprehensive approach ensures that tasks are visible to the right people, improving efficiency and response times. My
expertise in configuring queues ensures that tasks are managed effectively, driving productivity and teamwork.

71. Can a queue be part of another queue?

Answer: No, a queue cannot be part of another queue in Salesforce. Queues in Salesforce are designed to hold a set of records
that need to be worked on by a group of users. Each queue is independent and cannot be nested within another queue. However,
multiple users, roles, and public groups can be members of a queue, enabling collaborative work on records assigned to that
queue.
Read more: Salesforce CPQ Interview Questions and Expert Answers
72. What is the use of Queues?
Answer: Queues in Salesforce are used to prioritize, distribute, assign and share the workload among the team members sharing
the workload. Queues in Salesforce are used to prioritize, distribute, and assign records to teams who share workloads. They are
beneficial for managing:
 Workloads among a group of users.
 Unassigned records that need to be worked on.
 Enhancing collaboration and efficiency by allowing group members to claim records from the queue.
Chapter 9: Process Automation
The “Process Automation” section is crucial for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on automating business processes within the
Salesforce CRM. This includes topics like Workflow Rules, Process Builder, and Flow. Understanding process automation is
important in any job interview, as it demonstrates your ability to streamline operations and enhance productivity. To prepare for
these questions, utilize Trailhead for hands-on experience and in-depth learning, ensuring comprehensive interview preparation
and showcasing your expertise in Salesforce & CRM Basics.

73. Can we update a child record using workflows?

Answer: No, standard Salesforce workflows cannot directly update child records. Workflows can only perform actions on the record
that triggered the workflow. To update child records based on changes to a parent record, you would need to use other tools, such
as Process Builder, Flow, or Apex triggers. These tools offer more advanced capabilities and can be configured to perform actions
on related records, including updating child records when a parent record is modified. Process Builder and Flow provide a more
declarative approach, while Apex triggers offer a programmatic solution for complex scenarios.
74. What all can be done using a workflow?
Answer: We have to answer this interview question in realistic approach as follows.
Imagine having a tool that automates routine tasks and streamlines processes—workflows in Salesforce do exactly that. With
workflows, I can automate field updates, ensuring that important data stays current without manual intervention. For instance, if
an opportunity’s stage changes to “Closed Won,” I can automatically update the account status to “Customer.”
I also use workflows to send email alerts. This keeps the team informed of critical changes, like when a high-value lead comes in
or when a case is escalated. Additionally, workflows can create task assignments, automatically delegating follow-up actions to
the right team members.
Workflows also support outbound messages to external systems, integrating Salesforce with other platforms. This automation
enhances efficiency, reduces errors, and ensures that critical tasks are never overlooked. My hands-on experience with workflows
ensures that processes are smooth, efficient, and reliable, making me a valuable asset for optimizing business operations.
75. Can we create assignment rules on all objects?
Answer: No, assignment rules in Salesforce cannot be created on all objects. They are specifically available for Lead and Case
objects. Assignment rules allow you to automatically assign leads and cases to specific users or queues based on criteria that you
define. This helps in managing and routing these records efficiently to the appropriate team members.
76. When I can’t create time-based workflow action in workflow?
Answer: When the workflow is executed, created, and every time it’s edited.
77. Can we see all the time-dependent workflow actions that are lined up to be
executed?
Answer: Yes, we can monitor all the pending automation related to time-dependent workflows in the “Time-based Workflow” option
in setup.
78. Do time-dependent workflow actions fire even when the record criteria that
initiated the action no longer hold?
Answer: No, time-dependent workflow actions do not fire if the record no longer meets the criteria that initiated the action.
Salesforce continuously monitors the criteria for time-dependent workflow actions. If a record no longer meets the criteria at the
scheduled time, the action is not executed. This ensures that workflow actions are only performed when the specified conditions
are still valid.
79. Can we remove pending time-based actions?
Answer:
Yes, you can remove pending time-based actions in Salesforce. Time-based workflow actions are actions that are scheduled to
execute at a specified time after a record meets certain criteria. If you need to cancel these pending actions, you can do so by
following these steps:

Using the Time-Based Workflow Queue:

1. Go to Setup: In Salesforce, navigate to the Setup menu.

2. Enter “Time-Based Workflow” in Quick Find: In the Quick Find box, type “Time-Based Workflow” and
select Time-Based Workflow.
3. View the Queue: You’ll see a list of all pending time-based actions. These actions are grouped by object and
time trigger.
4. Filter the Actions: You can filter the list to find specific actions. For example, you can filter by the object type or
by the scheduled date.
5. Select and Remove Actions: Once you locate the specific actions you want to cancel, you can select them and
click the “Remove” button to cancel the pending time-based actions.
80. Can an object have multiple approval processes defined for it?
Answer:
Yes, an object in Salesforce can have multiple approval processes defined for it. This allows organizations to create different
approval workflows for various business scenarios or criteria within the same object. Each approval process can have its own
unique set of steps, criteria, and approvers, enabling more granular control over the approval workflow.
For example, a “Purchase Order” object could have separate approval processes for small purchases and large purchases, each
with different criteria and approvers. When submitting a record for approval, users can choose which approval process to initiate
based on the specific requirements of the record.

Having multiple approval processes provides flexibility and ensures that different types of records or business situations can be
handled appropriately, improving efficiency and compliance with organizational policies.

Rad more: Accenture Salesforce Marketing Cloud interview Questions

81. Can I create an approval process where a set of users receive approval
notification, i.e., even if any one of the users rejects or approves records get
approved or rejected.
Answer:
Yes, you can create an approval process in Salesforce where a set of users receive an approval notification, and the record gets
approved or rejected based on the action of any one of the users. This can be achieved using the “Unanimous Approval” or
“Parallel Approval” process.

Steps to Create Such an Approval Process:

1. Go to Setup: In Salesforce, navigate to Setup.

2. Search for Approval Processes: Enter “Approval Processes” in the Quick Find box and select it under Process
Automation.
3. Select the Object: Choose the object for which you want to create the approval process.
4. Create New Approval Process: Click on “Create New Approval Process” and select “Use Standard Setup
Wizard” or “Use Jump Start Wizard.”
82. Can I submit a record for the approval process without actually having to click
on the “Submit for approval” button?
Answer:
Yes, you can submit a record for the approval process without actually having to click on the “Submit for Approval” button. This can
be achieved using Process Builder, Flow, or Apex triggers in Salesforce.
Using Process Builder:

1. Create a Process: Go to Setup, search for Process Builder, and create a new process.
2. Define the Criteria: Set the criteria that determine when the record should be submitted for approval.
3. Add an Action: Choose “Submit for Approval” as the action.
4. Specify Approval Process: Select the appropriate approval process to submit the record to.
Using Flow:

1. Create a Flow: Go to Setup, search for Flow, and create a new flow.
2. Add Elements: Use elements such as “Get Records” to find the record and “Submit for Approval” to submit it.
3. Define the Trigger: Set when the flow should be triggered (e.g., record creation or update).
4. Activate the Flow: Ensure the flow is activated and properly linked to the triggering event.
Using Apex Triggers:

1. Write Apex Code: Create an Apex trigger on the object you want to submit for approval.
2. Define the Logic: Write the logic to submit the record for approval based on specific conditions.
3. Deploy the Trigger: Deploy the trigger to your Salesforce organization.
Example Apex Trigger:

trigger SubmitForApproval on YourObject (after insert, after update) {

 for (YourObject record : Trigger.new) {
if (/* your condition */) {
Approval.ProcessSubmitRequest req = new Approval.ProcessSubmitRequest();
req.setComments('Submitted for approval automatically');
req.setObjectId(record.Id);
Approval.ProcessResult result = Approval.process(req);
}
}
}

By using any of these methods, you can automate the submission of records for approval, bypassing the need for manual clicks on
the “Submit for Approval” button.

83. Assume we have created multiple field updates and email alerts used in
workflow rules. Now I want to do the same field updates and send the exact emails
via the approval process. Can I re-utilize the same field updates and email alerts in
the approval process, or do I need to create a new one here?
Answer: Yes, you can re-utilize the same field updates and email alerts from workflow rules in the approval process. Salesforce
allows you to use the existing field updates and email alerts across different automation processes, including both workflow rules
and approval processes.
When setting up an approval process, you can select previously created email alerts and field updates rather than creating new
ones. This helps maintain consistency and efficiency, as you don’t need to duplicate efforts. You can simply add these actions to
the appropriate approval steps within your approval process.
For instance:

 While defining actions for the initial submission, approval, or rejection steps in the approval process, you can
choose from the existing field updates and email alerts created under workflow rules.
This reuse of automation elements ensures streamlined management of workflows and approvals in Salesforce, reducing
redundancy and improving maintainability.

Chapter 10: Reports & Dashboards

The “Reports & Dashboards” section is essential for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on creating and managing insightful reports
and dashboards within the Salesforce CRM. This includes topics like report types, filters, chart creation, and dashboard
components. Understanding reports and dashboards is crucial in any job interview, as it showcases your ability to provide valuable
business insights. To prepare for these questions, utilize Trailhead for practical exercises and comprehensive learning, ensuring
thorough interview preparation and demonstrating your expertise in Salesforce & CRM Basics.

84. What are the different formats of reports available in Salesforce?

Answer:
Think of Salesforce reports as the key to unlocking powerful insights from your data. Salesforce offers four primary report
formats: Tabular, Summary, Matrix, and Joined.
Tabular reports are the simplest, displaying data in rows and columns. I use these when I need a straightforward list, like a roster
of all active leads.
Summary reports allow grouping by rows, providing subtotals and aggregations. They’re perfect for sales pipelines, where I group
opportunities by stage to see total deal values.
Matrix reports enable grouping by both rows and columns, ideal for comparing related data. For example, I analyze sales
performance across regions and products simultaneously with matrix reports.
Joined reports combine multiple reports into a single view, allowing complex comparisons and comprehensive insights. I often use
joined reports to compare performance metrics across different departments.
My ability to leverage these formats ensures I can provide precise, actionable insights tailored to any business need, making me a
strong asset for data-driven decision-making.

85. What all reports are supported on the dashboard?

Answer:
Salesforce dashboards support various types of reports to provide a comprehensive view of your organization’s data.
The reports that can be included on a dashboard are:

1. Tabular Reports: These are simple lists of data without any grouping. They are best used for tasks like exporting
data or creating lists.
2. Summary Reports: These reports allow you to group data by rows and provide subtotals. They are ideal for
showing data trends over time or by specific criteria.
3. Matrix Reports: These reports allow grouping by both rows and columns, providing a detailed view of data
across two dimensions. They are useful for comparison of related totals.
4. Joined Reports: These reports combine multiple reports into a single view, allowing for more complex data
analysis and comparison from different perspectives.
Each of these report types can be used to create different dashboard components, such as charts, gauges, tables, metrics, and
visualforce pages, offering a versatile and powerful way to visualize and analyze your Salesforce data.

85. Are newly created fields automatically included in your custom report types?
Answer: Yes, if you tick mark the option to include it in the report types while creating the field, you will have to add them manually.
Salesforce OWD Interview Questions and answers
87. What is a report type?
Answer: A report type in Salesforce defines the objects and fields available for use in reports, serving as the foundation for
creating reports. For example, a “Contacts and Accounts” report type allows users to create reports that include fields from both
the Contact and Account objects. This means users can generate reports displaying contact details alongside their related account
information, such as account name, industry, and annual revenue. This report type facilitates comprehensive reporting on customer
relationships by combining data from both objects in a single report.
88. What is the difference between custom report types and standard report types?
Answer: Listed down the differences, make a note of it and answer in any job interview.
Custom Report Types Standard Report Types

Defined by users to include specific fields and objects. Predefined by Salesforce, covering common use cases.

Allows custom relationships and data combinations. Limited to predefined object relationships and fields.

Users can add up to 4 levels of related objects. Typically focuses on primary objects and their children.

Provides flexibility to include custom fields. Includes standard fields and commonly used relationships.

Can tailor reports to specific business requirements. Suitable for general reporting needs.

Requires setup and configuration by the admin. Ready to use out-of-the-box without additional setup.

Enables advanced filtering and customization options. Offers basic filtering and formatting options.

Ideal for complex reporting needs across multiple objects. Best for simple, straightforward reporting tasks.

Standard report types are report types which Salesforce create itself when we create objects and relationships between them, for
example, Contacts and Accounts.
Custom report types allow the admin to specify all fields available to the user while creating a report. Also, it provides functionality
to associate up to 4 objects. It’s like creating a template that tells Salesforce that I need these objects with these fields to be
available to create the report.

Chapter 11: Sales Cloud

The “Sales Cloud” section is fundamental for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on managing sales processes within the Salesforce
CRM. This includes topics like lead management, opportunity tracking, forecasting, and sales automation. Understanding Sales
Cloud is crucial in any job interview, as it highlights your ability to enhance sales productivity and effectiveness. To prepare for
these questions, leverage Trailhead for hands-on experience and detailed learning, ensuring comprehensive interview preparation
and showcasing your expertise in Salesforce & CRM Basics.

89. What is the Sales cloud in Salesforce?

This is the most frequently asked interview question. Imagine having a suite of tools specifically designed to supercharge your
sales processes—that’s what the Sales Cloud in Salesforce offers. It’s a comprehensive solution for managing customer
relationships and sales pipelines. In my experience, the Sales Cloud provides everything from lead and opportunity
management to forecasting and analytics. For instance, I leverage lead management to capture and qualify leads efficiently,
ensuring no potential customer slips through the cracks.
The Sales Cloud also includes powerful automation features, such as workflows and approval processes, which streamline tasks
and reduce administrative overhead. With tools like Einstein Analytics, I gain deep insights into sales performance, helping to
identify trends and optimize strategies. Additionally, integration capabilities with email and productivity tools like Outlook or Gmail
ensure seamless communication and increased productivity.
Utilizing the Sales Cloud, I can drive sales efficiency, improve customer interactions, and ultimately boost revenue. My hands-on
experience with this platform ensures that I can implement and optimize it effectively, making me a valuable asset to any sales-
driven organization.

Read more: Sales cloud in Salesforce

90. Can contact exist without an Account?
Answer: Yes, a contact can exist without an account in Salesforce. This type of contact is referred to as a “Private Contact.”
Private Contacts are contacts that are not associated with any account and are only visible to the owner of the contact and users
with the “View All” or “Modify All” permissions. This feature is often used in personal or smaller business scenarios where tracking
individual contacts without tying them to specific accounts is necessary.
91. What are personal Accounts in Salesforce?
Personal Accounts in Salesforce are a special type of account designed to represent individual consumers rather than businesses
or organizations. They combine the attributes of both Accounts and Contacts into a single record. This allows companies that
primarily deal with individuals, such as financial services or retail businesses, to manage their customer data more effectively.
Personal Accounts retain all the standard account functionalities but include contact fields directly on the account record. For
example, a financial advisor might use personal accounts to manage individual clients, storing personal details and tracking
interactions in one consolidated record, simplifying customer relationship management.
92. What is the relationship between Account and Opportunities? What is the relationship between Account and
Contacts?
Answer:
The relationship between Accounts and Opportunities
The relationship between Accounts and Opportunities in Salesforce is a master-detail relationship, where the Account is the master
and the Opportunity is the detail. This means that each Opportunity must be associated with a single Account, representing
potential revenue linked to that Account. Accounts provide a hierarchical structure and context for Opportunities, helping
businesses manage and track potential sales and revenue generation. Opportunities inherit sharing and security settings from their
parent Accounts, ensuring consistent data access and protection. This relationship allows for detailed reporting and analytics,
helping businesses forecast sales, measure performance, and strategize effectively based on account-specific opportunities.

Read more: CTS Salesforce Interview Questions

The relationship between Accounts and Contacts
The relationship between Accounts and Contacts in Salesforce is a special lookup relationship, where Accounts represent
companies and Contacts represent individuals associated with those companies. Each Contact must be linked to one Account,
creating a parent-child hierarchy. This relationship allows for cascade deletion, where deleting an Account also deletes its related
Contacts. It enables tracking of individual interactions within the context of an organization, with Contacts inheriting the sharing and
security settings of their parent Accounts. This structure supports detailed reporting, relationship management, and comprehensive
activity tracking at both the account and contact levels.

93. What is the difference between Product and Asset?

Answer:
In Salesforce, Products and Assets are related but serve different purposes, particularly in terms of how a company tracks its
offerings and what customers own.
Product
 Definition: Products in Salesforce represent the goods or services that a company sells to its customers. These
products are typically part of the company’s product catalog and can be associated with opportunities and price books to
track sales.
  Use Case: Products are used during the sales process to define what is being sold to customers. For example,
when an opportunity is created, products can be added to the opportunity to define the items the customer is considering
purchasing.
 Key Attributes: Products include details like Price, Description, Product Code, and Standard Price. They are
linked to Price Books, which allow for variations in pricing for different customer segments or sales regions.
Example: A company selling software might have “Basic Package” and “Premium Package” as products, with each linked to
different pricing options through price books.
Asset
 Definition: Assets represent the actual products (or services) that customers have purchased and now own. An
asset is created after a product has been sold and delivered to the customer, and it tracks ownership and usage of that
product.
 Use Case: Assets are used to track what a customer currently owns. They are linked to customer accounts and
can be used in support cases to track warranty, maintenance, or repairs. Assets are especially useful for managing post-
sale interactions, such as support or renewals.
 Key Attributes: Assets include details like Serial Number, Status, Purchase Date, Warranty Start/End Dates,
and Quantity. This information is vital for customer service, maintenance tracking, and renewals.
Example: If a customer purchases the “Basic Package” software, an asset is created to track the customer’s ownership of that
software package, including when it was purchased and any applicable warranties.
Read more: Organization-Wide Defaults (OWD) in Salesforce
94. Can we choose which price books my newly created product will be part of?
Answer: Yes, we can get in custom price books, but all products will be, by default, part of the Standard price book.
Picture your business tools—Products and Assets serve distinct roles within Salesforce. Products represent the items or services
you sell. They’re listed in your Product Catalog and are essential for creating opportunities, quotes, and orders. For instance,
when I configure a new opportunity, I select products from our catalog, detailing what we’re offering to the customer, complete with
pricing and specifications.
On the flip side, Assets track items that customers have already purchased and are now in their possession. Assets help in post-
sale activities like support and warranty management. For example, once a product is sold and delivered, it becomes an asset
linked to the customer’s account, allowing us to track its lifecycle, maintenance, and any service requests.
Understanding the distinction between products and assets is crucial. Products drive the sales process, while assets enhance
customer service and support, ensuring we deliver value throughout the customer journey. My expertise in managing both ensures
seamless transitions from sales to support, optimizing overall customer satisfaction and business efficiency.

95. What are the Lead assignment Rules?

Answer:
Lead Assignment Rules in Salesforce are automated processes that assign incoming leads to specific users or queues based on
defined criteria. They help streamline the lead management process by ensuring that leads are assigned to the right salespeople or
teams based on factors such as geography, product interest, or other lead attributes. This automation improves efficiency, ensures
leads are promptly followed up, and reduces manual effort in lead distribution.
Key Features of Lead Assignment Rules:

1. Single Active Rule: Only one lead assignment rule can be active at a time. This rule will automatically assign
new leads based on the criteria defined.
2. Multiple Rule Entries: Within an active lead assignment rule, you can define multiple rule entries (conditions).
Each rule entry specifies the criteria for assigning leads, such as assigning leads from a specific country to a particular
sales rep.
3. Criteria-Based Assignment: Rules are based on field values of the lead. For example, if the lead’s country is
“USA,” it can be assigned to the US Sales team, while leads from “UK” are assigned to the UK Sales team.
 4. Assignment to Users or Queues: Leads can be assigned directly to individual users or to a queue, where
multiple users can pick up the leads for follow-up.
5. Auto-Response Rules: Lead assignment rules can be integrated with auto-response rules to send an
automatic email response to the lead based on the assignment criteria.
6. Execution Order: Rule entries are executed in the order they are listed, and the first matching entry is applied.
Once a lead matches a rule entry, no further entries are evaluated.
Example Use Case:

A company might have different sales teams for different regions. By setting up a Lead Assignment Rule, any lead coming from
Europe could be automatically assigned to the “EU Sales Team,” while leads from North America are assigned to the “US Sales
Team.”
Example of Rule Entry:
Criteria: Lead Country = “United States”
Action: Assign to User = “John Doe”
Lead Assignment Rules are essential in automating the distribution of leads to ensure prompt follow-up and increased conversion
rates. They help sales teams stay organized and focused by automatically routing leads to the appropriate resources.

96. Once the lead is converted, can we move it back to an unconverted state?
Answer: No, once a lead is converted in Salesforce, it cannot be moved back to an unconverted state. The conversion process
creates a new account, contact, and optionally an opportunity, and the original lead record is marked as converted. This action is
irreversible. If you need to revert a converted lead, you would need to manually delete the newly created records and recreate the
lead record, which is not an ideal or efficient process.
98. What all records are created on lead conversion? Is it mandatory to have all
records created on conversion?
Answer: 3 new records created on lead conversion
One each of Account, Contact, and Opportunity
We can tickmark “Don’t create Opportunity” if we don’t want to create an opportunity on lead conversion.
Chapter 12: Service Application
The “Service Cloud” section is pivotal for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on optimizing customer service processes within the
Salesforce CRM. This includes topics like case management, service console, knowledge base, and omnichannel support.
Understanding Service Cloud is crucial in any job interview, as it demonstrates your ability to enhance customer satisfaction and
service efficiency. To prepare for these questions, leverage Trailhead for practical exercises and in-depth learning, ensuring
thorough interview preparation and showcasing your expertise in Salesforce & CRM Basics.

99. How many active case escalation rules can we have?

Answer: In Salesforce, you can have only one active case escalation rule at a time. Case escalation rules automatically escalate
cases to the appropriate user or queue when the case meets specific criteria, ensuring timely resolution of high-priority cases.
Although you can create multiple case escalation rules, only one can be set to active at any given time.
Read more: Salesforce Lightning Components in Simple Terms
100. What error comes up if you create a new active escalation rule when you
already have an active rule in place?
Answer:If you attempt to create a new active escalation rule when there is already an active rule in place, Salesforce will display
an error message indicating that only one active escalation rule is allowed. The system prevents activating multiple escalation rules
simultaneously to maintain clarity and consistency in the escalation process. You would need to deactivate the existing active rule
before activating a new one.
101. What is the business hour criteria in Escalation Rules?
Answer: The business hour criteria in escalation rules refer to the defined working hours within which escalation actions are
evaluated and executed. Business hours specify the times during which the support team is available to handle escalated cases.
When setting up escalation rules, you can configure them to respect these business hours, ensuring that escalations occur only
during active support times. This prevents cases from being escalated outside of business hours, allowing for more accurate and
manageable case handling.
102. What is solution management in Salesforce?
Answer: Solutions tab in Salesforce provides a repository of the detailed description of customer issues. The customer support
representatives quickly answer inquiries at any time; solutions help improve support agent productivity and customer response
time, streamlining communication and improving customer satisfaction.

Note – Currently, the Solutions tab and object are not available in lightning and Salesforce Classic support.
103. What is a Case Assignment Rule?
Answer: A Case Assignment Rule in Salesforce is a mechanism used to automatically assign incoming cases to specific users or
queues based on predefined criteria. These rules help streamline the case management process by ensuring that cases are routed
to the appropriate support personnel or teams as soon as they are created. Case assignment rules can be based on various criteria
such as case origin, priority, product, customer type, or any custom field. This automation helps improve efficiency, response times,
and customer satisfaction by directing cases to the right people who are best equipped to handle them.
104. What is Web-to-Case?
Answer: Web-to-Case is a Salesforce feature that allows organizations to capture customer inquiries directly from their website
and create cases in Salesforce. By embedding a simple web form on the company’s website, customers can submit issues or
requests that are automatically converted into cases within Salesforce. This process helps streamline the case creation process,
ensuring that customer inquiries are logged and tracked efficiently, facilitating timely responses and resolution by the support team.
Web-to-Case supports a maximum of 5,000 cases per day, making it suitable for businesses of varying sizes.
105. Can we define an auto-reply in case of email to the case in Salesforce?
Answer: Yes, Salesforce allows you to define auto-reply rules for cases created via Email-to-Case. Auto-reply rules enable you to
send automatic email responses to customers when their case is created or updated. These responses can be customized based
on the case criteria, ensuring that customers receive immediate acknowledgment of their inquiry. Auto-reply emails can include
personalized messages, case details, and expected response times, enhancing customer communication and satisfaction.
106. What is the support process in Salesforce?
Answer: Support Process is only for the “Status” picklist, as you might know. The picklist values available in the status of a case
record type determine a support process. It is only a business-relevant feature as the status field is the most process-specific field
on a case. The status field cannot be customized on a record type; it should be customized in support.
107. Can we have multiple record types using the same Support Process?
Answer: Yes, in Salesforce, you can have multiple record types that use the same support process. Record types allow you to
offer different page layouts and picklist values to different users based on their profile or role. By using the same support process
across multiple record types, you ensure that all cases follow the same set of stages and statuses, while still providing customized
views and fields appropriate for different scenarios or types of cases. This flexibility helps tailor the user experience to specific
requirements while maintaining consistent case management practices.
108. How to give users access to knowledge articles?
Answer: To give users access to Knowledge articles in Salesforce, you need to ensure they have the appropriate permissions.
First, enable Salesforce Knowledge if it is not already enabled in your organization. Then, create and assign the necessary
Knowledge-related user permissions via profiles or permission sets. Key permissions include “View Articles,” “Manage Articles,”
and “Publish Articles.” Additionally, configure the Knowledge settings to define data categories and visibility settings, ensuring that
users can access the relevant articles. You can also include Knowledge components on Lightning record pages, giving users easy
access to articles directly from related records.
Salesforce CPQ Interview Questions
Chapter 13: MVC Architecture
The “MVC Architecture” section is a core topic for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on understanding the Model-View-Controller
design pattern used within the Salesforce CRM. This includes topics like data models (Model), user interfaces (View), and business
logic (Controller). Understanding MVC Architecture is crucial in any job interview, as it demonstrates your ability to structure and
manage Salesforce applications effectively.

1. What is the role of the Model in the MVC architecture in Salesforce, and how is it
represented?
The Model in Salesforce’s MVC architecture represents the underlying data and business logic. It is responsible for interacting with
the database and retrieving, updating, or deleting records. In Salesforce, the Model is typically represented by Standard
Objects (such as Account, Contact, Opportunity) or Custom Objects that store data. The Model also includes Apex Classes that
define business logic, such as validation rules, triggers, and workflows, which manipulate the data.
2. How does the View component in Salesforce MVC architecture help in rendering
user interfaces?
The View is responsible for displaying data to the user and handling user interactions. In Salesforce, the View is implemented
through Visualforce pages, Lightning Components, or Lightning Web Components (LWC). These components are used to
create user interfaces that render data from the Model and present it in a user-friendly way. The View interacts with the Controller
to get the data and also sends user inputs back to the Controller for processing.
3. What is the purpose of the Controller in Salesforce MVC, and how does it interact
with the Model and View?
The Controller acts as the intermediary between the Model and the View. It processes user inputs from the View, performs the
necessary logic (using Apex classes or standard controllers), and updates the Model. After processing, it sends updated data back
to the View for display. In Salesforce, Controllers can be Apex Controllers or Standard Controllers that help manage the
behavior and flow of data between the user interface and the data in the database.
4. Can you explain how Visualforce pages or Lightning components act as the View
in Salesforce’s MVC model?
Visualforce pages and Lightning components represent the View in Salesforce’s MVC architecture. They provide the user
interface layer where data is displayed to the user. Visualforce pages are built using a tag-based markup language, while Lightning
components (Aura components or Lightning Web Components) offer a more dynamic and modern user interface experience. These
components retrieve data from the Controller and render it on the screen. They also capture user actions like button clicks and
send them back to the Controller for processing.
5. How do Apex classes and Controllers manage business logic in the Salesforce
MVC architecture?
Apex classes and Controllers handle the business logic in Salesforce’s MVC architecture. Apex classes can be used to create
custom Controllers or extensions of standard Controllers. These Controllers process user requests, interact with the database
(Model), and return the necessary data to the View. For example, when a user interacts with a form on a Visualforce page, the
Controller processes the input, runs the business logic, retrieves or updates records, and passes the result back to the View for
rendering. This separation of logic into Controllers ensures a clean, modular architecture that improves maintainability.
6. What is MVC architecture?
Think of MVC architecture as the blueprint for building organized and scalable applications. MVC stands for Model-View-
Controller. The Model represents the data and business logic, handling data storage and management. For instance, in
Salesforce, this would be your objects and records. The View is the user interface, what the user interacts with—think of it as your
Visualforce pages or Lightning components that display data to the user. The Controller acts as an intermediary, processing user
input from the View, updating the Model, and refreshing the View. This separation of concerns ensures a clean, maintainable
codebase, making it easier to manage complex applications. My proficiency with MVC architecture ensures efficient development
and smooth user experiences, crucial for high-quality Salesforce implementations.
Chapter 14: Data Import
The “Data Import” section is a critical topic for any Salesforce Admin, focusing on the methods and tools used to import data into
the Salesforce CRM. This includes topics like Data Import Wizard, Data Loader, and best practices for data migration.
Understanding data import is crucial in any job interview, as it demonstrates your ability to manage and integrate data effectively.

110. What is a data import wizard?

Answer:The Data Import Wizard is a Salesforce tool that helps users import data into Salesforce objects. It is a user-friendly
interface designed for simple data import tasks and supports importing up to 50,000 records at a time. The wizard guides users
through the process of mapping data fields, handling duplicates, and importing records into standard and custom objects. It is ideal
for users with less technical expertise who need to perform straightforward data imports, such as importing leads, contacts,
accounts, or custom object records.
Salesforce Apex Testing Best Practices
111. What is Upsert, and how are external IDs beneficial?
Answer: Upsert combines insert and updates into a single call. Upsert uses an indexed custom field or external ID to determine
whether to create a new record or update an existing record.

If the external ID is not matched, then a new record is created

Existing record is updated If the external ID is matched once.
If the external ID matched multiple times, then an error is thrown
112. Can Users mass transfer records to which they do not have read access?
Answer: No, users cannot mass transfer records to which they do not have read access in Salesforce. To transfer records, users
must have at least read access to those records. The mass transfer functionality allows administrators and users with appropriate
permissions to reassign ownership of records in bulk, but it respects the sharing and visibility settings to ensure data security and
integrity.
113. How can we import more than 50000 records considering import wizard allows
only 50k records?
Answer: To import more than 50,000 records in Salesforce, you need to use the Data Loader or a similar data management tool.
The Data Loader is a client application that allows for the bulk import, update, delete, and export of Salesforce records. Unlike the
Data Import Wizard, the Data Loader can handle larger data volumes, making it suitable for importing millions of records. You can
download the Data Loader from Salesforce, configure it with your Salesforce credentials, and use it to import large datasets by
mapping your data fields and specifying the import operation.
114. Can we delete records using import wizard?
Answer: No, the Data Import Wizard in Salesforce does not support deleting records. It is designed for importing, updating, and
upserting records only. To delete records, you need to use the Data Loader or other data management tools that support delete
operations. The Data Loader allows you to specify records for deletion by providing their IDs and executing a bulk delete operation,
ensuring that you can efficiently manage and remove unwanted records from your Salesforce database.
115. Can we schedule data loads in Salesforce?
Answer: Yes, you can schedule data loads in Salesforce using tools like Data Loader. The Data Loader tool allows you to
automate data import and export operations by scheduling them to run at specific times using command-line scripts.
LWC Interview Questions
Preparing for a Salesforce interview often involves mastering various topics, and Lightning Web Components (LWC) are no
exception. LWC interview questions are essential for candidates with 4 years or 5 years experience looking to showcase their
expertise in Salesforce’s modern framework for building user interfaces. These interview questions cover a range of topics, from
the basics of LWC to advanced concepts, scenario based questions ensuring a comprehensive understanding of the subject. By
familiarizing yourself with these LWC interview questions, you can confidently navigate any tricky technical discussions and
demonstrate your proficiency to potential employers. In this guide, we will explore some of the most commonly asked LWC
interview questions to help you prepare effectively.

116. What is wire function in LWC?

Imagine needing real-time data in your Lightning Web Components (LWC)—that’s where the wire function comes in.
The @wire decorator is used to connect a property or method to Salesforce data. It automatically provisions data and updates the
UI when data changes, ensuring reactive and efficient data handling. For example, I use @wire to fetch records or call Apex
methods, providing seamless integration between LWC and Salesforce data. This method ensures components remain up-to-date
without manual refreshes, streamlining the development process and enhancing user experience with real-time data.
117. What are Lifecycle hooks in LWC?

Lifecycle hooks in LWC are methods that allow developers to tap into key points of a component’s lifecycle. For
instance, connectedCallback() runs when the component is inserted into the DOM, perfect for initializing properties or setting up
event listeners. disconnectedCallback() is used for cleanup tasks when the component is removed. renderedCallback() is called
after the component’s template has been rendered, useful for DOM manipulation. These hooks provide control over the
component’s behavior at different stages, ensuring efficient resource management and optimal performance in dynamic
applications.
118. What is the difference between event.stopPropagation() and
event.preventDefault()?
Understanding event.stopPropagation() and event.preventDefault() is crucial for handling events in
JavaScript. event.stopPropagation() prevents the event from bubbling up the DOM hierarchy, stopping parent elements from
reacting to the event. This is useful when you want to isolate an event’s effect to a specific element. event.preventDefault() stops
the browser’s default behavior for an event. For instance, preventing a form submission when validation fails. Both methods provide
fine control over event handling, ensuring precise behavior in complex interfaces.
119. What is a Promise in async transactions?

Promises in JavaScript handle asynchronous operations, ensuring code executes sequentially without blocking the main thread.
A Promise represents a value that may be available now, or in the future, or never. It has three states: pending, fulfilled,
and rejected. I use promises to manage async calls, like fetching data from an API. For instance, I use .then() for success
handlers and .catch() for error handlers. Promises simplify managing asynchronous tasks, avoiding callback hell and making code
more readable and maintainable.
120. What are web components? Is LWC based on web components?

Web components are a suite of standardized technologies that allow developers to create reusable and encapsulated HTML tags.
They include Custom Elements, Shadow DOM, and HTML Templates. Yes, Lightning Web Components (LWC) are built on
these standards. LWC leverages web components to provide a modern framework that’s lightweight, efficient, and fast. By using
web components, LWC ensures compatibility with future web standards and delivers a modular approach to building complex UIs in
Salesforce.
121. What does composed = true do in an event?

Setting composed = true in a custom event allows the event to traverse the shadow DOM boundary. Normally, events are restricted
to their own shadow DOM, but with composed: true , the event can propagate through the shadow DOM and reach the main
document. This is crucial in scenarios where a component needs to communicate with its parent components or the main
application, ensuring flexible and seamless event handling across the entire DOM hierarchy.
Read more: Change Sets in Salesforce
122. What are callback functions in LWC?

Callback functions in LWC are functions passed as arguments to other functions, often used to handle asynchronous operations.
For instance, when making an API call, a callback function processes the response once it’s received. They are essential for tasks
like event handling, timers, and network requests. Using callbacks, I can define what should happen after an operation completes,
ensuring smooth and controlled execution flow in my components. They are foundational for managing asynchronous behavior in
JavaScript.
123. What is Callback hell?

Callback hell refers to the situation where multiple nested callback functions make code hard to read and maintain. This typically
happens in complex asynchronous operations, leading to deeply nested and difficult-to-follow code structures. I combat callback
hell by using Promises and async/await syntax, which flattens the code structure and enhances readability. By adopting these
techniques, I ensure cleaner, more manageable, and maintainable asynchronous code in my Salesforce development projects.
Read all the important lwc interview questions with their answers here.
Salesforce QA interview questions
124. What is the role of a QA tester in a Salesforce implementation project?

Imagine a project where precision is critical—that’s where a QA tester comes in for Salesforce implementations. Their role is to
ensure the system meets the required quality standards before it goes live. This involves creating and executing test plans, writing
test cases, and performing various types of testing like functional, integration, and performance testing. I’ve seen QA testers
meticulously verify that all customizations, workflows, and integrations function as expected. They identify defects, report them, and
work closely with developers to resolve issues, ensuring a smooth, bug-free deployment. Their work guarantees that the Salesforce
solution is robust, reliable, and meets user requirements.
125. How do you manage test environments in Salesforce?

Managing test environments in Salesforce involves setting up sandboxes that mirror the production environment. I typically use
different types of sandboxes for various testing needs: Developer sandboxes for unit testing and development, and Full sandboxes
for performance testing and user acceptance testing. Keeping these environments synchronized with production data and
configurations is crucial. I schedule regular refreshes and use deployment tools like Change Sets or Salesforce DX to ensure
configurations are consistent. This structured approach allows for thorough testing without risking the integrity of the production
environment, ensuring that all changes are validated in a safe, controlled setting.
126. How do you perform regression testing in Salesforce?

Regression testing in Salesforce ensures that new changes don’t negatively impact existing functionality. I start by identifying
critical functionalities and creating a comprehensive suite of test cases that cover these areas. Automated testing tools
like Selenium or Salesforce’s own Apex test classes help streamline this process, running tests efficiently across different
scenarios. Each time a new feature is added or a bug is fixed, I re-run the regression tests to verify that the system behaves as
expected. This approach catches unintended side effects early, maintaining the stability and reliability of the Salesforce instance
while allowing for continuous improvements and updates.
Read all the QA interview questions here
Bonus Interview Questions
127. What is a custom object in Salesforce?
A custom object in Salesforce is a database table that allows users to store data specific to their organization’s needs, which isn’t
covered by standard objects like Accounts, Contacts, or Opportunities. Custom objects are created by users to tailor the Salesforce
environment to their business processes. They come with standard features such as fields, relationships, page layouts, and
security settings, enabling organizations to capture and manage unique data. For example, a company might create a custom
object called “Project” to track detailed information about ongoing projects, including project status, deadlines, and assigned
resources.

128. What does a custom object permit the user to do?

A custom object permits users to create and manage custom data specific to their organization’s requirements. It allows users to:

 Define Custom Fields: Users can create custom fields to capture specific information relevant to their business
processes.
 Set Up Relationships: Users can establish relationships with other objects, both standard and custom, to link
related data.
 Create Page Layouts: Users can customize page layouts to control the display and organization of fields and
related lists on record pages.
 Implement Validation Rules: Users can define validation rules to ensure data integrity by enforcing business
rules during data entry.
 Build Custom Reports and Dashboards: Users can generate reports and dashboards to analyze the data
stored in custom objects.
 Automate Processes: Users can create workflow rules, process builder flows, and triggers to automate business
processes involving custom objects.
129. What is Self-Relationship?
A self-relationship in Salesforce is a lookup relationship where an object relates to itself. This means that a record within an object
can be linked to another record of the same object. For example, in a “Employee” custom object, a self-relationship can be used to
create a “Manager” field that links to another Employee record, representing the manager of the employee. Self-relationships are
useful for hierarchical data structures or when you need to associate records within the same object.

WhoId and WhatId in Salesforce

130. What is Object Relationship Overview?

The Object Relationship Overview in Salesforce provides a summary of how different objects relate to each other. It includes details
about the relationships between objects, such as lookup, master-detail, and many-to-many relationships. This overview helps users
understand the data model and how different pieces of information are connected within the system. It typically includes:

 Parent-Child Relationships: Indicating which objects are related and the nature of their relationship.
 Field Mappings: Showing how fields in related objects are linked.
 Relationship Types: Identifying whether the relationship is a lookup, master-detail, or a junction object for many-
to-many relationships.
131. How many types of relationships are offered by Salesforce.com?

Salesforce.com offers three main types of relationships to define how objects relate to each other:

1. Lookup Relationship: A loosely coupled relationship that allows one object to be linked to another. Records in a
lookup relationship can exist independently. For example, linking Contacts to Accounts.
 2. Master-Detail Relationship: A tightly coupled relationship where the child record (detail) is dependent on the
parent record (master). If the parent record is deleted, the child record is also deleted. For example, linking Opportunity
Line Items to Opportunities.
3. Many-to-Many Relationship: Implemented using a junction object, which is a custom object with two master-
detail relationships. This allows each record of one object to be linked to multiple records of another object. For
example, linking a custom object “Course” to “Student” via a junction object “Enrollment” to track which students are
enrolled in which courses.
132. What is a custom object in Salesforce?

A custom object in Salesforce is a database table created by users to store data specific to their organization’s needs. Custom
objects enable users to extend Salesforce’s capabilities beyond standard objects like Accounts, Contacts, and Opportunities. They
come with standard features, such as custom fields, page layouts, relationships, validation rules, and custom reports, allowing
businesses to manage their unique data requirements effectively. For example, a company might create a custom object called
“Project” to track project details, deadlines, and resources.
133. What does a custom object permit the user to do?

A custom object permits users to create and manage data that is specific to their business processes. Users can:

 Define Custom Fields: Capture specific information relevant to the organization.

 Set Up Relationships: Establish connections with other standard or custom objects.
 Create Page Layouts: Customize the user interface to display and organize fields and related lists.
 Implement Validation Rules: Ensure data integrity by enforcing business rules during data entry.
 Build Custom Reports and Dashboards: Analyze and visualize data stored in custom objects.
 Automate Processes: Use workflow rules, process builder, and Apex triggers to automate business processes.
134. What is Self-Relationship?

A self-relationship in Salesforce is a lookup relationship where an object links to itself. This allows records within the same object to
be related to each other. For instance, in an “Employee” custom object, a self-relationship can be used to create a “Manager” field
that links to another Employee record, indicating the employee’s manager. Self-relationships are useful for hierarchical data
structures or scenarios where records within the same object need to be associated, such as linking team members or creating
reporting structures.

135. What is Object Relationship Overview?

The Object Relationship Overview in Salesforce provides a summary of how different objects are interconnected within the system.
It outlines the relationships between objects, including lookup, master-detail, and many-to-many relationships. This overview helps
users and administrators understand the data model and how various pieces of information relate to one another. It typically
includes:
 Parent-Child Relationships: Descriptions of how objects are related hierarchically.
 Field Mappings: Details on how fields in related objects are linked.
 Relationship Types: Identification of the relationship types (lookup, master-detail, or junction objects for many-
to-many relationships).
136. How many types of relationships are offered by Salesforce.com?

Salesforce.com offers three main types of relationships to define how objects relate to each other:

1. Lookup Relationship: A loosely coupled relationship that allows one object to be linked to another. Records in a
lookup relationship can exist independently. For example, linking Contacts to Accounts.
 2. Master-Detail Relationship: A tightly coupled relationship where the child record (detail) is dependent on the
parent record (master). If the parent record is deleted, the child record is also deleted. For example, linking Opportunity
Line Items to Opportunities.
3. Many-to-Many Relationship: Implemented using a junction object, which is a custom object with two master-
detail relationships. This allows each record of one object to be linked to multiple records of another object. For
example, linking a custom object “Course” to “Student” via a junction object “Enrollment” to track which students are
enrolled in which courses.
These relationship types help model complex data structures and ensure data integrity within Salesforce.

137. What is a trigger?

A trigger in Salesforce is a piece of Apex code that executes automatically before or after specific database events, such as
insertions, updates, deletions, and undeletions of records. Triggers allow developers to perform custom actions, such as data
validation, complex calculations, or updating related records when certain conditions are met. For example, a trigger can
automatically update the total amount of an Opportunity whenever a related Opportunity Line Item is inserted or updated.
Read more about the detailed guide on Triggers in Salesforce.
138. What is the difference between Trigger and Workflow?

Triggers: Triggers are written in Apex and can handle complex logic, execute before or after specific database events, and can
operate on multiple objects. They offer more flexibility and control but require coding knowledge.
Workflow Rules: Workflow Rules are point-and-click automation tools that can automate standard internal procedures and
processes. They can only handle simple logic and are limited to field updates, email alerts, tasks, and outbound messages.
Workflow Rules are easier to create and manage but offer less flexibility compared to Triggers.
Here’s a comparison table with three columns comparing Triggers, Workflow Rules, and Process Builder in Salesforce:
 Triggers Workflow Rules Process Builder

An automated process that evaluates record criteria and

Apex code that executes before or after data performs predefined actions such as field updates,
Definition manipulation events (insert, update, delete) on records. email alerts, or task creation.

Executes through point-and-click configuration in

Execution Executes Apex code and can perform complex logic Salesforce Setup without requiring code, providing
Context and operations using SOQL and DML statements. declarative automation capabilities.

Requires development skills to write and maintain Configurable through Salesforce Setup by admins or
Apex code, allowing for tailored, fine-grained control users with appropriate permissions, offering predefined
Customization over data manipulation and validation logic. actions based on simple record criteria.

Executes based on DML events (insert, update, delete) Executes based on record criteria (like when a record is
Event on records and can react to changes in related records created or updated) but does not react to changes in
Triggering as well. related records.

Allows for complex business logic, validation rules, Supports straightforward actions and workflows based
and interactions between multiple objects or records in on record field updates or criteria, lacking the flexibility
Complexity a single transaction. for complex logic and interactions.

Subject to Apex governor limits (such as CPU time Operates within declarative limits set by Salesforce,
Governor and SOQL queries per transaction), impacting ensuring actions remain within platform-specific
Limits performance if not optimized. boundaries without impacting performance.

Ideal for scenarios requiring extensive data Suitable for automating repetitive tasks, enforcing
manipulation, intricate business logic, and real-time business processes based on simple conditions, and
Use Cases updates across multiple objects. sending notifications based on record changes.
This table now provides a comprehensive comparison between Triggers, Workflow Rules, and Process Builder in Salesforce,
covering their definitions, execution contexts, customization options, event triggering capabilities, complexity levels, governance
considerations, and typical use cases.

Synchronous vs. Asynchronous Apex

139. What are the three types of object relations in Salesforce?

The three main types of object relationships in Salesforce are:

1. Lookup Relationship: A loosely coupled relationship where one object can link to another without dependency.
For example, a Contact can look up to an Account.
2. Master-Detail Relationship: A tightly coupled relationship where the child (detail) record is dependent on the
parent (master) record. If the master record is deleted, the detail records are also deleted. For example, Opportunity
Line Items are dependent on Opportunities.
3. Many-to-Many Relationship: Implemented using a junction object, which is a custom object with two master-
detail relationships. This allows linking each record of one object to multiple records of another object. For example, a
junction object “Enrollment” links “Course” and “Student” objects to track enrollments.
140. What is the junction object and what purpose does it serve?

A junction object in Salesforce is a custom object used to create a many-to-many relationship between two other objects. It
contains two master-detail relationships, one with each of the objects it connects. The purpose of a junction object is to enable
complex data modeling by allowing multiple associations between records of different objects. For example, in an educational
context, a junction object “Enrollment” can link “Course” and “Student” objects, allowing a student to enroll in multiple courses and a
course to have multiple students. Read more about junction object.
141. What is an Audit Trail?

An Audit Trail in Salesforce is a vital feature that I regularly utilize to track changes made to our organization’s setup and data. It
provides a detailed log of user actions, including modifications to records, configuration changes, and security settings. As an
experienced consultant, I rely on the Audit Trail to maintain transparency and accountability within our Salesforce environment.

Using the Audit Trail, I can view who made specific changes, what changes were made, and when these changes occurred. This
visibility is crucial for compliance with regulatory requirements, internal governance policies, and auditing purposes. It helps me
identify unauthorized modifications, troubleshoot issues, and ensure data integrity by monitoring the history of system changes over
time. Furthermore, the Audit Trail enables me to proactively manage our Salesforce instance by reviewing historical data
modifications and trends. By leveraging this feature effectively, I can uphold data governance standards, maintain trust with
stakeholders, and support informed decision-making across our organization.

142. What is the difference between SOQL and SOSL?

SOQL (Salesforce Object Query Language): SOQL is used to query records from a single object or multiple related objects. It is
similar to SQL and allows precise querying based on specific field criteria. For example, querying all accounts with a specific
industry.
SOSL (Salesforce Object Search Language): SOSL is used to perform text searches across multiple objects. It returns records
that match the search term from specified objects. SOSL is useful for broad searches across multiple objects and fields. For
example, searching for a term across all accounts, contacts, and opportunities.
Read more about the differences between SOQL and SOSL.
143. What is a Wrapper Class?
A Wrapper Class in Salesforce is a handy technique that I frequently use to bundle together different data types into a single object.
It allows me to combine primitive data types (like strings and integers) with complex data structures (such as lists or custom
objects) into a cohesive unit. This approach is particularly useful when I need to pass multiple pieces of related data between
components or when formatting data for display in Visualforce pages.

I often employ Wrapper Classes to streamline development and enhance code readability. By encapsulating related data into a
single wrapper object, I can simplify interactions between controllers and Visualforce pages, making it easier to manage and
manipulate data. This not only improves the efficiency of our Salesforce applications but also enhances user experience by
presenting data in a clear and organized manner.

Wrapper Classes are versatile tools in Salesforce development, allowing me to handle complex data structures effectively while
maintaining code simplicity and flexibility across various functionalities and requirements.

144. Explain the Salesforce dashboard?

A Salesforce dashboard is a visual representation of key metrics and data insights, compiled from multiple reports within
Salesforce. Dashboards provide a snapshot view of an organization’s performance, allowing users to track KPIs, monitor trends,
and make data-driven decisions. Each dashboard consists of components like charts, tables, gauges, and metrics, which are based
on underlying reports. Dashboards can be customized to display data relevant to different roles or departments, ensuring that users
have access to the most pertinent information. For example, a sales dashboard might include components for total sales, sales
pipeline, top opportunities, and lead conversion rates, giving sales managers a comprehensive view of their team’s performance.

145. What is an object in Salesforce?

An object in Salesforce is a foundational entity that I work with extensively as a consultant. It represents a database table that
stores specific types of data, such as leads, accounts, contacts, or custom data unique to our organization. Objects define the
structure of data fields (known as fields or attributes) and the relationships between different types of data within Salesforce.

As a consultant, I leverage Salesforce objects to model our business processes effectively. This involves defining custom objects to
capture specialized information that standard Salesforce objects may not accommodate. Each object is customizable, allowing me
to tailor fields, page layouts, and business logic to meet our exact requirements.

Objects serve as the backbone of our Salesforce applications, facilitating efficient data management, reporting, and automation. By
understanding how to create, modify, and relate objects, I ensure our Salesforce implementation aligns closely with our business
goals, enabling us to maximize the platform’s capabilities to drive productivity and growth.

146. What do you mean by governor limits?

Governor limits are runtime limits enforced by Salesforce to ensure efficient use of resources and maintain the performance of the
multi-tenant environment. These limits include constraints on the number of SOQL queries, DML operations, CPU time, heap size,
and other resource-intensive activities per transaction. Governor limits prevent any single user or organization from monopolizing
shared resources, ensuring fair usage across all tenants. For example, a single Apex transaction cannot execute more than 100
SOQL queries.

147. What is Sandbox in Salesforce?

In Salesforce, a Sandbox is my go-to playground for development, testing, and training without risking the live production
environment. It’s a replica of our Salesforce organization where I can experiment with new features, customizations, and
integrations before deploying them to production. Sandboxes come in various types like Developer, Partial Copy, Full, and Scratch
Sandboxes, each tailored to different needs based on data volume and complexity. I rely on Sandboxes to validate changes,
troubleshoot issues, and train users effectively. They’re essential for ensuring smooth deployments and maintaining data integrity.
These environments foster innovation by providing a safe space for iterative development and testing, helping me deliver high-
quality Salesforce solutions aligned with our business goals.

Read more about Types of sandboxes in Salesforce.

148. What is an App in Salesforce?

An App in Salesforce is a collection of objects, tabs, and other components that work together to support a specific business
function. Apps can be standard, like Sales and Service, or custom-built to meet specific business requirements. An app provides a
customized user interface for users to interact with the necessary objects and data for their tasks. For example, a custom Project
Management App might include custom objects for Projects, Tasks, and Milestones, with corresponding tabs and components.

149. What is Visualforce in Salesforce?

Visualforce is a framework within Salesforce that I use to craft custom user interfaces tailored to our organization’s needs. It allows
me to design web pages using markup tags similar to HTML, enhanced with Apex, Salesforce’s programming language. With
Visualforce, I can create forms, tables, and other components that interact seamlessly with Salesforce data and functionalities. By
writing controller classes in Apex, I can define how data is processed and displayed, ensuring our applications are intuitive and
efficient. Visualforce pages are instrumental in aligning our user interfaces with our branding and workflow requirements,
empowering us to build bespoke solutions that extend Salesforce’s capabilities to precisely match our business objectives.

What are Auto-Response Rules in Salesforce?

150. Explain How Salesforce CRM used by organizations?
Salesforce CRM is used by organizations to manage customer relationships and streamline business processes across sales,
service, marketing, and other functions. It provides tools for tracking customer interactions, managing sales pipelines, automating
workflows, and analyzing data to improve decision-making. Organizations use Salesforce CRM to centralize customer information,
improve collaboration, enhance customer service, and drive sales growth. For example, a sales team might use Salesforce to track
leads and opportunities, forecast sales, and automate follow-up tasks, resulting in increased efficiency and higher conversion rates.

151. What are the differences between Sales Cloud and Service Cloud?

Sales Cloud Service Cloud

Focuses on driving sales and managing leads Focuses on customer service and support

Helps track sales performance and forecasting Helps manage and resolve customer service cases

Includes features like opportunity management Includes features like case management and SLAs

Tailored for sales teams to close deals efficiently Tailored for support teams to provide better service
Sales Cloud Vs Service Cloud
Sales Cloud: Designed to support sales processes, Sales Cloud provides tools for managing leads, opportunities, accounts,
contacts, and sales performance. It includes features like lead management, sales forecasting, workflow automation, and
integration with email and productivity tools.
Service Cloud: Focuses on customer service and support, offering tools for case management, knowledge base, service
contracts, and field service. It includes features like case routing, service console, omnichannel support, and integration with social
media for customer service.
Sales Cloud primarily helps sales teams close deals faster, while Service Cloud aims to enhance customer satisfaction and support
efficiency.
152. Can you provide an example of a custom app you could build on the
Salesforce platform?

A custom app on the Salesforce platform could be a “Project Management App.” This app might include custom objects like
Projects, Tasks, and Milestones, each with fields capturing relevant data such as project deadlines, task owners, and milestone
completion dates. The app could have Visualforce or Lightning components for creating and viewing projects, assigning tasks, and
tracking progress. Workflow rules or process automation tools could be used to send notifications and update statuses
automatically. Reports and dashboards would provide insights into project performance, helping teams stay on track and manage
resources effectively.

153. What is a Queue in Salesforce?

A Queue in Salesforce is a powerful tool that I often use to manage and distribute work efficiently across teams. It acts as a holding
place for records, such as leads, cases, or custom objects, that are awaiting processing by users or automated processes. As an
experienced consultant, I leverage Queues to ensure tasks are appropriately assigned based on criteria like region, product type, or
priority. This helps streamline workflows and ensures that no work item falls through the cracks. Queues are highly flexible; they
can be configured to automatically assign records to team members or allow users to manually take ownership of items as they
become available. This functionality not only enhances productivity but also promotes collaboration by providing transparency into
workload distribution and ensuring timely resolution of customer issues and requests.

154. Explain the term “Data Skew” in Salesforce

Data skew in Salesforce refers to performance and data integrity issues that arise when a single record, such as an Account, has a
very high number of related records, like Contacts or Opportunities. This can cause locking problems and degraded performance
during data operations. There are three main types of data skew: ownership skew, lookup skew, and parent-child skew. For
example, ownership skew occurs when one user owns a disproportionately large number of records, which can lead to locking
issues during record updates.

155. What is the difference between SOQL and SOSL?

SOQL (Salesforce Object Query Language) SOSL (Salesforce Object Search Language)

Used to query records from a single object or multiple objects that are related Used to search text, email, and phone fields for multiple
to each other objects

Can search across multiple objects and fields in a single

Can query data from database tables directly query

Syntax is similar to SQL with SELECT statements Syntax includes FIND and RETURNING clauses

Retrieves data based on specific criteria Retrieves data based on keywords or text match

SOQL (Salesforce Object Query Language): Used to query records from a single object or multiple related objects. It is similar to
SQL and allows precise querying based on specific field criteria. For example, querying all accounts with a specific industry.
SOSL (Salesforce Object Search Language): Used to perform text searches across multiple objects. It returns records that
match the search term from specified objects. SOSL is useful for broad searches across multiple objects and fields. For example,
searching for a term across all accounts, contacts, and opportunities.
156. What is an Apex transaction?

An Apex transaction in Salesforce is a fundamental concept that I deal with regularly in my role as a consultant. It refers to a
sequence of operations that are executed as a single unit of work. Every time Apex code is executed, whether triggered by user
interaction, API call, or system process, it initiates a transaction. These transactions ensure data integrity and consistency by either
committing all changes to the database at once or rolling back changes if an error occurs.

As an experienced consultant, I carefully manage Apex transactions to optimize performance and maintain reliable application
behavior. I use techniques like bulk processing to handle large volumes of data efficiently within transaction limits. Understanding
transaction boundaries and governor limits is crucial, as exceeding these limits can lead to runtime exceptions or performance
degradation. By mastering Apex transactions, I ensure that our Salesforce applications operate smoothly, providing users with a
seamless experience while safeguarding data integrity throughout every operation.

4. What is a public cloud?

Answer: Public Cloud – In simple terms, it’s a hosting solution where your data is stored in the provider’s data center. He is
accountable for maintaining and manage the data center and is being shared with other organizations. Salesforce is a public cloud.